(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "Lycoming College catalog"

LYCOMING 
COLLEGE 



Founded 1812 



Williamsport, Pennsylvania 



CATALOG '8 6 -'8 



i 



Digitized by the Internet Archive 

in 2010 with funding from 

Lyrasis Members and Sloan Foundation 



http://www.archive.org/details/lycomingcollegec198687lyco 




LYCOMING 
COLLEGE 



Founded 1812 



Williamsport, Pennsylvania 




CATALOG '8 6 - '8 7 



Communicating with Lycoming College 



Please address specific inquiries as follows: 

Director of Admissions: 

Admissions; requests for publications 

Treasurer: 

Payment of bills; expenses 

Director of Financial Aid: 

Scholarships and loan fund: financial assistance 

Dean of College: 

Academic programs; faculty; faculty activities 

Dean of Student Services: 

Some activities; residence halls; religious life; health services: 
academic support services 

Registrar: 

Student records; transcript requests; academic policies 

Career Development Center: 

Career counseling; employment opportunities 

Executive Director for College Advancement: 
Institutional relations; annual fund; gift programs 

Director of Alumni and Parent Relations: 
Alumni information: parent support 

Director of Public Relations: 

Public information; publications; sports information; media relations 

All correspondence should be addressed to: 
Lycoming College 
Williamsport, Pennsylvania 17701 

The College telephone number is (717) 321-4000 



Visitors 



Lycoming welcomes visitors to the campus. If you would like a guided tour, call 
the Office of Admissions (717) 321-4126 before your visit to arrange a mutually 
convenient time. 

Toll Free Numbers 

Pennsylvania Only 1-800-235-3920 

Outside Pennsylvania 1-800-345-3920 



Lycoming College welcomes applications from prospective students regardless of age. sex. race, 
religion, handicap, finances, national or ethnic origin, or color Lycoming does not discriminate on the 
basis of age. sex, race, religion, handicap, finances, national or ethnic origin, or color in the 
administration of any of its policies and programs 



Contents 

Welcome to Lycoming 3 

The Academic Program 5 

The Curriculum 21 

Student Services 60 

Admission 62 

Financial Matters 64 

The Campus 68 

Academic Calendar, 1986-1987 70 

Directory 71 

The Alumni Association 80 

Index 81 



The general regulations and policies slated in this catalog are in effect for the 14X6-87 academic year Students 
beginning their firM term at Lycoming College in the fall of I486 or the spring of IV87 arc thereafter governed b> the 
policies stated in this catalog. Requirements governing a student's major are those in effect at the time a major is 
formally declared and officially accepted by the major department. 

If changes are made in subsequent editions of the catalog to either general requirements or major requirements, 
students may be permitted the option of following their original program or a subsequent catalog version, but the 
College alwavs reserves the right to determine which requirements apply 

II a student interrupts his or her education without a leave of absence, the catalog requirements in etlect at the lime of 
rcadmission will applv Students on an approved leave ot absence retain the same requirements they had when they 
entered, if their leaves do not extend beyond one year 

Lycoming College reserves the right to amend or change the policies and procedures stated in this catalog without 
prior notice to those who may be affected by them The provisions of this publication are not to be regarded as an 
irrevocable contract between the applicant andor the student and Lycoming College 



Welcome to Lycoming 



Lycoming is an independent, coeduca- 
tional college dedicated to providing the 
type of learning that can be used for a 
lifetime — the liberal arts and sciences. 

Lycoming's academic relevance 
derives from its enduring commitment to 
the value of this type of education, as 
offered by a superior teaching faculty. 
The College's principal aim is to help 
students develop a central core of inte- 
grated values, skill, information, and 
strategies while they learn to communi- 
cate, reason, make decisions, under- 
stand, and use their imagination. This 
type of education can lead to productive 
and fulfilling lives in many fields while 
allowing lifelong growth and develop- 
ment. 

Lycoming awards bachelor of arts 
degrees in 30 major fields, a bachelor of 
fine arts degree in sculpture, and a 
bachelor of science degree in nursing. 
The curriculum is challenging. Because 
it is built upon the two principles of the 



liberal arts known as distribution and 
concentration, it allows students to study 
in breadth and depth. 

Students who have special interests 
not met entirely by a major field can 
design their own majors. Or, if they are 
interested in teaching, medicine, law, 
dentistry, or the ministry, they can take 
courses needed to enter their advanced 
study. 

Students also can study engineering, 
forestry or environmental studies, 
podiatric medicine, optometry, medical 
technology, and sculpture through 
cooperative programs operated by 
Lycoming with other colleges and uni- 
versities. Or, they can study abroad or in 
Philadelphia, Pa., Washington, D.C., or 
New York City through other off- 
campus study programs. 

Most students complete their program 
of study in four years, usually by taking 
four courses each fall and spring semes- 
ter. But students also can take one course 




during Lycoming's May term, or two 
courses during the summer term. 

Recognizing students' concerns about 
careers, Lycoming offers extensive 
counseling through the Career Develop- 
ment Center and advisory committees for 
prelaw, prehealth professions, and pre- 
medical students. The College also oper- 
ates a wide-ranging internship program 
that allows students to earn academic 
credit while working at area businesses, 
government offices, and nonprofit orga- 
nizations. 

Lycoming's ratio of faculty to students 
is 15 to one, which means that most 
classes are small and there is abundant 
opportunity for individual attention. All 
faculty members teach. More than 70 
percent of Lycoming's faculty hold the 
highest degrees in their fields from the 
nation's outstanding colleges and univer- 
sities. And, faculty members take their 
advising seriously. They care about stu- 
dents, and encourage and guide them so 
they receive the education they want. 

Eighteen buildings sit on Lycoming's 
main campus. Most of them have been 
built since 1950. The modern buildings 
include the eight residence halls; the 
library; the Academic Center, which 
houses the Arena Theatre, planetarium, 
computer center, and art gallery; the stu- 
dent union; the physical education/ 
recreation center, including a six-lane, 
25-yard pool; a completely renovated 
fine arts center with excellent facilities to 
accommodate sculpture, painting, 
drawing, printmaking, ceramics and 
photography; and a music building, 
which houses individual music practice 
rooms and an electronic-music studio. 

Lycoming houses approximately 900 
of its 1,250 students in the residence 
halls, which include double and single 
rooms. Most students find the campus 
friendly and comfortable, with all of the 
buildings easy to reach from anywhere 
on campus. Students come from a variety 
of economic classes, religious beliefs, 
and geographic areas, although most stu- 
dents call Pennsylvania, New Jersey, or 
New York their home. They work and 
play together in an atmosphere of respect 
and tolerance. 

The College offers a variety of extra- 



curricular activities. The 1986-87 Artist 
Series includes 42nd Street. Lorin Hol- 
lander with the Northeastern Philhar- 
monic. A Christmas Carol and An Even- 
ing with Marcel Marceau. Rich in 
diversity, previous Artist Series have 
brought satirist Mark Russell, interna- 
tionally acclaimed cellist Boris Per- 
gamenschikow. and the successful 
Broadway musical On Your Toes to 
Williamsport. Admission to all Artist 
Series events is free for Lycoming stu- 
dents. Student government groups help 
to plan campus activities and social 
events. Numerous clubs, honor societ- 
ies, social fraternities and sororities, the 
student newspaper, yearbook and liter- 
ary magazine, and the band and widely 
acclaimed choir meet other student inter- 
ests. Students who like to perform or 
compete can act on the Arena Theatre 
stage or play on intercollegiate or intra- 
mural sports teams. Intercollegiate teams 
for men include football, soccer, basket- 
ball, wrestling, tennis, golf, swimming, 
track and field, and cross country. Inter- 
collegiate teams for women include 
basketball, tennis, field hockey, swim- 
ming, track and field, and cross country. 



In addition, students who like hiking, 
backpacking, skiing, camping, fishing. 
hunting, kasaking. spelunking, and 
other outdoor sports will find Lycom- 
ing's location ideal. 

Lycoming is situated on a slight 
prominence near downtown Williams- 
port, a small city nestled along the West 
Branch of the Susquehanna River in 
northcentral Pennsylvania's rolling hills 
and valleys. Yet. the College is within a 
four-hour drive of metropolitan centers 
such as New York City, Philadelphia. 
Pittsburgh. Washington. DC, Balti- 
more. Syracuse, Rochester, and the New 
Jersey shore points. The Williamsport- 
metro area is home to about 75.000 per- 
sons. 

Lycoming enjoys a relationship with 
The United Methodist Church. It sup- 
ports the Methodist tradition of provid- 
ing an education for persons of all faiths. 

Fully accredited, Lycoming is a mem- 
ber of the Middle States Association of 
Colleges and Schools, and the University 
Senate of The United Methodist Church. 
It is a member of the Association of 
American Colleges, the Pennsylvania 
Association of Colleges and Universi- 



ties, the Commission for Independent 
Colleges and Universities, the National 
Commission on Accrediting, and the 
National Association of Schools and 
Colleges of The United Methodist 
Church. 



HISTORY 

Lycoming College was founded in 1812 
as the Williamsport Academy, an 
elementary and secondary school. 
Thirty-six years later, the academy 
became the Williamsport Dickinson 
Seminary under the patronage of The 
Methodist Episcopal Church. The semi- 
nary operated as a private boarding 
school until 1929, when a college curric- 
ulum was added and it became the Wil- 
liamsport Dickinson Seminary and 
Junior College. In 1947, the junior col- 
lege became a four-year degree-granting 
college of liberal arts and sciences. It 
adopted the name Lycoming, derived 
from the Indian word "lacomic," 
meaning "Great Stream." The word 
Lycoming has been common to north- 
central Pennsylvania since colonial days. 




Academic Program 



THE BACHELOR OF 
ARTS DEGREE 

Lycoming is committed to the principle 
that a liberal arts education is the best 
hope for an enlightened citizenry. Con- 
sequently, the bachelor of arts degree is 
conferred upon the student who has com- 
pleted an educational program incorpor- 
ating the two principles of the liberal arts 
known as distribution and concentration 
The objective of the distribution princi- 
ple is to insure that the student achieves 
breadth in learning through the study of 
the major dimensions of human inquiry: 
the humanities, the social sciences, and 
the natural sciences. The objective of the 
concentration principle is to provide 
depth of learning through completion of 
a program of study in a given discipline 
or subject area known as the major. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE 
BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE 

Every degree candidate is expected to 
complete the following requirements in 
order to qualify for graduation: 

— complete the distribution 
program. 

— complete a major consisting of at 
least eight courses while achieving 
a minimum grade point average of 
2.0 in those courses. 

— earn one year of credit in physical 
education. All students must dem- 
onstrate competence in swimming. 
(Medical exemptions may be 
granted by the College physician 
after an examination and review of 
the student's medical history and 
family physician's report.) 

— pass a minimum of 128 semester 
hours (32 unit courses) with a mini- 
mum cumulative average of 2.0. 
Additional credits beyond 128 
semester hours may be completed 
provided the minimum 2.0 cumu- 
lative average is maintained. 

— complete in residence the final 
eight courses offered for the degree 
at Lycoming. 

— satisfy all financial obligations 
incurred at the College. 

— complete the above requirements 



within seven years of continuous 
enrollment following the date of 
matriculation. 

All exemptions or waivers of specific 
requirements are made by the Committee 
on Academic Standing. 



THE BACHELOR OF 
FINE ARTS DEGREE 

The bachelor of fine arts degree is speci- 
fically designed to train professional 
artists. The BFA in sculpture is a synthe- 
sis of three diverse forms of education: a 
studio art program that emphasizes the 
skills and concepts of the visual lan- 
guage; an apprenticeship that takes tech- 
nical expertise as the departure point, 
and the scholastic method employed in 
both art history and the general- 
education component. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR 
THE BACHELOR OF 
FINE ARTS DEGREE 

Every BFA degree candidate is expected 
to complete the following requirements 
in order to qualify for graduation: 

— complete the 12-course Art 
Department course of study. 

— complete the distribution program. 

— complete a total of 32 course units 
achieving a minimum grade point 
average of 2.0 in those courses 
taken within the College. 

— complete one of the field speciali- 
zation apprenticeships at the John- 
son Atelier Technical Institute of 
Sculpture. 

— earn one year of credit in physical 
education. All students must dem- 
onstrate competence in swimming. 
(Medical exemptions may be 
granted by the College physician 
after an examination and review of 
the student's medical history and 
family physician's report.) 

— complete in residence the final 
eight courses offered for the degree 
at Lycoming. 

— satisfy all financial obligations 
incurred at the College. 



— have a public exhibition of original 
art work and make an oral defense. 

THE BACHELOR OF SCIENCE 
IN NURSING DEGREE 

The program of study leading to the 
bachelor of science in nursing degree is 
designed to prepare men and women as 
beginning practitioners of professional 
nursing, qualified for first-level posi- 
tions in a variety of health settings or for 
graduate study in nursing. Upon satis- 
factory completion of the program, a 
graduate is eligible to write the State 
Board of Nursing examination for licen- 
sure as a registered nurse . The goal of the 
program is to develop a liberally edu- 
cated and self-directed individual who is 
prepared to contribute to the welfare of 
the nation through the practice of profes- 
sional nursing which supports the prom- 
otion and restoration of health of indivi- 
duals and families in a variety of settings. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR 

THE BACHELOR OF SCIENCE 

IN NURSING DEGREE 

Every BSN degree candidate is expected 
to complete the following requirements 
in order to qualify for graduation: 

— complete the 13-course major with 
a minimum cumulative average of 
2.0, including the required May 
term following the junior year. 

— complete the distribution require- 
ments for the BSN degree. 

— complete a minimum of 128 
semester hours (32 units) with a 
minimum cumulative average of 
2.0. 

— earn one year of credit in physical 
education. All students must dem- 
onstrate competence in swimming. 
(Medical exemptions may be 
granted by the College physican 
after an examination and review of 
the student's medical history and 
family physician's report.) 

— complete in residence the final 
eight courses offered for the degree 
at Lycoming. 

— satisfy all financial obligations 
incurred at the College. 



— complete the degree requirements 
within a five-year period after 
admission to the nursing major. 
Candidates who are unable to meet 
this requirement must petition for 
an extension. 

WRITING ACROSS THE 
CURRICULUM PROGRAM 

I. Purpose 

The Lycoming College Writing 
Across the Curriculum Program has been 
developed in response to the conviction 
that writing skill promotes intellectual 
growth and is a hallmark of the educated 
person. The program has therefore been 
designed to achieve two major, interre- 
lated objectives: 

(1) to enhance student learning in 
general and subject mastery in parti- 
cular, and 

(2) to develop students' abilities to 
communicate clearly. In this pro- 
gram students are given opportuni- 
ties to write in a variety of contexts 
and in a substantial number of 
courses, in which they receive facul- 
ty guidance and reinforcement. 

II. Program Requirements 

In order to graduate from Lycoming 
all students must complete the following 
writing requirements: 

A. English 005, Developmental 
English, or exemption from the 
course. 

B. English 106, Composition, or 
exemption from the course. 

C. A writing component in all distri- 
bution courses completed at 
Lycoming. 

D. Two courses designated as 
writing-intensive, or "W" 
courses. 

( 1 ) Successful completion of 
English 106 is a prerequisite 
for enrollment in writing- 
intensive courses. 

(2) All courses designated "W" 
are numbered 200 or above. 

(3) Each student must complete 
one "W" course from among 
those offered by the major 
department, or, with depart- 
mental approval, from a 



related department. The other 
"W" course completed must 
be from a department other 
than the major department. In 
the case of students with 
multiple majors, one "W" 
course must be completed 
from one of those majors. 
The second course may be 
taken in one of the student's 
other majors. 
(4) Students should take one 
"W" course during the 
sophomore year and one dur- 
ing the junior year — though 
other sequences are possible 
and may in certain circum- 
stances be advisable. 

THE DISTRIBUTION PROGRAM 

A course can be used to satisfy only one 
distribution requirement. Courses for 
which a grade of "S" is recorded may not 
be used toward the fulfillment of the dis- 
tribution requirements. (Refer to page 10 
for an explanation of the grading sys- 
tem.) A course in any of the following 
distribution requirements refers to a full- 
unit (four semester hours) course taken at 
Lycoming, any appropriate combination 
of fractional unit courses taken at 
Lycoming which accumulate to four 
semester hours, or any single course of 
three or more semester hours transferred 
from another institution. For the BSN 
degree, see special modified distribution 
requirements on page 7. 

English — Students are required to 
demonstrate competence in basic writing 
skills and to pass English 106 and one 
other unit of English. Competence in 
basic writing skills may be demonstrated 
either by passing the Achievement Ex- 
amination in English Composition or by 
earning a Satisfactory in English 005. A 
student must demonstrate this compe- 
tence before being permitted to enroll in 
English 106. Unless impossible because 
of failure to complete English 005, En- 
glish 106 must be taken during the fresh- 
man year; English 106 or consent of in- 
structor is required before enrolling in 
any other English course. Students may 



choose any course from the department's 
offerings to satisfy the requirement for 
another unit in English. 

Foreign Language or Mathematics 

— Students are required to meet a mini- 
mum basic requirement in either a fore- 
ign language or the mathematical sci- 
ences. 

Foreign Language. Students may 
choose from among French. German. 
Greek. Hebrew, or Spanish and are re- 
quired to pass two courses on the in- 
termediate or higher course level. Place- 
ment at the appropriate course level will 
be determined by the faculty of the De- 
partment of Foreign Languages and 
Literatures. Students who have com- 
pleted two or more years of a given lan- 
guage in high school are not admitted for 
credit to the elementary course in the 
same foreign language except by written 
permission of the chairman of the depart- 
ment. French 228 and Spanish 331 will 
meet part of this requirement only if the 
section taught in the language is com- 
pleted. 

Mathematics. Students are required to 
demonstrate competence in basic algebra 
and to pass three units of Mathematical 
science other than Mathematics 005. 
Competence in basic algebra may be de- 
monstrated either by passing the basic 
algebra section of the Mathematics 
Placement Examination or by passing 
Mathematics 005. By demonstrating 
higher competence on the Mathematics 
Placement Examination, students may 
reduce the requirement to two units of 
mathematical science. No more than one 
unit may he taken in computer science. 

Religion or Philosophy — Students 
are required to pass two courses in either 
religion or philosophy. Any two religion 
courses may be used to fulfill the phi- 
losophy/religion distribution require- 
ment, with this exception: only one 
course from the combination Religion 
1 20- 1 2 1 may be selected for distribution. 

Fine Arts — Students are required to 
pass two courses as indicated in art. liter- 
ature, music, or theatre. 

Art. Any two courses. 



Literature. Any two literature courses 
selected from the offerings of the Depart- 
ments of English and Foreign Languages 
and Literatures (French. German, or 
Spanish). 

Music. Any combination of eight (8) 
credits, including applied music, ensem- 
ble, and music department courses. 

Theatre. The fine arts distribution re- 
quirement may be satisfied by selecting 
any two of the following recommended 
courses: Theatre 100. 110. 140, 148. 
332, 333, or other courses with the con- 
sent of the instructor. 

Natural Science — Students are re- 
quired to pass any two courses in one of 
the following disciplines: astronomy and 
physics, biology, or chemistry. 

History and Social Science — Students 
are required to pass two courses as indi- 
cated in economics, history, political sci- 
ence, psychology, or sociology/anthro- 
pology. 

Economics. Any two courses. 

History. Any two courses, except His- 
tory 222. 

Political Science. Any two courses. 

Psychology. Psychology 1 10 and one 
other course. 

Sociology! Anthropology. Sociology/ 
Anthropology 1 10 plus another course. 

THE DISTRIBUTION PROGRAM 
FOR THE BSN DEGREE 

English — standard requirement 

as shown above. 
Mathematical Sciences — compe- 
tence in basic algebra as demon- 
strated by completion of, or 
exemption from Math 005; 
Mathematics 103; and Computer 
Science 125 
Religion and Philosophy — Religion 

120 and Philosophy 119 
Fine Arts/Foreign Language — two 
courses from one department as 
follows: 

Art — any two (2) courses 
Literature — any two literature 
courses selected from the depart- 
ments of English and Foreign 
Languages and Literatures 
Music — any combination of eight 



(8) credits, including applied 
music, ensemble, and music 
department courses 

Theatre — any two (2) courses from 
among Theatre 100, 110. 140, 
148, 332. 333, or other courses 
with the consent of the instructor 

Language — any two (2) courses at 
the intermediate or higher level. 
No student who has had two or 
more years of a given foreign 
language in high school shall be 
admitted to the elementary 
courses in that same language for 
credit, except by written permis- 
sion of the chairman of the 
department. 
Natural Science — Chemistry 108, 

115 
Social Science — Psychology 1 10 and 

117; Sociology and anthropology 

— one time from among Soc 1 10, 

114, 220, 228, and 229. 
Physical Education — standard 

requirement as shown on page 5. 

THE MAJOR 

Students are required to complete a series 
of courses in one departmental or inter- 
disciplinary (established or individual) 
major. Specific course requirements for 
each major offered by the College are 
listed in the curriculum section of this 
catalog. Students must earn a 2.0 or 
higher grade-point average in those 
courses stipulated as comprising the 
major. (This requirement is not met by 
averaging the grades for all courses com- 
pleted in the major department.) Stu- 
dents must declare a major by the begin- 
ning of their junior year. Departmental 
and established interdisciplinary majors 
are declared in the Office of the Regis- 
trar, whereas individual interdisciplinary 
majors must be approved by the Com- 
mittee on Curriculum Development. Stu- 
dents may complete more than one 
major, each of which will be recorded on 
the transcript. Students may be removed 
from major status if they are not making 
satisfactory progress in the major. This 
action is taken by the Dean of the College 
upon the recommendation of the depart- 
ment, coordinating committee (for 



established interdisciplinary majors), or 
Curriculum Development Committee 
(for individual interdisciplinary majors). 
The decision of the Dean of the College 
may be appealed to the Academic Stand- 
ing Committee by the student involved or 
the recommending department or com- 
mittee. 

Departmental Majors — Departmental 

majors are available in the following 

areas: 

Accounting 

Art 

Astronomy 

Biology 

Business Administration 

Chemistry 

Computer Science 

Economics 

English 

Foreign Languages and Literatures 

French. German. Spanish 
History 
Mathematics 
Music 
Nursing 
Philosophy 
Physics 

Political Science 
Psychology 
Religion 

Sociology/Anthropology 
Theatre 

Established Interdisciplinary Majors 

— The following established interdis- 
ciplinary majors include course work in 
two or more departments: 

Accounting-Mathematical Sciences 

American Studies 

Criminal Justice 

International Studies 

Literature 

Mass Communication 

Near East Culture and Archaeology 

Individual Interdisciplinary Majors 

— Students may design a major that is 
unique to their needs and objectives and 
which combines course work in more 
than one department. This major is 
developed in consultation with the stu- 
dent's faculty advisor and with a panel of 



faculty members from each of the spon- 
soring departments. The application is 
acted upon by the Curriculum Develop- 
ment Committee. The major normally 
consists of 10 courses beyond those 
taken to satisfy the distribution require- 
ments. Students are expected to com- 
plete at least six courses at the junior or 
senior level. Examples of individual 
interdisciplinary majors are Racial and 
Cultural Minorities. Illustration in the 
Print Medium, Environmental Law, 
Advertising, Art/History, Art/Business, 
Human Behavior, and Images of Man. 

Major in Sculpture Leading to Bache- 
lor of Fine Arts Degree — Through a 
cooperative program with the Johnson 
Atelier Technical Institute of Sculpture, 
Mercerville, New Jersey, students may 
earn a BFA degree in sculpture. The 
major consists of a core academic pro- 
gram, a course of study in art, elective 
courses, and an apprenticeship at the 
Johnson Atelier. 



THE MINOR 

The College awards two kinds of minors, 
departmental and interdisciplinary, in 
recognition of concentrated course work 
in an area other than the student's major. 
All minors are subject to the following 
limitations: 

— a minor must include at least 
two courses which are not counted 
in the student's major. 

— a student may receive at most two 
minors. 

— students with two majors may 
receive only one minor; students 
with three majors may not receive a 
minor. 

— students may not receive a minor in 
their major discipline unless their 
major discipline is Art and the 
minor is Art History. (A discipline 
is any course of study in which a 
student can major. Tracks within 
majors are not separate discip- 
lines.) 

— a student may not receive a minor 
unless his average in the courses 



which count for his minor is a mini- 
mum of 2.00. 
— courses taken S/U may not be 
counted toward a minor. 

Students must declare their intention to 
minor by signing a form available in the 
Registrar's Office, getting required 
faculty signatures, and returning the 
completed form to the Records Room. 
When students complete a minor, the 
title will be indicated on their official 
transcript. Students must meet the 
requirements for the minor which are in 
effect at the time they declare a minor or 
which are in effect subsequent to that 
time and before they graduate. 

Departmental Minors — Require- 
ments for a departmental minor vary 
from department to department. Students 
interested in pursuing a departmental 
minor should consult that department for 
its policy regarding minors. 

Departmental minors are available in 
the following areas: 

ACCOUNTING 

Financial Accounting 

Managerial Accounting 

Federal Income Tax 
ART 

Art History 

Sculpture 

Painting 
BIOLOGY 
CHEMISTRY 
ECONOMICS 
ENGLISH 

Literature 

Writing 
FOREIGN LANGUAGES AND 

LITERATURES 

French 

German 

Spanish 
HISTORY 

American History 

European History 

History 
MASS COMMUNICATION 
MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES 

Computer Science 

Mathematics 



PHILOSOPHY 

Philosophy 

Philosophy and Law 

Philosophy and Science 

The History of Philosophy 
POLITICAL SCIENCE 

Political Science 

Foreign Affairs 

Legal Studies 
PSYCHOLOGY 
RELIGION 

SOCIOLOGY/ANTHROPOLOGY 
THEATRE 

Theatre History & Literature 

Performance 

Technical Theatre 



Interdisciplinary Minors — Interdis- 
ciplinary minors include coursework in 
two or more departments. Students inter- 
ested in interdisciplinary minors should 
consult the faculty coordinator of that 
minor. Interdisciplinary minors are 
available in the following areas: BIBLI- 
CAL LANGUAGES. CRIMINAL JUS- 
TICE, MASS COMMUNICATION, 
and WOMEN'S STUDIES. 

ACADEMIC ADVISEMENT 

One advantage of a small college is the 
rich experience gained by the close asso- 
ciation of students and faculty. The 
advisement program at Lycoming 
enables students to discuss academic and 
other problems as well as opportunities 
with faculty advisors, instructors, and 
the staffs of the Dean of the College and 
the Dean of Student Services. 

During the summer orientation, fresh- 
men are assigned a faculty advisor who is 
prepared to assist new students with the 
challenges of an unfamiliar social and 
academic environment. All students are 
required to have a faculty advisor. When 
students have declared a major, they are 
then assigned an advisor from within the 
major department or program. 

Although the advisement program is 
an important part of the Lycoming 
academic experience, students are 
expected to accept full responsibility for 
their academic programs, including 
satisfactory completion of program and 



College-wide requirements. 

Special advising for selected profes- 
sions is provided by the health, legal, and 
theological professions advisory com- 
mittees. Students interested in these pro- 
fessions should register with the appro- 
priate committee during their first 
semester of enrollment at Lycoming or 
immediately after they decide to enter 
these professions. 

Preparation for Health Professions 

— The program of pre-professional edu- 
cation for the health professions (allo- 
pathic, dental, osteopathic, podiatric and 
veterinary medicine, optometry, and 
pharmacy) is organized around a sound 
foundation in biology, chemistry, 
mathematics, and physics and a wide 
range of subject matter from the humani- 
ties, social sciences, and fine arts. At 
least three years of undergraduate study 
is recommended before entry into a pro- 
fessional school; the normal procedure is 
to complete the bachelor of arts degree. 

Students interested in one of the health 
professions or in an allied health career 
should make their intentions known to 
the admissions office when applying and 
to the Health Professions Advisory Com- 
mittee (HPAC) during their first semes- 
ter. The committee advises students con- 
cerning preparation for and application 
to health-professions schools. All pre- 
health professions students are invited to 
join the student Pre-Health Professions 
Association. (See also descriptions of the 
nursing program and of the cooperative 
programs in podiatric medicine, 
optometry, and medical technology.) 

Preparation for Legal Professions 

— Lycoming offers a strong academic 
preparation for students interested in law 
as a profession. Admission to law school 
is not predicated upon a particular major 
or area of study; rather, a student is 
encouraged to design a course of study 
(traditional or interdisciplinary major) 
which is of personal interest and signifi- 
cance. While no specific major is recom- 
mended, there are certain skills of partic- 
ular relevance to the pre-law student: 
clear writing, analytical thinking, and 
language comprehension. These skills 



should be developed during the under- 
graduate years. 

Pre-law students should register with 
the Legal Professions Advisory Com- 
mittee (LPAC) upon entering Lycoming 
and should join the Pre-Law Society on 
campus. LPAC assists the pre-law stu- 
dent through advisement, compilation of 
recommendations, and dissemination of 
information and materials about law and 
the legal profession. It sponsors Pre- 
LSAT workshops to help prepare stu- 
dents for the law boards. The Pre-Law 
Society has sponsored films, speakers, 
and field trips, including visits to law 
school campuses. 

Preparation for Theological Profes- 
sions — The Theological Professions 
Advisory Commiteee (TPAC) acts as a 
"center" for students, faculty, and cler- 
gy to discuss the needs of students who 
want to prepare themselves for the mini- 
stry, religious education, advanced 
training in religion, or related vocations. 
Also, it may help coordinate internships 
for students who desire practical experi- 
ence in the parish ministry or related 
areas. Upon entering Lycoming, stu- 
dents should register with TPAC if they 
plan to investigate the religious voca- 
tions. 

In general, students preparing to 
attend a theological seminary should 
examine the suggestions set down by the 
Association of Theological Schools 
(available from TPAC). Recommended 
is a broad program in the liberal arts, a 
major in one of the humanities (English, 
history, languages, literature, philoso- 
phy, religion) or one of the social sci- 
ences (American studies, criminal jus- 
tice, economics, international studies, 
political science, psychology, 
sociology-anthropology), and a variety 
of electives. Students preparing for a 
career in religious education should 
major in religion and elect five or six 
courses in psychology, education, and 
sociology. This program of study will 
qualify students to work as an education- 
al assistant or a director of religious edu- 
cation after graduate study in a theologi- 
cal seminary. 



REGISTRATION 

During the registration period, students 
select their courses for the next semester 
and register their course selections in the 
Office of the Registrar. Course selection 
is made in consultation with the student's 
faculty advisor in order to insure that the 
course schedule is consistent with Col- 
lege requirements and student goals. 
After the registration period, any change 
in the student's course schedule must be 
approved by both the faculty advisor and 
Office of the Registrar. Students may not 
receive credit for courses in which they 
are not formally registered. 

During the first five days of classes, 
students may drop any course without 
any record of such enrollment appearing 
on the permanent record, and they may 
add any course that is not closed. Stu- 
dents wishing to drop a course between 
the fifth day and the 12th week of classes 
must secure a withdrawal form from the 
Office of the Registrar, which is pre- 
sented to the instructor of the course in 
question, who assigns a withdrawal 
grade based on the level of the student's 
performance from the beginning of the 
course to the date of withdrawal. With- 
drawal grades are not computed in the 
grade point average. Students may not 
withdraw from courses after the 12th 
week of a semester and the comparable 
period during the May and summer 
terms. 

In two-credit ( Vi unit) courses meeting 
only during the last half of any semester, 
students may drop/add for a period of 
five days, effective with the mid-term 
date shown on the academic calendar. 
Withdrawal from half-semester courses 
with a withdrawal grade may occur with- 
in six weeks of the beginning of the 
course. It is understood that the period of 
time at the beginning of the semester and 
at the mid-point of the semester will be 
identical, for example, a period of five 
days as indicated above. 

THE UNIT COURSE SYSTEM 

Instruction at Lycoming College is orga- 
nized, with few exceptions, on a depart- 
mental basis. Most courses are unit 



courses, meaning that each course taken 
is considered to be equivalent to four 
semester hours of credit. Exceptions 
occur in applied music courses, which 
are offered for either one-half or one 
semester hour of credit, and in depart- 
ments that have elected to offer certain 
courses for the equivalent of two semes- 
ter hours of credit. Further, independent 
studies and internships carrying two 
semester hours of credit may be de- 
signed. The normal student course load 
is four courses during the fall and spring 
semesters. Students who elect to attend 
the special sessions may enroll in one 
course during the May term and one or 
two courses in the summer term. A stu- 
dent is considered full time when enrol- 
led for a minimum of three courses dur- 
ing the fall or spring semesters, one 
course for the May term, and two courses 
for the summer term. Students may en- 
roll in five courses during the fall and 
spring semesters if they are Lycoming 
Scholars or were admitted to the Dean's 
List at the end of the previous semester. 
Exceptions may be granted by the Dean 
of the College. Overloads are not permit- 
ted during the May and summer terms. 



THE SYSTEM OF GRADING 
AND REPORTING OF GRADES 

The evaluation of student performance in 
credit courses is indicated by the use of 
traditional letter symbols. These sym- 
bols and their definitions are as follows: 

A Excellent — Signifies superior 
achievement through mastery of content 
or skills and demonstration of creative 
and independent thinking. 
B High Pass — Signifies better-than- 
average achievement wherein the student 
reveals insight and understanding. 
C Pass — Signifies satisfactory 
achievement wherein the student's work 
has been of average quality and quantity. 
The student has demonstrated basic com- 
petence in the subject area and may 
enroll in additional course work. 
D Low Pass — Signifies unsatisfactory 
achievement wherein the student met 
only the minimum requirements for 



passing the course and should not con- 
tinue in the subject area without depart- 
mental advice. 

F Failing — Signifies that the student 
has not met the minimum requirements 
for passing the course. 
I Incomplete Work — Assigned in 
accordance with the restrictions of 
established academic policy. 
R A Repeated Course — Students shall 
have the option of repeating courses for 
which they already have received a pas- 
sing grade in addition to those which they 
have failed. Credit is received only once 
for the course. Grades will be averaged. 
S Passing Work, no grade assigned — 
Converted from traditional grade of A, 
B, C, or D. 

U Failing work, no grade assigned — 
converted from traditional grade of F. 
X Audit — Work as an auditor for which 
no credit is earned. 

W Withdrawal — Signifies withdrawal 
from the course early in the term when it 
cannot be determined that the student is 
passing or failing. 

WP Withdrawal, passing — The stu- 
dent was passing at the time of withdraw- 
al; no credit is earned. 
WF Withdrawal, failing — The student 
was failing at the time of withdrawal; no 
credit is earned. 

The cumulative grade point average 
(GPA) is calculated by multiplying qual- 
ity points by credits and dividing the total 
quality points by the total credits. A 
quality point is the unit of measurement 
of the quality of work done by the stu- 
dent. 

Quality Points 
Earned 
Grade for each semester 

hour 
A 4.00 

A- 3.67 

B+ 3.33 

B 3.00 

B- 2.67 

C+ 2.33 

C 2.00 

C- 1.67 

D+ 1.33 

D 1.00 

D- 0.67 

F 0.00 



The grade point average for the major 
is calculated in the same manner for the 
courses required for the major. 

A minimum of 2.00 is required for the 
cumulative grade point average and for 
the grade point average in the major to 
meet the requirements for graduation. 
You cannot compute your cumulative 
GPA by averaging your semester GPA's. 

Use of the satisfactory/unsatisfactory 
grading option is limited as follows (this 
does not apply to Education 005 and En- 
glish 005): 

— students may enroll on an 
S/U basis in no more than one 
course per semester and no more 
than four courses during the under- 
graduate career. 

— S/U courses completed after decla- 
ration of the major may not be used 
to satisfy a requirement of that 
major, including courses required 
by the major department which are 
offered by other departments. 
(Instructor-designated courses are 
excepted from this limitation.) 

— courses for which a grade of S is 
recorded may not be used toward 
fulfillment of any distribution 
requirement. 

— students may not enroll in English 
6 on an S/U basis. 

— a course selected on an S/U basis 
which is subsequently withdrawn 
will not count toward the four- 
course limit. 

— instructor-designated courses may 
be offered during the May term 
with the approval of the Dean of 
the College. Such courses are not 
counted toward the four-course 
limit. 

— S/U grades are not computed in the 
grade point average. 

— students electing the S/U option 
may designate a minimum accep- 
tance letter grade of A or B. If the 
letter grade actually earned by the 
student equals orexceeds this mini- 
mum, that letter grade is entered on 
the student's permanent record and 
is computed in the grade point 
average. In such a case, the course 
does not count toward the four- 



10 



course limit. If the student does not 
indicate a minimum acceptable 
letter grade or if the letter grade 
actually earned is lower than the 
minimum designated by the stu- 
dent, the Registrar substitutes an S 
for any passing grade (A. B, C, or 
D) and a U for an F grade, 
students receiving either an S or U 
grade are not eligible for the 
Dean's List for that semester, 
students must declare the S/U 
option before the end of the period 
during which courses may be 
added during any given semester, 
half-semester, or term, 
instructors are not notified which 
of their students are enrolled on an 
S/U basis. 

students electing the S/U option are 
expected to perform the same work 
as those enrolled on a regular basis. 

Incomplete grades may be given 
if. for absolutely unavoidable rea- 
sons (usually medical in nature), 
the student has not been able to 
complete the work requisite to the 
course. An incomplete grade must 
be removed within six weeks of the 
next regular semester. 

Students shall have the option of 
repeating courses for which they 
already have received a passing 
grade in addition to those which 
they have failed. Recording of 
grades for all repeated courses shall 
be governed by the following con- 
ditions: 

■ a course may be repeated 
only one time. 

■ both attempts will be recorded on 
the student's transcript. 

- credit for the course will be given 
only once. 

- for the purpose of determining the 
student's GPA, the average grade 
received for the two attempts will 
be used as if it were the grade for a 
single course. 

- a repeated course will be counted 
toward the total number of unsuc- 
cessful attempts. 



ATTENDANCE 

The academic program at Lycoming is 
based upon the assumption that there is 
value in class attendance for all students. 
Individual instructors have the preroga- 
tive of establishing reasonable absence 
regulations in any course. The student is 
responsible for learning and observing 
these regulations. 



STUDENT RECORDS 

The policy regarding student educational 
records is designed to protect the privacy 
of students against unwarranted intru- 
sions and is consistent with Section 438 
of the General Education Provision Act 
(commonly known as the Family Educa- 
tional Rights and Privacy Act of 1974, as 
amended). The details of the College 
policy on student records and the proce- 
dures for gaining access to student 
records are contained in the current issue 
of The Pathfinder, which is available in 
the library and the Office of the Dean of 
the College. 



ACADEMIC STANDING AND 
ACADEMIC HONESTY 

Students will be placed on academic 
probation if either the number of hours 
completed or cumulative grade point 
average falls below the following stan- 
dards: 

Semester Hours Cumulative 

(Full-time) Completed GPA 

1 12 1.66 

2 24 1.85 

3 40 1 .90 

4 56 2.00 

5 72 2.00 

6 88 2.00 

7 104 2.00 

8 120 2.00 

In order to meet graduation require- 
ments, students must complete 128 cre- 
dit hours. Students who are enrolled part 
time or for fewer than the normal four 
courses per term will be expected to 



complete an equivalent proportion of 
their program each semester. 

Students will be subject to suspension 
from the College if they: 



— are on probation for two con- 
secutive semesters; 

— achieve a grade point average of 
1.00 or below during any one 
semester. 

Students will be subject to dismissal 
from the College if they: 

— can not reasonably complete all 
requirements for a degree; 

— exceed 24 semester hours of unsuc- 
cessful course attempts (grades of 
F, U, W. WP, WF, and R) except 
in the case of withdrawal for medi- 
cal or psychological reasons. 

The integrity of the academic process of 
the College requires honesty in all phases 
of the instructional program. The Col- 
lege assumes that students are committed 
to the principle of academic honesty. 
Students who fail to honor this commit- 
ment are subject to dismissal. Procedural 
guidelines and rules for the adjudication 
of cases of academic dishonesty are 
printed in The Faculty Handbook and 
The Pathfinder (the student academic 
handbook ) , copies of which are available 
in the library. 



CREDIT BY EXAMINATION 

Advanced Placement — Entering fresh- 
men who have completed an advanced 
course while in secondary school and 
who have taken the appropriate 
advanced-placement examination of the 
College Entrance Examination Board 
(CEEB) are encouraged to apply for cre- 
dit and advanced placement at the time of 
admission. A grade of three or above is 
considered satisfactory. Students should 
inform the Registrar's Office and their 
academic advisor immediately when 
advanced placement examinations have 
been taken. 



11 



College Level Examination Pro- 
gram (CLEP) — Students may earn 
college credit for superior achievement 
through CLEP. By achieving at the 75th 
percentile or above on the General 
Examinations and the 65th percentile or 
above on approved Subject Examina- 
tions, students may earn up to 50 percent 
of the course requirements for a bachelor 
of arts degree. Although these examina- 
tions may be taken after enrollment, new 
students who are competent in a given 
area are encouraged to take the examina- 
tion of their choice during the second 
semester of their senior year so that 
Lycoming will have the test scores avail- 
able for registration advisement for the 
first semester of enrollment. Further 
information about CLEP may be 
obtained through the secondary-school 
guidance office or the Office of Admis- 
sions or the Registrar at Lycoming Col- 
lege. Students should inform the Regi- 
strar's Office and their academic advisor 
immediately when CLEP examinations 
have been taken. 



ACADEMIC HONORS 

Dean's List — Students are admitted to 
the Dean's List at the end of the fall and 
spring semesters if they have completed 
at least 15 credits with other than S/U or 
R grades, and have a minimum grade 
point average of 3.50 for the semester. 

Graduation Honors — Students are 
awarded the bachelor of arts degree, the 
bachelor of fine arts degree, or the 
bachelor of science in nursing degree 
with honors when they have earned the 
following grade point averages based on 
all courses attempted at Lycoming, with 
a minimum of 64 credits (16 units) 
required for a student to be eligible for 
honors: 

summa cum laude 3.90-4.00 

magna cum laude 3.50-3.89 

cum laude 3.25-3.49 

Academic Honor Awards, Prizes, 
and Societies — Superior academic 
achievement is recognized through the 
conferring of awards and prizes at the 



annual Honors Day convocation, the 
Academic Awards banquet, and Com- 
mencement and through election to 
membership in honor societies. 

Societies 

Blue Key Freshmen Men 

Gold Key Freshmen Women 

Beta Beta Beta Biology 

Sigma Tau Delta English 

Omicron Delta Epsilon Economics 

Phi Alpha Theta History 

Phi Sigma Tau Philosophy 

Sigma Pi Sigma Physics 

Pi Sigma Alpha ... Political Science 

Psi Chi Psychology 

Pi Gamma Mu Social Science 

Phi Kappa Phi ... General Academic 



Prizes and Awards 

American Chemical Society Award — 
The award, sponsored by the Susquehan- 
na Valley Chapter of the society, is given 
to the outstanding senior in chemistry 
who plans to enter the profession. 

Accounting Societ}' Service Award — 
The award is given for outstanding ser- 
vice to the Lycoming College Account- 
ing Society. 

American Institute of Chemists Prize — 
The prize, given by the Philadelphia sec- 
tion of the institute, goes to the senior 
major for excellence in chemistry. 

Byron C. Brunstetter Science Award — 

The award is given for outstanding 
achievement in chemical and biological 
sciences. 

CRC Press Chemistry Achievement 
Award - - The award is given to the 
freshman who has exhibited outstanding 
academic achievement in chemistry. 

Chieftain Award — The College's most 
prestigious award is given to the senior 

who has contributed most to Lycoming 
through support of school activities; who 
has exhibited outstanding leadership 
qualities; who has worked effectively 
with other members of the College com- 



munity; who has evidenced a good moral 
code; and whose academic rank is above 
the median for the preceding senior 
class. 

Civic Choir Award — The award is given 
to the College choir member who has 
outstanding musical ability and who has 
made significant leadership contribu- 
tions to the choir. 

Class of 1907 Prize — The prize is given 
to the senior who has been oustanding in 
the promotion of College spirit through 
participation in athletics and other activ- 
ities. 

Benjamin C. Conner Prize — The prize 
is given to the graduating student who 
has done outstanding work in mathema- 
tics. 

Durkheim Award — The award is given 
to the senior sociology/anthropology 
major who has done outstanding work in 
the field. 

Bishop William Perry Eveland Prize — 
The prize is given to the senior who has 
shown progress in scholarship, loyalty, 
school spirit, and participation in school 
activities. 

Excellence in Two-Dimensional Art 
Award — The award is given to the 
outstanding senior art major in this field. 

Excellence in Three-Dimensional Art 
Award — The award is given to the 
outstanding senior art major in this field. 

Excellence in Theatre Performance 
Award — The award is given to the 
student who has been outstanding as a 
performer in the Arena Theatre. 

Excellence in Technical Theatre Award 
— The award is given to the student who 
has been outstanding as a technician for 
the Arena Theatre. 

Excellence in Political Science Award — 
The award goes to the senior political 
science major who has performed with 
excellence. 



12 



W. Arthur Faus Memorial Prize — Prize 
given in memory of Dr. W. Arthur Faus. 
a former Professor of Philosophy at 
Lycoming College, to the graduating 
senior who has done outstanding work in 
philosophy. 

J.W. Ferree Award — Given in memory 
of the first mathematics professor at 
Lycoming's forerunner, the Dickinson 
Seminary, the award goes to the student 
most active in mathematical sciences. 

Faculty Prize — The prize is given to the 
commuting student with satisfactory 
scholarship and who has been outstand- 
ing in promotion of school spirit through 
participation in school activities. 

Durant L. Furey III Memorial Prize — 
The prize is given to the senior account- 
ing major who has shown outstanding 
achievement in accounting. 

Gillette Foreign Language Prizes — The 
prizes are given to the French. German, 
and Spanish majors who have achieved 
excellence in foreign languages. 

John P. Graham Award — Named in 
honor of a professor emeritus, the award 
is given to the senior English major who 
achieves the highest average in English. 

Edward J . Gray Prizes — The prizes are 
given to the graduating students with the 
highest and second highest averages. 

Dan Gustaj son Award — In memory of a 
former member of the English Depart- 
ment, the award is given to the senior 
English major whose analytical writing 
demonstrates the highest standards of 
literary and critical excellence. 

IRUSKA Awards — The awards denote 
membership in the society for juniors 
who are very active on campus. 

Junior Book Award — The award is 
given to the outstanding junior political 
science major. 

Elisha Benson Kline Prize — The pn ze i s 
given to the senior mathematics major 



with outstanding achievement in the 
field. 

Charles J. Kocian Awards — The 
awards are given to the accounting, busi- 
ness administration, and economics 
majors who show the greatest proficien- 
cy in statistics; the mathematics major 
who shows the greatest proficiency in 
applied mathematics; the graduating 
senior who shows the greatest proficien- 
cy in computer science and operations 
research; the graduating senior business 
administration major with highest grade 
point average and the graduating senior 
with highest average in the class. 

Don Lincoln Larrahee Law Prize — The 
prize is given to the graduating student 
who has shown outstanding scholarship 
in legal principles. 

C. Daniel and Jeanne Little Award — 
Presented in memory of two Lycoming 
alumni, the award is given to the out- 
standing student in public administra- 
tion. 

The Makisu Award — The award is given 
for outstanding service to the college 
community, for dedication above and 
beyond the realm of one*s obligations to 
the College. 

John C. McCune Memorial Prizes — 
The prizes are given to the senior majors 
in mathematics, biology, chemistry, 
physics, philosophy, and psychology 
who have attained the highest averages. 

Ethel McDonald Pax Christi Award — 
The award is given for outstanding but 
quiet consistency in the life of faith and 
the practice of Christianity, noteworthy 
personal integrity and humble loving 
compassion expressed in daily life. 

Walter G. Mclver Award — Named after 
Lycoming*s former choir director, the 
award is given to the choir member who 
has made outstanding campus contribu- 
tions outside of choir. 

Pennsylvania Institute of Certified Pub- 
lic Accountants Award — The award is 



given to the senior accounting major who 
has demonstrated high scholastic stand- 
ing and qualities of leadership. 

Pocahontas Award — The award is 
given to Lycoming's outstanding female 
athlete. 

Psi Chi Service Award — The award is 
given for contributions to the Psychology 
Department. 

Research and Writing Prize in History — 
The prize is given to the student who 
does the best work in History 45. 

Mary L. Russell Award — Named in 
honor of a professor emeritus of music. 
the award is given for outstanding musi- 
cal achievement. 

Sadler Prize — The prize is given to the 
student with the highest achievement in 
calculus, foundations of mathematics, 
algebra, and analysis. 

Senior Management Award — The 
award is given to the senior business 
major with the best senior project in 
Business Administration 41. 

Senior Scholarship Prize in History — 
The prize is given to the senior major 
with the highest average. 

Service to Lycoming Award — Spon- 
sored by the Office of Student Services, 
the award is given to students who have 
made outstanding contributions to 
Lycoming. 

Frances K. Skeath Award — The award 
is given to the senior with outstanding 
achievement in mathematics. 

J. Milton Skeath Award — The award is 
given for superior undergraduate 
achievement and potential for further 
work in psychology. 

John A. Street er Memorial Award in 
Economics — The award is given to the 
graduating student with outstanding 
achievement in economics. 



13 



Tomahawk Award — The award is given 
to Lycoming's outstanding male athlete. 

Trask Chemistry Prize — The prize is 
given to the senior chemistry major who 
has done outstanding work in the field. 

Wall Street Journal Awards — Two 
awards are given. One is given to the 
senior business major for excellence in 
the field and service to the College com- 
munity. A second award is given for 
excellence in economics. 

Sol "Woody" Wolf Award — The award 
is given to the junior athlete who has 
shown the most improvement. 

Women of Lycoming Scholarship — The 
scholarship is given to the junior woman 
student who has shown satisfactory 
scholarship, outstanding school spirit, 
and who is active in campus activities. 

Departmental Honors — Honors proj- 
ects are normally undertaken only in a 
student's major, and are available only to 
exceptionally well-qualified students 
who have a solid background in the area 
of the project and are capable of consid- 
erable self-direction. The prerequisites 
for registration in an honors program are 
as follows: 

— a faculty member from the 
department(s) in which the honors 
project is to be undertaken must 
agree to be the director and must 
secure departmental approval of 
the project. 

— the director, in consultation 
with the student, must convene a 
committee consisting of two facul- 
ty members from the department in 
which the project is to be undertak- 
en, one of whom is the director of 
the project, and one faculty mem- 
ber from each of two other depart- 
ments related to the subject matter 
of the study. 

— the honors committee must then 
certify by their signatures on the 
application that the project in 
question is academically legitimate 
and worthy of pursuit as an honors 



project, and that the student in 
question is qualified to pursue the 
project. 

— the project must be approved by the 
Committee on Individual Studies. 

Students successfully complete hon- 
ors projects by satisfying the following 
conditions in accordance with guide- 
lines established by the Committee on 
Individual Studies: 

— the student must produce a sub- 
stantial research paper, critical 
study, or creative project. If the 
end product is a creative project, a 
critical paper analyzing the tech- 
niques and principles employed 
and the nature of the achievement 
represented in the project shall be 
submitted. 

— the student must successfully 
explain and defend the work in a 
final oral examination given by the 
honors committee. 

— the honors committee must certify 
that the student has successfully 
defended the project, and that the 
student's achievement is clearly 
superior to that which would ordi- 
narily be required to earn a grade of 
"A" in a regular independent- 
studies course. 

— the Committee on Individual Stud- 
ies must certify that the student has 
satisfied all of the conditions men- 
tioned above. 

Except in unusual circumstances, honors 
projects are expected to involve 
independent study in two consecutive 
unit courses. Successful completion of 
the honors project will cause the desig- 
nation of honors in that department to be 
placed upon the permanent record. 
Acceptable theses are deposited in the 
College library. In the event that the 
study is not completed successfully or is 
not deemed worthy of honors, the stu- 
dent shall be re-registered in independent 
studies and given a final grade for the 
course. 



SPECIAL FEATURES 

Independent Studies — Independent 
studies are available to any qualified 
student who wishes to engage in and 
receive academic credit for any academi- 
cally legitimate course of study for which 
he or she could not otherwise receive 
credit. It may be pursued at any level 
(introductory, intermediate, or 
advanced) and in any department, 
whether or not the student is a major in 
that department. Studies projects which 
duplicate catalog courses are sometimes 
possible, and are subject to the same 
provisions which apply to all studies 
projects. In order for a student to be 
registered in an independent-study 
course, the following conditions must be 
satisfied: 

— an appropriate member of the 
faculty must agree to supervise the 
project and must certify by signing 
the application form that the proj- 
ect is academically legitimate and 
involves an amount of work appro- 
priate for the amount of academic 
credit requested, and that the stu- 
dent in question is qualified to 
pursue the project. 

— the studies project must be 
approved by the chairman of the 
department in which the studies 
project is to be undertaken. 

— after the project is approved by the 
instructor and by the chairman of 
the appropriate department, the 
studies project must be approved 
by the Committee on Individual 
Studies. 

In addition, participation in 
independent-studies projects, with the 
exception of those which duplicate cata- 
log courses, is subject to the following: 

— students may not engage in more 
than one independent-studies pro- 
ject during any given semester. 

— students may not engage in more 
than two independent-studies proj- 
ects during their academic careers 
at Lycoming College. 

As with other academic policies, any 



14 



exceptions to these two rules must be 
approved by the Academic Standing 
Committee. 

Internship Program — An internship is 
a course jointly sponsored by the College 
and a public or private agency or subdivi- 
sion of the College in which a student is 
enabled to earn college credit by partici- 
pating in some active capacity as an 
assistant, aide, or apprentice. At least 
one-half of the effort expended by the 
intern should consist of academic work 
related to agency situations. The objec- 
tives of the internship program are ( 1 ) to 
further the development of a central core 
of values, awarenesses, strategies, 
skills, and information through experi- 
ences outside the classroom or other 
campus situations, and (2) to facilitate 
the integration of theory and practice by 
encouraging students to relate their on- 
campus academic experiences more 
directly to society in general and to possi- 
ble career and other post-baccalaureate 
objectives in particular. 

Any junior or senior student in good 
academic standing may petition the 
Committee on Individual Studies for 
approval to serve as an intern. A maxi- 
mum of 16 credits can be earned through 
the internship program. Guidelines for 
program development, assignment of 
tasks and academic requirements, such 
as exams, papers, reports, grades, etc., 
are established in consultation with a 
faculty director at Lycoming and an 
agency supervisor at the place of intern- 
ship. 

Students with diverse majors have 
participated in a wide variety of intern- 
ships, including those with the Allen- 
wood Federal Prison Camp, Lycoming 
County Commissioners Office, Depart- 
ment of Environmental Resources, Head 
Start, Lycoming County Historical Soci- 
ety, business and accounting firms, law 
offices, hospitals, social service agen- 
cies, banks, and Congressional offices. 

May Term — The May term is a four- 
week voluntary session designed to pro- 
vide students with courses listed in the 
catalog and experimental and special 
courses that are not normally available 



during the fall and spring semesters and 
summer term. Some courses are offered 
on campus; others involve travel. A 
number offer interdisciplinary credit. 
Illustrations of the types of courses 
offered during the May term are: 

(a) Study-Travel: Cultural tours of 
Germany, Spain, and France; Archae- 
logical expeditions to the Middle East: 
Anthropological expeditions to study 
tri-cultural communities in New Mexico; 
Utopian Communities; Revolutionary 
and Civil War Sites; Colonial America 
on Tour; Art on the East Coast; The New 
Kingdom in Ancient Egypt. 

(b) On-Campus: Field Geology, Field 
Ornithology. Energy Economics. Writ- 
er's Seminar, Psychology of Group Pro- 
cesses, Collective Bargaining. Aquatic 
Biology, Medical Genetics, Energy 
Alternatives, White Collar Crime, 
Lasers and their Applications, Selected 
Short Story Writers and their Works, 
Popular Forms of Contemporary Fiction, 
Administrative and Organizational 
Behavior of Police, Plant and Green- 
house Management, and Street Law. 

Although participation in the May 
term is voluntary, student response has 
been outstanding with approximately 20 
percent of the student body enrolling. In 
addition to the courses themselves, 
attractions include small and informal 
classes and reduced tuition rates. 

Study Abroad — Students have the 
opportunity to study abroad under aus- 
pices of approved universities and agen- 
cies. While study abroad is particularly 
attractive to students majoring in foreign 
languages and literatures, this opportu- 
nity is open to all students in good 
academic standing. Mastery of a foreign 
language is desirable but not required in 
all programs. Dr. Richard Barker, assis- 
tant professor of foreign languages and 
literatures, serves as coordinator for the 
Study Abroad Program. Interested stu- 
dents may contact him about opportuni- 
ties available and procedural questions. 

NOTE: Lycoming College cannot assume 
responsibility for the health, safety, or welfare 
of any student engaged in or en route to or from 
any off-campus study or activity not under the 
exclusive jurisdiction of this institution. 



Auditors — Any person may audit 
courses at Lycoming at one-fourth tui- 
tion per course. Laboratory and other 
special fees must be paid in full. Exami- 
nations, papers, and other evaluation 
devices are not required of auditors, but 
individual arrangements may be made to 
complete such exercises with the consent 
of the instructor. The option to audit a 
course must be declared during the same 
period (currently five days) at the begin- 
ning of each semester, half-semester, or 
term as drop/add and pass/fail and must 
be completed in the Registrar's Office. 

Part Time Students — Students who 
do not wish to pursue a degree at 
Lycoming College may, if space per- 
mits, register for credit or audit courses 
on either a part-time or full-time basis. 
Students who register for one or two 
courses are considered to be enrolled part 
time; students who register for three or 
four courses are considered to be 
enrolled full time. 

Anyone wishing to register as a non- 
degree student must fill out an applica- 
tion form in the Admissions Office, pay a 
one-time application fee of $20, and pay 
the tuition rate in effect at the time of 
each enrollment. After a non-degree stu- 
dent has attempted four courses, the 
Dean of the College reserves the right to 
grant or deny permission to continue to 
register in this category. 

All non-degree students are subject to 
the general laws and regulations of the 
College as stated in the College Catalog 
and the Student Handbook. The College 
reserves the right to deny permission to 
register to individuals who do not meet 
the standards of the College. 

Students who wish to change from a 
non-degree to a degree status must re- 
apply (with no application fee) and satis- 
fy all conditions for admission and 
registration in effect at the time of appli- 
cation for degree status. 

COOPERATIVE PROGRAMS 

Lycoming has developed several 
cooperative programs to provide stu- 
dents with opportunities to extend their 
knowledge, abilities, and talents in 



15 



selected areas through access to the spe- 
cialized academic programs and facili- 
ties of other colleges, universities, 
academies, and hospitals. Although 
thorough advisement and curricular 
planning are provided for each ol the 
cooperative programs, admission to 
Lycoming and registration in the pro- 
gram of choice do not guarantee admis- 
sion to the cooperating institution. The 
prerogative of admitting students to the 
cooperative aspect of the program rests 
with the cooperating institution. Stu- 
dents who are interested in a cooperative 
program should contact the coordinator 
during the first week of the first semester 
of their enrollment at Lycoming. This is 
necessary to plan their course programs 
in a manner that will insure completion 
of required courses according to the 
schedule stipulated for the program. All 
cooperative programs require special 
coordination of course scheduling at 
Lycoming. 

Engineering — Combining the 
advantages of a liberal-arts education 
and the technical training of an engi- 
neering curriculum, this program is 
offered in conjunction with The Pennsyl- 
vania State University. Students com- 
plete three years of study at Lycoming 
and two years at the cooperating univer- 
sity. Upon satisfactory completion of the 
first year of engineering studies, 
Lycoming awards the bachelor of arts 
degree. When students successfully 
complete the second year of engineering 
studies, the cooperating university 
awards the bachelor of science degree in 
engineering. 

At Lycoming, students complete the 
distribution program and courses in 
physics, mathematics, and chemistry. 
The Pennsylvania State University offers 
aerospace, agricultural, chemical, civil, 
electrical, engineering science, environ- 
mental, industrial, mechanical, and 
nuclear engineering. 

Forestry or Environmental Studies 

— Lycoming College offers a coopera- 
tive program with Duke University in 
environmental management and forest- 
ry. Qualified students can earn the 



bachelor's and master's degrees in five 
years, spending three years at Lycoming 
and two years at Duke. All Lycoming 
distribution and major requirements 
must be completed by the end of the 
junior year. At the end of the first year at 
Duke, the A.B. degree will be awarded 
by Lycoming. Duke will award the pro- 
fessional degree of Master of Forestry or 
Master of Environmental Management 
to qualified candidates at the end of the 
second year. 

The major program emphases at Duke 
are Natural Resources Science/Ecology. 
Natural Resources Systems Science, and 
Natural Resources Economics/Policy. 
The program is flexible enough, howev- 
er, to accommodate a variety of individu- 
al designs. An undergraduate major in 
one of the natural sciences, social sci- 
ences, or business may provide good 
preparation for the programs at Duke, 
but a student with any undergraduate 
concentration will be considered for 
admission. All students need at least two 
courses each in biology, mathematics, 
and economics. 

Students begin the program at Duke in 
July after their junior year at Lycoming 
with a one-month session of field work in 
natural resource measurements. They 
must complete a total of 60 units which 
generally take four semesters. 

Some students prefer to complete the 
bachelor's degree before undertaking 
graduate study at Duke. The master's 
degree requirements for these students 
are the same as for those students enter- 
ing after the junior year, but the 60-unit 
requirement may be reduced for com- 
pleted relevant undergraduate work of 
satisfactory quality. All credit reductions 
are determined individually and consider 
the student's educational background 
and objectives. 

Medical Technology -- Students 
desiring a career in medical technology 
may either complete a bachelor of arts 
program followed by a clinical internship 
at any American Medical Association 
accredited hospital, or they may com 
plete the cooperative program. Students 
electing the cooperative program nor- 
mally study for three years at Lycoming. 



during which time they complete 24 unit 
courses, including the College distribu- 
tion requirements, a major, and require- 
ments of the National Accrediting Agen- 
cy for Clinical Laboratory Sciences 
(NAACLS). The current requirements of 
the NAACLS are: four courses in chem- 
istry (one of which must be either organic 
or bio-chemistry); four courses in biolo- 
gy (including courses in microbiology 
and immunology), and one course in 
mathematics. 

Students in the cooperative program 
usually major in biology, following a 
modified major of six unit courses that 
exempts them from Ecology (Biology 
224) and Plant Sciences (Biology 225). 
Students must take either Microbiology 
(Biology 221) or Microbiology for the 
Health Sciences (Biology 226). and 
either Animal Physiology (Biology 223) 
or Cell Physiology (Biology 335). The 
cooperative program requires successful 
completion of a one-year internship at an 
American Medical Association- 
accredited hospital. Lycoming is affil- 
iated with the following accredited hos- 
pitals: Divine Providence, Robert Pack- 
er, Lancaster, and Abington. Students in 
the cooperative program receive credit at 
Lycoming for each of eight unit courses 
in biology and chemistry successfully 
completed during the clinical internship. 
Successful completion of the Registry 
Examination is not considered a gradua- 
tion requirement at Lycoming College. 

Students entering a clinical internship 
for one year after graduation from 
Lycoming must complete all of the 
requirements of the cooperative pro- 
gram, but are not eligible for the biology 
major exemptions indicated above. 
Upon graduation, such students may 
apply for admission to a clinical program 
at any hospital. 

Optometry — Through the Acceler- 
ated Optometry Education Curriculum 
Program, students interested in a career 
in optometry may qualify for admission 
to the Pennsylvania College of Optome- 
try after only three years at Lycoming 
College. After four years at the Pennsyl- 
vania College of Optometry, a student 
will earn a Doctor of Optometry degree. 



Selection of candidates for the profes- 
sional segment of the program is com- 
pleted by the admissions committee of 
the Pennsylvania College of Optometry 
during the student's third year at 
Lycoming. (This is one of two routes that 
students may choose. Any student, of 
course, may follow the regular applica- 
tion procedures for admission to the 
Pennsylvania College of Optometry or 
another college of optometry to matricu- 
late following completion of his or her 
baccalaureate program.) During the 
three years at Lycoming College, the 
student will complete 24 unit courses, 
including all distribution requirements, 
and will prepare for his or her profession- 
al training by obtaining a solid founda- 
tion in biology, chemistry, physics, and 
mathematics. During the first year of 
study at the Pennsylvania College of 
Optometry, the student will take 39 
semester hours of basic science courses 
in addition to introductions to optometry 
and health care. Successful completion 
of the first year of professional training 
will complete the course requirements 
for the A.B. degree at Lycoming Col- 
lege. 

Most students will find it convenient 
to major in biology in order to satisfy the 
requirements of Lycoming College and 
the Pennsylvania College of Optometry. 
Such students are allowed to complete a 
modified biology major which will 
exempt them from two biology courses: 
Ecology (Biology 224) and Plant Sci- 
ences (Biology 225). (This modified 
major requires the successful completion 
of the initial year at the Pennsylvania 
College of Optometry.) Students desir- 
ing other majors must coordinate their 
plans with the Health Professions Advis- 
ory Committee in order to insure that 
they have satisfied all requirements. 

Podiatry — Students interested in 
podiatry may either seek admission to a 
college of podiatric medicine upon com- 
pletion of the bachelor of arts degree or 
through the Accelerated Podiatric Medi- 
cal Education-Curriculum Program 
(APMEC). The latter program provides 
an opportunity for students to qualify for 
admission to the Pennsylvania College of 



Podiatric Medicine (PCPM) or the Ohio 
College of Podiatric Medicine (OCPM) 
after three years of study at Lycoming. 
At Lycoming, students in the APMEC 
program must successfully complete 24 
unit courses, including the distribution 
program and a basic foundation in biolo- 
gy, chemistry, physics, and mathema- 
tics. During the first year of study at 
PCPM or OCPM. students must success- 
fully complete a program of basic sci- 
ence courses and an introduction to 
podiatry. Successful completion of the 
first year of professional training will 
contribute toward the fulfillment of the 
course requirements for the bachelor of 
arts degree at Lycoming. 

Most students in the cooperative pro- 
gram will major in biology; if so, they 
will be allowed to complete a modified 
major which will exempt them from two 
biology courses: Ecology (Biology 224) 
and Plant Sciences (Biology 225). (This 
modified major requires the successful 
completion of the initial year at PCPM or 
OCPM). 

Students interested in a career in 
podiatric medicine should indicate their 
intentions to the Health Professions 
Advisory Committee. 

Sculpture — The Art Department 
with the Johnson Atelier Technical 
Institute of Sculpture in Mercerville, 
New Jersey, offers a BFA degree in 
sculpture. It uses a classical apprentice- 
ship approach as its teaching method. 
This ancient method of teaching is com- 
bined at Johnson with the most modern 
and technically advanced foundry and 
fabricating techniques. 

The Art Department offers a synthesis 
program that interrelates the student 
experience at both institutions. This is 
achieved by having the student rotate 
between Lycoming and the atelier so that 
each torm of education is preparation for 
the other. Lycoming offers a core 
academic program, a course of study in 
the Art Department, and elective course 
opportunities. Lycoming gives eight 
course units of college credit to the stu- 
dent for having successfully completed 
one of the apprenticeship programs at the 
Johnson Atelier. 



All work completed by the student at 
Lycoming by the end of the sophomore 
year will be applicable to a bachelor of 
arts degree with a major in art should the 
student decide to withdraw from the BFA 
program. If the student should withdraw 
from the cooperative program prior to 
completing the apprenticeship at the 
Johnson Atelier, Lycoming will give up 
to four units of credit or one semester's 
work for the internship. If, however, the 
student completes more work at the atel- 
ier than the four units, that extra work 
will not be credited to the bachelor of arts 
degree; it will only be used as part of the 
bachelor of fine arts degree, and then 
only if the course at the atelier is com- 
pleted. 

This course of study is very rigorous. 
It will require that the student be 
involved almost continuously, either at 
Lycoming or at the Johnson Atelier, 
during the four years it will take to com- 
plete the degree. (See Art Department 
listing for specific program.) 

Reserve Officers Training Corps 
Program (R.O.T.C.) — The program 
provides an opportunity for Lycoming 
students to enroll in R.O.T.C. Lycoming 
notes enrollment in and successful com- 
pletion of the program on student tran- 
scripts. Military Science is a four-year 
program divided into a basic course 
given during the freshman and sopho- 
more years and an advanced course given 
during the junior and senior years. Stu- 
dents who have not completed the basic 
course may qualify for the advanced 
course by completing summer camp 
between the sophomore and junior years. 
Students enrolled in the advanced course 
receive an annual stipend of $1,000. 
Students successfully completing the 
advanced course and advanced summer 
camp between the junior and senior years 
will qualify for a commission as a Sec- 
ond Lieutenant in the United States 
Army upon graduation, and will incur a 
service obligation in the active Army or 
Army Reserves. The only expense to the 
student for this program is the $60 
advanced course uniform deposit. 

Student Enrichment Semester — 



17 



This voluntary program is designed to 
expand academic and life opportunities 
for students and to provide for participa- 
tion in specialized programs and courses 
not available at Lycoming. Other mem- 
bers of the program are Bucknell and 
Susquehanna Universities, the Williams- 
port Area Community College, and 
Bloomsburg, Lock Haven, and Mans- 
field Universities. Students other than 
freshmen enroll full or part time for 
credit, normally for one semester or 
term, at any participating institution in 
selected courses. Students in the pro- 
gram remain fully enrolled as degree 
candidates at their home institutions. A 
special opportunity within the program is 
the cross-registration arrangement with 
the Williamsport Area Community Col- 
lege, whereby students may enroll for 
less than a full-time course load while 
remaining enrolled in courses at Lycom- 
ing. 

Washington, United Nations and 
London Semester and Capitol Semes- 
ter Internship Program — With the 
consent of the Department of Political 
Science, selected students are permitted 
to study in Washington. D.C., at The 
American University for one semester. 
They may choose from seven different 
programs: Washington Semester, Urban 
Semester, Foreign Policy Semester, 
International Development Semester, 
Economic Policy Semester. Science and 
Technology Semester, American Studies 
Semester. 

With the consent of either the Depart- 
ment of History or Political Science, 
selected students may enroll at Drew 
University in Madison, New Jersey, in 
the United Nations Semester, which is 
designed to provide a first-hand 
acquaintance with the world organiza- 
tion. Students with special interests in 
world history, international relations, 
law. and politics are eligible to partiei- 
pate. 

The London Semester programs of 
Drew and The American Universities 
emphasize European history, politics, 
and culture. Interested students partici- 
pate with the consent of either the 
Departments of History or Political Sci- 



ence. 

The Capitol Semester Internship Pro- 
gram is available to eligible students on a 
competitive basis. The program is co- 
sponsored by Pennsylvania's Office of 
Administration and Department of Edu- 
cation. Paid Internships are available to 
students in most majors. Interested stu- 
dents should contact the Career Develop- 
ment Center for additional information. 

The Philadelphia Urban Semester — 

A full semester liberal arts program for 
professional development and field study 
is now available to Lycoming students. 
The program components are: field 
placement; City Seminar: evening semi- 
nars; and living and learning in the city. 
The program is open to students major- 
ing in any discipline or program. The 
Philadelphia Urban Semester is spon- 
sored and administered by the Great 
Lakes Colleges Association (Albion. 
Antioch. Denison, De Pauw. Earlham. 
Hope. Kalamazoo, Kenyon. Oberlin. 
Ohio Wesleyan, Wabash. Wooster). 

Normally the above special-semester 
programs are open only to juniors. 

NOTE: Lycoming College cannot assume 
responsibility for the health, safety, or welfare 
of students engaged in or en route to or from any 
off-campus studies or activities which are not 
under the exclusive jurisdiction of this institu- 
tion. 

THE SCHOLAR PROGRAM 

The Lycoming College Scholar Pro- 
gram is a special program designed to 
meet the needs and aspirations of highly 
motivated students of superior intellectu- 
al ability. The Lycoming Scholar satis- 
fies the general distribution require- 
ments, but on a more exacting level and 
with more challenging courses than the 
average student. Lycoming Scholars also 
participate in special courses and semi- 
nars and in serious independent studs 
culminating in a senior project super- 
vised by their major department. 

Students are admitted to the program 
by imitation of the Scholar Council, the 
group which oversees the program. The 
council consists of four students elected 
by current scholars and four faculty 



selected by the Dean of the College. The 
guidelines governing selection of new 
scholars are flexible: academic excel- 
lence, intellectual curiosity, and creativ- 
ity are all taken into account. Students 
who desire to participate in the Scholar 
Program but are not invited may petition 
the Scholar Council for consideration. 

To remain in the program, students 
must maintain a GPA of 3.0 or better. 
Students dropping below this average 
will be placed on Scholar probation until 
their average improves, or they are asked 
to leave the program. To graduate as a 
Scholar, a student must have at least a 
3.0 cumulative average. Scholars must 
take the First Year Scholar Seminar dur- 
ing their first semester in the program. In 
addition, the following distribution 
requirements must be met. (Slightly 
modified requirements exist for students 
in the cooperative programs; a list of 
these requirements can be obtained from 
the Scholar Council.) 

Scholar Distribution Requirements 
for Students in AB 
and BFA Programs. 

A. English. Scholars must display 
above-average writing skills by the end 
of the sophomore year, as certified by the 
Department of English and the Scholar 
Council. This requirement may be met 
by obtaining a sufficiently high score on 
an appropriate CLEP examination or by a 
grade of "B" in English 106. Students 
not meeting the requirement in either of 
these ways by the end of the freshman 
year will be asked to do extra work until 
the competency is reached. Beyond 
English 106. the requirement is one liter- 
ature course numbered 200 or higher. 

B. Language/Mathematical Sciences. 
Scholars must satisfy the requirement in 
either language or mathematical sci- 
ences. Language: Scholars must com- 
plete two courses numbered 1 1 1 or high- 
er (excluding courses taught in English). 
Mathematical Sciences: The mathemat- 
ics placement test determines whether a 
Scholar must take two or three courses 
for distribution. These courses must be 
numbered 112 or higher. If only two 
courses are required. Mathematics 107 
may not be included. Only one computer 



18 



science course may be used to fulfill the 
mathematical sciences requirement. 

C. Philosophy/Religion. Scholars 
must satisfy this requirement in either of 
the two areas. Philosophy: Two courses 
numbered 221 or higher. Religion: Two 
courses numbered 222 or higher. 

D. Fine Arts. Scholars must satisfy the 
requirement in one of four areas. Art: 
Two options are available in art. Either 
two courses from Art 222, 223, 331, 
332, 333. 334, 336 (Art History), or two 
courses from Art 1 1 1 , 115, 220, and 225 
(Studio Art). Music: Two courses from 
Music 117, 330, or higher. Theatre .Two 
courses from Theatre 140 or higher, 
exluding Theatre 148. Literature: Two 
literature courses from English 200 or 
higher, Foreign Languages and Litera- 
tures 225, or other for- 
eign languages and literatures courses 
taught in English. 

E. Natural Sciences. Scholars must 
satisfy the requirements in one of three 
areas. Astronomy/ Physics: Two courses 
numbered 1 1 1 or higher. Biology: Two 
courses numbered 1 10 or higher. Chem- 
istry: Two courses numbered 1 10 or 
higher. 

F. History/Social Sciences. Scholars 
must satisfy the requirements in one of 
five areas. Economics: Two courses 
numbered 110 or higher. History: Two 
courses, one of which must be numbered 
200 or higher. Political Science: Two 
courses numbered 116 or higher. Psy- 
chology: Two courses including Psy- 
chology 110 and one course numbered 
224 or higher (excluding Psychology 
338). Sociology/Anthropology: Two 
courses including Sociology 1 10 and one 
course numbered 300 or higher. 

Scholar Distribution Requirements 
for students in BSN Program. 

A. English. Same as for AB and BFA 
degrees. 

B. Mathematical Science. Same as for 
AB and BFA degrees. (Note that the 
Nursing major requires Mathematics 103 
and Computer Science 125.) 

C. Philosophy/Religion. Met by tak- 
ing Philosophy 219 and Religion 120 
provided that in each course the student 



write an additional paper which must 
receive a grade of B or better. 

D. Fine Arts/Language. Same as for 
AB and BFA scholars. 

E. Natural Sciences. Met by Biology 
1 13, Biology 1 14, Biology 226 (required 
for the major). 

F. History/Social Science. Met by 
Psychology 110, Psychology 117. 
(required for the major) and one course in 
Sociology 300 or higher. (This sociology 
course may be taken in lieu of the intro- 
ductory guided elective in Sociology for 
the BSN.) 

All Scholar Students must complete 
the following: 

G. Physical Education. Scholars must 
satisfy the same physical education 
requirements stipulated by the College 
for all students. 

H. Designated Courses. In addition to 
completing the distribution require- 
ments. Scholars will be required to com- 
plete four upper-level courses (numbered 
300 and above) chosen from a list of 
"designated" courses selected and 
maintained by the Scholar Council. Each 
full-time Lycoming instructor is invited 
to nominate one of his/her courses hav- 



ing special depth and merit for inclusion 
on this list. The Scholar Council may 
alter the list from time to time. A scholar 
may use no more than two such desig- 
nated courses from any one department 
to satisfy this requirement. Normally, 
Scholars will not begin taking designated 
courses until their sophomore year. 

I. Senior Project. In the senior year, 
scholars must successfully complete an 
independent studies or departmental 
honors project which has been approved 
in advance by the Independent Studies 
Committee and the Scholar Council. 
This project must be presented orally and 
be accepted by the Scholar Council. 

J. Scholars must complete a major and 
32 units, exclusive of the First Year 
Scholar Seminar. 

K. In the case of transfer students and 
those who seek to enter the program after 
their freshman year and in other cases 
deemed by the Scholar Council to 
involve special or extraordinary circum- 
stances, the Council shall make adjust- 
ments to the Scholar distribution 
requirements provided that in all cases 
such exceptions and adjustments would 
still satisfy the regular College distribu- 
tion requirements. 




19 



Curriculum 



Numbers 001-049 Developmental 

courses 
Numbers 100-149 Introductory courses 

and Freshman level courses 
Numbers 200-249 Intermediate courses 

and Sophomore level courses 
Numbers 300-349 Intermediate courses 

and Junior level courses 
Numbers 400-449 Advanced courses and 

Senior level courses 
Numbers N50-N59* Non-catalogue 

courses offered on a limited basis 
Numbers 160-169 Applied Music and 

other fractional credit courses 
Numbers 470-479 Internships 
Numbers N80-N89* Independent Study 
Numbers 490-491 Independent Study for 

Departmental Honors 
*N = course level 1 . 2. 3, or 4 as deter- 
mined by department 
Courses not in sequence are listed sepa- 
rately, as: 

Drawing Art 1 1 1 

Color Theory Art 212 

Courses which imply a sequence are 
indicated with a dash between, meaning 
that the first semester must be taken prior 
to the second, as: 

Intermediate French 

French 111-112 

All students have the right of access to all 
courses. 

ACCOUNTING 

Professor: Richmond (Chairperson) 
Assistant Professors: Kuhns, Wienecke 

The purpose of the accounting major is 
to help prepare the student for a career 
within the accounting profession. The 
major has two tracks. Track I is designed 
for students whose primary interests lie 
in the financial area or public accounting 
and provides preparation for the Certi- 
fied Public Accountant Examination; 
Track II is designed for students with an 
interest in management accounting and 
provides preparation for the Certified 
Management Accountant Examination. 

Track I — Financial Accounting 
requires: Accounting 1 10. 220-221 . 330. 



440. 441. 443. 445. Mathematics 103, 
Computer Science 125, and one unit to 
be selected from Accounting 225. 226, 
331, 442. 446. 447, and 448 or Intern- 
ship. Business 1 10 may be substituted/or 
Accounting 110 if a student changes 
majors. Duplicate credit will not be 
granted. 

Students seeking entry into the public- 
accounting field are advised to investi- 
gate the professional requirements for 
certification in the state in which they 
intend to practice so that they may meet 
all educational requirements prior to 
graduation. All Track I majors are 
advised to enroll in Economics 1 10 and 
111. Business 335. 336. and 338. and 
one of the fallowing: Business 340. Eco- 
nomics 220, or 337. 

Track II — Management Accounting 
requires: Accounting 110, 220-221, 
330-331, 444. Mathematics 103, Com- 
puter Science 125, Business 338, 339, 
and 440. All Track II majors are advised 
to enroll in Economics 1 10 and 1 1 1 and 
Business 335 and 336. Students planning 
to sit for the Certified Management 
Accountant Examination are advised to 
enroll in Accounting 440, 441 , 442. 443, 
and a one-half unit (2 credits) internship 
during the fall semester of the senior year 
together with Accounting 443 or a one- 
half unit (2 credits) independent study. 
Business 110 may be substituted for 
Accounting 110 if a student changes 
majors. Duplicate credit will not be 
granted. 

Three minors are offered by the 
Department of Accounting. The follow- 
ing courses are required to complete a 
minor in Financial Accounting- 
Accounting 1 10, 220, 22 1 , 443, 447 and 
any other accounting course or independ- 
ent study. A minor in Managerial 
Accounting requires the completion of 
Accounting 1 10, 220, 330-331 and 444. 
To obtain a minor in Federal Income 
Ta.x, a student must complete Account- 
ing 110, 220-221, 441. and 442. 

11(1 ELEMENTARY 

ACCOUNTING THEORY 
An introductory course in recording, clas- 
sifying, summarizing, and interpreting the 
basic business transaction Problems of clas- 
sification and interpretation of accounts and 



preparation of financial statements are stud- 
ied. Not open to students who have 
received credit for Business 110. Prerequi- 
site: Second-semester freshman or consent 
of instructor. 

220-221 INTERMEDIATE 

ACCOUNTING THEORY 
An intensive study of accounting statements 
and analytical procedures with an emphasis 
upon corporate accounts, various decision 
models, price-level models, earnings per 
share, pension accounting, accounting for 
leases, and financial statement analysis. Pre- 
requisite: Accounting 110. 

225 FINANCIAL STATEMENT ANALYSIS 
Deals with the analysis of financial state- 
ments as an aid to decision making. The 
theme of the course is understanding the 
financial data which are analyzed as well as 
the methods by which they are analyzed and 
interpreted. This course should prove of val- 
ue to all who need a thorough understanding 
of the uses to which financial statements are 
put as well as to those w ho must know how to 
use them intelligently and effectively. This 
includes accountants, security analysts, 
lending officers, credit analysts, managers, 
and all others who make decisions on the 
basis of financial data. Prerequisite: 
Accounting 1 10 or Business 1 10. May term. 

226 GOVERNMENT AND 
FUND ACCOUNTING 

This course is designed to introduce 
accounting for not-for-profit organizations. 
Municipal accounting and reporting are 
studied. Prerequisite: Accounting 110 or 
Business 110. One-half unit of credit. 

330-331 COST AND BUDGETARY 
ACCOUNTING THEORY 
Methods of accounting for material, labor, 
and factory overhead expenses consumed in 
manufacturing using job order, process, and 
standard costing. Application of cost 
accounting and budgetary theory to decision 
making in the area of make or buy. expansion 
of production and sales, and accounting for 
control are dealt with. Prerequisites: 
Accounting 220 and Mathematics 103 or 
consent of instructor. 

440 AUDITING THEORY 

A study of the science or art of verifying, 
analyzing, and interpreting accounts and 
reports. The goal of the course is to emphas- 
ize concepts which will enable students to 
understand the philosophy and environment 
of auditing. Special attention is given to the 
public accounting profession, studying 
auditing standards, professional ethics, the 
legal liability inherent in the attest function, 
the study and evaluation of internal control, 
the nature of evidence, the growing use of 



21 



statisiical sampling, the impact of electronic 
data processing, and the basic approach to 
planning an audit. Finally, various audit 
reports expressing independent expert opin- 
ions on the fairness of financial statements 
are studied. Prerequisites: Accounting 221. 
Mathematics 447. 103. and Computer Sci- 
ence 125. 

441 FEDERAL INCOME TAX 

Analysis of the provisions of the Internal 
Revenue Code relating to income, deduc- 
tions, inventories, and accounting methods 
Practical problems involving determination 
of income and deductions, capital gains and 
losses, computation and payment of taxes 
through withholding at the source and 
through delcaration are considered. Planning 
transactions so that a minimum amount of tax 
will result is emphasized. Prerequisite: 
Accounting 1 10 or consent of instructor. 

442 FEDERAL INCOME TAX 
ADMINISTRATION AND PLANNING 
An analysis of the provisions of the Internal 
Revenue Code relating to partnerships, 
estates, trusts, and corporations. An exten- 
sive series of problems is considered, and 
effective tax planning is emphasized. Pre- 
requisite: Accounting 441 . 

443 ADVANCED ACCOUNTING 1 

Certain areas of advanced accounting theory, 
including business combinations and conso- 
lidated financial statements. Prerequisite: 
Accounting 221 . One-half unit of credit. 

444 CONTROLLERSHIP 

Control process in the organization General 
systems theory, financial control systems, 
centralization-decentralization, performance 
measurement and evaluation, forecasts and 
budgets, and marketing, production and 
finance models for control purposes. Prereq- 
uisite: Accounting 331 or consent of instruc- 
tor. Alternate years. 

445 AUDITING PRACTICE 

An audit project is presented, solved and the 
auditor's report written THIS COURSE IS 
LIMITED TO STUDENTS WHO HAVE 
EITHER COMPLETED OR ARE 
ENROLLED IN ACCOUNTING 440. 
One-half unit of credit. Grade will he 
recorded as "S" or "U". 

446 SEMINARS ON APB OPINIONS 
AND FASB STANDARDS 

A seminar course for accounting majors with 
library assignments to gain a workable 
understanding of the highly technical opin- 
ions of the Accounting Principles Board and 
standards of the Financial Accounting Stan- 
dards Board One term paper Possible tripto 
New York City to attend a public hearing ol 



the Financial Accounting Standards Board. 
Prerequisite: Accounting 1 10. May term. 

447 ADVANCED ACCOUNTING II 

An intensive study of partnerships, install- 
ment and consignment sales, branch 
accounting, bankruptcy and reorganization, 
estates and trusts, government entities, and 
non-profit organizations Prerequisite: 
Accounting 221. One-half unit of credit. 

448 CONTEMPORARY PROBLEMS 
FOR CPA CANDIDATES 

Problems from the Accounting Practice sec- 
tions of Past CPA. examinations, which 
require a thorough knowledge of the core 
courses in their solution, are assigned. The 
course is intended to meet the needs of those 
interested in public accounting and prepara- 
tion for the Certified Public Accountant's 
examination. Prerequisite: Accounting 330 
or consent of instructor. One-half unit of 
credit. Grade will be recorded as "S" or 
"(/". 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Interns in accounting typically work off cam- 
pus under the supervision of a public or 
private accountant. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY (See index) 
Typical examples of recent studies in 
accounting are: computer program to gen- 
erate financial statements, educational core 
for public accountants, inventory control, 
and church taxation. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 



ACCOUNTING — 
MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES 

Assistant Professor: Kuhns 
(Coordinator) 

The accounting-mathematical sciences 
interdisciplinary major is designed to 
offer, within a liberal-arts framework, 
courses which will aid in constructing 
mathematical models for business deci- 
sion making. Students obtain the neces- 
sary substantial background in both 
mathematical sciences and accounting. 
Required accounting courses are: 
Accounting 110. 220-221. 330-331, 
441, 442. In mathematical sciences 
required courses are: Computer Science 
125 and 321 and Mathematics 112, 128. 



129, 338 and either 103 or 332. Recom- 
mended courses include: Mathematics 

130. 238, 333; Business 223, 335, 336, 
338, 339; Computer Science 246; Eco- 
nomics 110, 111; Psychology 224, 225; 
and Sociology-Anthropology 110. 



AMERICAN STUDIES 

Professor: Piper 
(Coordinator) 

The American Studies major offers a 
comprehensive program in American 
civilization which introduces students to 
the complexities underlying the develop- 
ment of America and its contemporary 
life. The 13 major courses include: 

FOUR CORE COURSES — The pri- 
mary integrating units of the major, these 
team-taught courses will teach you how 
to think of ideas from different points of 
view and how to correlate information 
and methods from various disciplines: 

America As a Civilization 

(First semester of major study) 
American Studies — Research and 

Methodology (Second semester) 
American Tradition in the Arts and 

Literature (Third semester) 
Internship or Independent Study 

(Junior and/or senior year) 

CONCENTRATION AREAS — Six 
courses in one option and three in the 
other are needed. Six primary 
concentration-option courses in Ameri- 
can Arts or American Society build 
around the insights gained in the core 
courses. They focus particular attention 
on areas most germane to academic and 
vocational interests. The three additional 
courses from the other option give fur- 
ther breadth to understanding of Ameri- 
ca. Students also will be encouraged to 
take elective courses relating to other 
cultures. 

American Arts Concentration Option 

American Art of the 20th Century — Art 332 
19th Century American Literature — English 222 



22 



20th Century American Literature — English 223 
American Music — Music 1 18 or 114 
American Theatre 

American Society 
Concentration Option 

U.S. Social and Intellectual History to 1877 — 

History 442 

U.S. Social and Intellectual History since 1877 — 

History 443 

American Economic Development 

Racial and Cultural Minorities — Sociology 334 

American Political Tradition 

Students should design their American 
Studies major in consultation with the 
program coordinator or a member of the 
American Studies Committee. 

200 AMERICA AS A CIVILIZATION 

An analysis of the historical, sociocultural. 
economic, and political perspectives of 
American civlization with special attention 
to the inter-relationships between these vari- 
ous orientations. May be taken for either 
one-half unit (section 200A)orfull unit (sec- 
tion 200B); declared majors and prospective 
majors should take the full-unit course, 
200B. 

210 AMERICAN STUDIES — RESEARCH 
AND METHODOLOGY 

The study and application of various research 
methods, including new trends in historical 
study, quantitative analysis, cross-cultural 
studies, and on-site inspection. 

220 AMERICAN TRADITION IN 
THE ARTS AND LITERATURE 

The relationship of the arts and literature to 
the various historical periods of American 
life. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP OR 

or INDEPENDENT STUDY 

N80-N89 (See index) 

An opportunity to relate the learning in the 
core courses and the concentration areas to 
an actual supervised off-campus learning 
situation or independent study project. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 



ART 



Professor: Shipley 
Associate Professor: Bogle 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant Professor: Golahny 
Part-time Instructor: Hanks 
Adjunct Faculty at Johnson Atelier: 

Van Tongeren, Barrie, Lash, Pitynski 

The Art Department offers two degree 
programs: a bachelor of arts degree and a 
bachelor of fine arts in sculpture. 

The A.B. degree: 

To complete a bachelor of arts degree 
with a major in art, a student must com- 
plete one of the following three tracks: 

Track I — Two-Dimensional 

Drawing 1 and II (Art 111 and 221), 
Figure Modeling I (Art 116), Two- 
Dimensional Design (Art 115), and 
Painting I and II (Art 220 and 330). 
Printmaking I and II (Art 228 and 338) 
may be substituted for Painting I and II 
(Art 220 and 330). Students must also 
take Art 222 and 223 (Survey of Art) and 
two additional courses in art history (Art 
331, 332. 333, 334, 336, 339). Studio 
Research (Art 446) is required along with 
participation in a senior exhibition. 

Track II — Three-Dimensional 

The three-dimensional track consists 
of Drawing I and II (Art 111 and 221 ), 
Figure Modeling (Art 116), Sculpture I 
and II (Art 225 and 335), and either 
Figure Modeling II (Art 226) or Sculp- 
ture III (Art 445). Students must also 
take Art 222 and 223 (Survey of Art) and 
two additional courses in Art History 
(Art 331, 332, 333, 334, 336, 339). 
Studio Research (Art 446) is required 
along with participation in a senior 
exhibition. 

Track III — Commercial Design 

The commercial design track consists 
of Drawing I and II (Art 111 and 221), 
Color Theory (Art 212), Two- 
Dimensional Design (Art 115), Figure 
Modeling I (Art 1 16), Survey of Art (Art 
222 and 223). Photography I (Art 227), 



Special Projects in Commercial Design 
(Art 442), Layout and Design (GCO 
511), Typographic Composition (GCO 
512). and Process Camera (GCO 521). 
Descriptions for the last three required 
courses are shown at the end of the Art 
department course descriptions and are 
available at Williamsport Area Commu- 
nity College. 

The following courses are recom- 
mended: Photography II (Art 337), 
Internship (Art 470-479). Advertising 
(Business 332), Writing for Special 
Audiences (English 216), Introduction to 
Mass Communication (Mass Comm 
1 10), Social Psychology (Psy 224). 

The BFA degree in sculpture: 

The student completes a specified 
course of study in the Art Department, 
the Lycoming College distribution 
requirements, and one of the field spe- 
cialization apprenticeship programs at 
the Johnson Atelier in Mercerville, New 
Jersey. 

The Art Department course of study 
consists of 12 courses in studio and art 
history: Figure Modeling I and II (Art 
1 16 and 226), Sculpture I and II (Art 225 
and 335), Drawing I and II (Art 1 1 1 and 
221), Introduction to Photography (Art 
227), 2-D Design (Art 115), Survey of 
Art (Art 222 and 223), and two addition- 
al courses in Art History (Art 331, 332, 
333, 334, 336, 339). 

Twelve additional course units are 
required of the student. The student must 
meet the requirements of the distribution 
program within these courses. 

The student must also complete one of 
the field specialization apprenticeships at 
the Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of 
Sculpture in Mercerville. New Jersey. 
This requires the student to be at the 
Johnson Atelier for a period of between 
16 and 23 Vi months. The student 
receives eight course units of credit at 
Lycoming College for successfully com- 
pleting the field specialization appren- 
ticeship at Johnson Atelier. It is expected 
that the work for the apprenticeship com- 
ponent will be completed during the 
summers and the junior year. 

Admission to the BFA degree program 
is on the basis of meeting the admission 



23 



standards of Lycoming College, and 
passing a portfolio review and interview 
by members of the Lycoming College 
Art Department. 

Three minors are being offered by the 
Art Department. Requirements for each 
follow: Art History: Art 222, 223, and 
two advanced history courses; Sculpture: 
Art 1 16. 226. 225, and 335 plus one of 
the following: 111, 119, 445; Painting: 
Art 1 1 1 , 1 1 5 , 220, 330, and either 22 1 or 
223. 



1 1 1 DRAWING I 

Study of the human figure with gesture and 
proportion stressed. Student is made familiar 
with different drawing techniques and 
media. Some drawings from nature. Offered 
in alternate semesters with Drawing II and 
III 

1 15 TWO-DIMENSIONAL DESIGN 

The basic fundamentals found in the two- 
dimensional arts: line, shape, form, space, 
color, and composition are taught in relation- 
ship to the other two-dimensional arts. Per- 
ceptual theories and their relationships to 
what and why we see what we see in art are 
discussed with each problem. 

1 16 FIGURE MODELING I 

Understanding the figure will be approached 
through learning the basic structures and 
proportions of the figure. The course is con- 
ceived as a three-dimensional drawing class. 
At least one figure per student will be cast. 

119 CERAMICS I 

Emphasis placed on pottery design as it 
relates to function of vessels and the design 
parameters imposed by the characteristics of 
clay. The techniques of ceramics are taught 
to encourage expression rather than to dis- 
pense merely a technical body of informa- 
tion 

212 COLOR THEORY 

A study of the physical and emotional 
aspects of color. Emphasis will be placed on 
the study of color as an aesthetic agent for the 
artist. The color theories of Johannes Ilten 
will form the base for this course with some 
study of the theories of Albert Munsell. Fab- 
er Ben-en. and Wilhelm Ostwuld 

220 PAINTING I 

An introduction of painting techniques and 
materials. Coordination of color, value, .mil 
design within the painting is taught. Some 
painting from the figure. No limitations as to 
painting media, subject matter, or style. Pre- 
requisite: Art 115 or consent of instructor. 



221 DRAWING II 

Continued study of the human figure. 
Emphasis is placed on realism and figure- 
ground coordination with the use of value 
and design. Prerequisite: Art 111 

222 SURVEY OF ART: PREHISTORY 
THROUGH THE MIDDLE AGES 

A survey of Western architecture, sculpture, 
and painting. Emphasis is on the interrelation 
of form and content and on the relatedness of 
the visual arts to their cultural environment: 
Paleolithic Art, Near East, Egypt, Greece, 
Rome, and Medieval Europe. 

223 SURVEY OF ART: FROM THE 
RENAISSANCE THROUGH THE 
MODERN AGE 

A survey of Western architecture, sculpture, 
and painting. Emphasis is on the interrelation 
of form and content and on the relatedness of 
the visual arts to their cultural environment: 
14th-20fh centuries. 

225 SCULPTURE I 

An introduction to the techniques, materials, 
and ideas of sculpture. Clay, plaster, wax, 
wood, and other materials will be used. The 
course will be concerned with ideas about 
sculpture as expression, and with giving 
material form to ideas. 

226 FIGURE MODELING II 

Will exploit the structures and understand- 
ings learned in Figure Modeling I to produce 
larger, more complex figurative works. 
There will be a requirement to cast one of the 
works in plaster. Prerequisites: Art 1 16 and 
consent of instructor. 

227 INTRODUCTION TO PHOTOGRAPHY 
Objectives of the course are to develop tech- 
nical skills in the use of photographic equip- 
ment (cameras, films, darkroom, printmak- 
er) and to develop sensitivity in the areas of 
composition, form, light, picture quality, 
etc. Each student must own or have access to 
a 35mm camera 

228 PRINTMAKING I 

Introduction to the techniques of silkscreen, 
intaglio, monotype, and lithography print- 
ing. One edition of at least six prints must be 
completed in each area Prerequisite: Art 
III or 115 or consent of instructor. 

229 CERAMICS II 

Continuation of Ceramics I Emphasis on use 
of the wheel and technical aspects such as 
glaze making and kiln firing. Prerequisite: 
Art 119. 

330 PAINTING II 

Emphasis is placed on individual style and 



technique Artists and movements in art are 
studied. No limitations as to painting media, 
subject matter, or style. Prerequisite: Art 
220. 

331 20TH CENTURY EUROPEAN ART 
Stylistic developments in Europe from 1 880 
to the present, including Cubism, Fauvism, 
Expressionism, Dada. and Surrealism. 
Picasso. Matisse, Kandinsky. and Mondnan 
are among the major artists studied. 

332 AMERICAN ART OF THE 
20TH CENTURY 

The art of the United States from about 1 880 
to the present, with emphasis on the innova- 
tions of Americans in painting, sculpture and 
architecture, and on the meaning and histori- 
cal roots of contemporary art. 

333 19TH CENTURY EUROPEAN 
AND AMERICAN ART 

The art of Western Europe and the United 
States from 1780-1900, with emphasis on 
painting in France. Those artists to be studied 
include David and Goya. Delacroix. Cour- 
bet. The Impressionists. Turner, Homer. 
Cole and Eakins. 

334 ART OF THE RENAISSANCE 

The art of Italy and Northern Europe from 
1330-1530. with emphasis on the painters 
Giotto, Masaccio, Leonardo da Vinci. 
Raphael. Titan. Van Eyck, and Durer, the 
sculptors Ghiberti. Donatello and Miche- 
langelo, and the architects Brunelleschi and 
Alberti . 

335 SCULPTURE II 

A continuation of Sculpture I (Art 225). 
Emphasis is on advanced technical process. 
Casting of bronze and aluminum sculpture 
will be done in the school foundry. Prereq- 
uisite: Art 225. 

336 ART OF THE BAROQUE 

Seventeenth-century painting and sculpture 
in Italy and the Netherlands with emphasis 
on Bernini. Poussin. Rubens, and 
Rembrandt, and with special attention given 
to the expressive, narrative, painterly, and 
tactile styles present in their art. 

337 PHOTOGRAPHY II 

To extend the skills developed in Photogra- 
phy I by continued growth in technical 
expertise including instruction in the use and 
capabilities of large format view cameras. 
Emphasis is placed on conceptual and aes- 
thetic aspects of photography. Prerequisite: 
Art 227. 

338 PRINTMAKING II 

Further study of the techniques of silkscreen, 
intaglio, monotype, and lithography printing 



24 



with emphasis on multi plate and viscosity 
printing. Two editions of at least six prints 
must be completed in each of two areas. 
Prerequisite: Art 228. 

339 WOMEN IN ART 

A survey of women artists from a variety of 
viewpoints — aesthetic, historical, social, 
political and economic — which seeks to 
understand and integrate the contributions of 
women artists into the mainstream of the 
history of art. No prerequisite. 

440 PAINTING III 

Professional quality is stressed. There is 
some experimentation with new painting 
techniques and styles. 

441 DRAWING III 

Continued study of human figure, individual 
style, and professional control of drawing 
techniques and media are now emphasized. 

442 SPECIAL PROJECT IN 
COMMERCIAL DESIGN 
Concentrated research, preparation, and 
execution of one major project in commer- 
cial design chosen by the student in consul- 
tation with the instructor. Preliminary con- 
cepts, preparatory layout and design and 
finished work will culminate in a portfolio 
and presentation. Prerequisite: permission 
of the Art Department. 

445 SCULPTURE III 

In Sculpture III the student is expected to 
produce a series of sculptures that follow a 
conceptual and technical line of develop- 
ment. Prerequisites: An 1 16. 225, and 335. 

446 STUDIO RESEARCH 

Independent research in an elective studio 
area, conducted under the supervision of the 
appropriate faculty member, includes crea- 
tion of work which may be incorporated in 
the senior group exhibition. Student works in 
private studio assigned by the department. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Commercial design, interior design, and 
photography programs in local businesses, 
and museum work at the Lycoming County 
Historical Museum 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 

(See index) 
Recent studies in anatomy. Aspects of the art 
nouveau, lithography, photography, pottery, 
problems in illustration, and watercolor. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 



Graphic Arts 

Through special arrangements, the 
following courses offered at Williams- 
port Area Community College are avail- 
able only to students in the Art Track III 
major in Commercial Design and in the 
Mass Communication major (GC051I 
only). The WACC courses are taken as 
part of the student's schedule and are 
listed with Lycoming's offerings during 
registration periods. 

511 LAYOUT AND DESIGN 

Analysis of materials, tools, and techniques 
used in preparation of copy for reproduction: 
paste-up and color separation overlays. 4 cr. 

521 TYPOGRAPHIC COMPOSITION 

Fundamentals of typesetting. Theory and 
practice in the care and use of composing 
machines, both hot (mechanical) and cold 
(photo). 4 cr. 

521 PROCESS CAMERA 

Concepts and techniques of darkroom proce- 
dures for reproduction of line and halftone 
copy on process camera. 4 cr. 



ASTRONOMY AND PHYSICS 

Professor: Fineman (on leave) 
Associate Professor: Erickson 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant Professors: Fisher, Keig 

The department offers two majors. 
The major in astronomy is specifically 
designed to train students in the field of 
planetarium education; it also may serve 
as a basis for earning state certification as 
a secondary school teacher of general 
science. The major in physics can pre- 
pare students for graduate work in phys- 
ics, astronomy, and related physical sci- 
ences, for the cooperative program in 
engineering, for state certification as sec- 
ondary school teachers of physics, or for 
technical positions in industry. 

Astronomy 

The major in astronomy requires 
Astronomy HI, either 1 12 or 113, 230, 
344, 445 and 446; Physics 225-226; 
Mathematics 128 and 129; and Chemis- 
try 11 and 1 1 1 or 330-331. Juniors and 



seniors majoring in astronomy are also 
required to register for four semesters of 
Astronomy 349 & 449 (non-credit collo- 
quial. In addition, the following cognate 
courses are recommended: Physics 229 
and 333; Philosophy 221-222, and 333; 
and Art 227. 

104 FIELD GEOLOGY 

A methods course introducing the field tech- 
niques needed to study the geology of an 
area. May or summer term only. 

105 HISTORY OF ASTRONOMY 

A comprehensive view of the evolution of 
astronomical thought from ancient Greece to 
the present, emphasizing the impact that 
astronomical discoveries and the conquest of 
space have had on Western culture. May or 
summer term only. 

107 OBSERVATIONAL ASTRONOMY 

A methods course providing the opportunity 
to make a variety of astronomical observa- 
tions, both visually and photographically, 
with and without telescopes. The planetar- 
ium is used to familiarize the student with the 
sky at various times during the year and from 
different locations on earth. May or summer 
term only. 

101 PRINCIPLES OF ASTRONOMY (B) 

1 1 1 PRINCIPLES OF ASTRONOMY (A) 

A summary of current concepts of the uni- 
verse from the solar system to distant gala- 
xies. Describes the techniques and instru- 
ments used in astronomical research. 
Presents not only what is reasonably well 
known about the universe, but also considers 
some of the major unsolved problems. Astro- 
nomy 101 and 111 share the same three 
hours of lecture and two hours of laboratory 
each week. Ill has one additional hour each 
week for more advanced mathematical treat- 
ment of the material. Credit may not he 
earned for both 101 and 1 1 1 . Corequisitefor 
III: Mathematics 107 or consent of instruc- 
tor. 

102 EARTH SCIENCE (B) 

112 EARTH SCIENCE (A) 

A study of the physical processes that conti- 
nually affect the planet Earth, shaping our 
environment. Describes how past events and 
lifeforms can be reconstructed from pre- 
served evidence to reveal the history of our 
planet from its origin to the present. 
Emphasizes the ways in which geology, 
meteorology, and oceanography interrelate 
with man and the environment. Astronomy 
102 and 112 share the same three hours of 
lecture and two hours of laboratory each 
week. 112 has one additional hour each week 
for more advanced mathematical treatment 



25 



of the material. Credit may not be earned for 
both 102 and 112. Corequisite for 112. 
Mathematics 107 or consent of instructor. 
Alternate years. 

103 METEOROLOGY (B I 

113 METEOROLOGY (A) 

The general properties of the atmosphere and 
their measurements will be discussed in 
terms of basic physical laws. The large scale 
processes that create a suitable climate for 
life on Earth are discussed as well as the 
smaller scale processes that must be taken 
into account in scientific weather prediction. 
Astronomy 103 and 1 13 share the same three 
hours of lecture and two hours of laboratory 
each week. 1 13 has one additional hour each 
week for more advanced mathematical treat- 
ment of the material. Credit may not be 
earned for both 103 and 1 13. Corequisite for 
113: Mathematics 107. Alternate years. 

230 PLANETARIUM TECHNIQUES 

A methods course covering major aspects of 
planetarium programming, operation and 
maintenance. Students are required to pre- 
pare and present a planetarium show. Upon 
successfully completing the course, students 
are eligible to become planetarium assis- 
tants. Three hours of lecture and demonstra- 
tion and three hours of practical training per 
week. Prerequisites: Astronomy 101 or 111 
(Principles of Astronomy) or consent of 
instructor. Alternate years. 

344 RELATIVITY AND COSMOLOGY 

A detailed presentation of the special theory 
of relativity, and a short view of the general 
theory and its classical proofs. Man's con- 
cepts of the universe, with particular atten- 
tion to alternative modern cosmological 
models. Discussion of the Cosmological 
Principle, its rationale, and its implications. 
Four hours of lecture per week. Prerequi- 
sites: Astronomy 111 t Principles of Astro- 
nomy A) and Physics 225 (Introductory 
Physics with Calculus 1). Alternate years. 
Cross-listed as Physics 344. 

445 STELLAR EVOLUTION 

The physical principles governing the inter- 
nal structure and external appearance of 
stars. Mechanisms of energy generation and 
transport within stars The evolution of stars 
from initial formation to final stages. The 
creation of chemical elements by nucleosyn- 
thesis. Four hours of lecture per week. Pre- 
requisites: Astronomy 111 (Principles of 
Astronomy A ) and Physics 226 (Introductory 
Physics with Calculus 11). Alternate years. 

446 STELLAR DYNAMICS AND 
GALACTIC STRUCTURE 

The motion of objects in gravitational fields. 
Introduction to the n-body problem. The 
relation between stellar motions and the 



galactic potential The large scale structure 
of galaxies in general and of the Milky Way 
Galaxy in particular Four hours of lecture 
per week. Prerequisites: Astronomy III 
(Principles of Astronomy A ) and Physics 225 
(Introductory Physics with Calculus 1). 
Alternate years. 

349 & 449 ASTRONOMY AND 

PHYSICS COLLOQUIA 
This non-credit but required course for 
juniors and seniors majoring in astronomy 
and physics offers students a chance to meet 
and hear active scientists in astronomy, 
physics, and related scientific areas talk 
about their own research or professional 
activities. In addition, majors in astronomy 
and physics must present two lectures, one 
given dunng the junior year and one given 
during the senior year, on the results of a 
literature survey or on individual research. 
Students majoring in this department are 
required to attend four semesters during the 
junior and senior years. A letter grade will be 
given when the student gives a lecture. 
Otherwise the grade will be S/U. Students in 
the Cooperative Program in Liberal Arts and 
Engineering are required to attend two 
semesters and present one lecture during 
their junior year. One hour per week. 
Cross-listed as Physics 349 & 449. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Independent studies may be undertaken in 
most areas of astronomy . 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 

Physics 

The major in physics requires Physics 
225-226, 331, 332, and four additional 
physics courses numbered 229 and 
above. Up to two courses chosen from 
Astronomy 111, 112. 1 13, 445, and 446 
may substitute for two of the four physics 
electives. Also required are Mathematics 
128 and 129. and Chemistry 110 and 111 
or 330-33 1 . Juniors and seniors majoring 
in physics are required to register for four 
semesters of Physics 349 & 449 (non- 
credit colloquial. In addition, the fol- 
lowing cognate courses are recom- 
mended: Mathematics 231 and 238 
(these are required for the cooperative 
engineering program and by most gradu- 
ate schools); Computer Science 125 
(required for the cooperative engineering 



program); and Philosophy 221-222 and 
333. A foreign language is recom- 
mended for students planning on gradu- 
ate study. 

106 ENERGY ALTERNATIVES 

A physicist's definition of work, energy, and 
power. The various energy sources available 
for use, such as fossil fuels, nuclear fission 
and fusion, hydro, solar, wind, and geother- 
mal. The advantages and disadvantages of 
each energy conversion method, including 
availability, efficiency, and environmental 
effects. Present areas of energy research and 
possible future developments. Projections of 
possible future energy demands. Exercises 
and experiments in energy collection, con- 
version, and utilization. May or summer 
term only. 



125-126 



PHYSICS WITH LIFE 
SCIENCE APPLICATIONS 



The basic concepts, principles, and laws of 
physics are presented in this noncalculus 
introductory physics course. Topics include 
mechanics, elastic properties of matter, 
fluids, thermodynamics, electricity and 
magnetism, waves, optics, and radioactivi- 
ty. Many of the examples and problems used 
to illustrate the physics are selected from the 
life sciences. Three hours of lecture, one 
hour of recitation, and one three-hour labo- 
ratory per week. Prerequisite: Mathematics 
107 or consent of instructor. (Credit may not 
be earned for both 125 and 225 or for both 
126 and 226.). 



225-226 



INTRODUCTORY PHYSICS 
WITH CALCULUS 



A mathematically rigorous introduction to 
physics designed for majors in physics, 
astronomy, chemistry, and mathematics. 
Topics include mechanics, thermodynamics, 
electricity and magnetism, waves, optics, 
and modem physics. Five hours of lecture 
and recitation and one three-hour laborato- 
ry per week. Corequisite: Mathematics 
128-129 (Calculus 1 and II). (Credit may not 
be earned for both 125 and 225 or for both 
126 and 226). 

229 ELECTRONICS 

D.C. and A.C. circuit and network theory, 
active devices such as transistors, operation- 
al amplifiers, integrated circuits, and intro- 
duction to digital electronics will be covered. 
Three lectures and two two-hour laboratory 
sessions per week. Prerequisites: Physics 
126 or 226. and Mathematics 109 or 128 or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

331 MECHANICS 

Kinematics and dynamics of single particles 
and systems of particles. Rigid bodies. Intro- 
duction to the mechanics of continuous 



26 



media. Moving reference frames. Lagran- 
gian mechanics. Four hours of lecture and 
three hours of laboratory- per week. Prereq- 
uisites: Physics 225 (Introductory Physics 
with Calculus 1) and Mathematics 129 iCal- 
culus II). 

332 ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM 

The electromagnetic field, electrical poten- 
tial, magnetic field, and electric and magne- 
tic properties of matter. Electric circuits. 
Maxwell's equations. Laboratory includes 
electronics as well as classical electricity and 
magnetism. Four hours of lecture and three 
hours of laboratory per week. Prerequisite: 
Physics 226 I Introductory Physics with Cal- 
culus II). 

333 OPTICS 

Geometrical optics, optical systems, physi- 
cal optics, interference. Fraunhofer and 
Fresnel diffraction, and coherence and lasers 
will be covered. Three hours of lecture and 
three hours of labratory per week. Prerequi- 
sites: Physics 126 or 226, and Mathematics 
109 or 128 or consent of instructor. Alter- 
nate years. 

337 THERMODYNAMICS AND 
STATISTICAL MECHANICS 
Classical thermodynamics will be presented, 
showing that the macroscopic properties of a 
system can be specified w ithout a knowledge 
of the microscopic properties of the constit- 
uents of the system. Then statistical 
mechanics will be developed, showing that 
these same macroscopic properties are deter- 
mined by the microscopic properties. Four 
hours of lecture and recitation per week. 
Prerequisites: Physics 226 (Introductory 
Physics with Calculus II) and Mathematics 
129 (Calculus II). Alternate years. 

338 ATOMIC AND 
MOLECULAR PHYSICS 

The development of the principles and 
methods of quantum mechanics from the 
earliest evidence of quantization. Structure 
and spectra of atoms and molecules. Exten- 
sion of quantum theory to the solid state. 
Four hours of lecture and recitation and one 
three-hour laboratory per week. Prerequi- 
site: Physics 226 (Introductory Physics with 
Calculus II) and Mathematics 129 (Calculus 
11). Alternate years. 

344 RELATIVITY AND COSMOLOGY 

A detailed presentation of the special theory 
of relativity, and a short view of the general 
theory and its classical proofs. Man's con- 
cepts of the universe, with particular atten- 
tion to alternative modern cosmological 
models. Discussion of the Cosmological 
Principle, its rationale, and its implications. 
Four hours of lecture per week. Prerequi- 
sites: Astronomy 1 1 1 (Principles of Astro- 



nomy A) and Physics 225 (Introductory 

Physics with Calculus I). Alternate years. 
Cross-listed as Astronomy 344. 

447 NUCLEAR AND 

PARTICLE PHYSICS 

The course will consider properties of nuclei . 
nuclear models, radioactivity, nuclear reac- 
tions (including fission and fusion), and 
properties of elementary particles. The inter- 
actions of nuclear particles with matter and 
the detection of nuclear particles will be 
covered. It will be shown how observed 
phenomena lead to theories on the nature of 
fundamental interactions, how these forces 
act at the smallest measurable distances, and 
what is expected to occur at even smaller 
distances. Four hours of lecture and recita- 
tion and nvo hours of laboratory per week. 
Prerequisites: either Physics 226 (Introduc- 
tory Physics with Calculus II) or Physics 126 
(Physics with Life Science Applications II). 
Mathematics 129. and either Physics 338 
(Atomic and Molecular Physics) or Chemis- 
try 110. Alternate vears. 



439 INTRODUCTION TO 

QUANTUM MECHANICS 
Basic concepts and formulation of quantum 
theory. The free particle, the simple har- 
monic oscillator, the hydrogen atom, and 
central force problems will be discussed. 
Both time-independent and time-dependent 
perturbation theory will be covered. Four 
hours of lecture and recitation. Prerequisite: 
either Physics 226 (Introductory Physics 
with Calculus 11) or Chemistry 331 (Physical 
Chemistry II). and Mathematics 231 (Diffe- 
rential Equations). Cross-listed as Chemis- 
try 439. 



349 & 449 ASTRONOMY AND 

PHYSICS COLLOQUIA 

This non-credit but required course for 
juniors and seniors majoring in astronomy 
and physics offers students a chance to meet 
and hear active scientists in astronomy, 
physics, and related scientific areas talk 
about their own research or professional 
activities. In addition, majors in astronomy 
and physics must present two lectures, one 
given during the junior year and one given 
during the senior year, on the results of a 
literature survey or on individual research. 
Students majoring in this department are 
required to attend four semesters dunng the 
junior and senior years. A letter grade will be 
given when the student gives a lecture. 
Otherwise the grade will be S/U. Students in 
the Cooperative Program in Liberal Arts and 
Engineering are required to attend two 
semesters and present one lecture during 
their junior year. One hour per week 
Cross-listed as Astronomy 349 & 449. 



470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Interns in physics work off campus under the 
supervision of professional physicists 
employed by local industries or hospitals. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Independent studies may be undertaken in 
most areas of physics. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 



BIOLOGY 



Associate Professors: Angstadt 
(Chairperson), Diehl, Gabriel, 
Zaccaria 

Assistant Professors: Pottmeyer, 
Zimmerman 

A major consists of eight biology 
courses, including 110-111, 221, 222, 
223, 224, and 225. With departmental 
consent. Biology 226 may be substituted 
for Biology 221 . Only two courses num- 
bered below 200 may count toward the 
major. Departmental internships cannot 
be used to fulfill the eighth required 
course. In addition, three units of chem- 
istry and two units of mathematical sci- 
ence are required. The chemistry 
requirement must include at least one 
unit of organic chemistry chosen from 
Chemistry 1 1 5 , 220, or 22 1 . The mathe- 
matical science courses must be chosen 
from Computer Science 125 and Mathe- 
matics 103, 107, 109. 128 or above. 
Certain specific exceptions to the core 
program will be made for three-year stu- 
dents enrolled in cooperative programs. 
Such exceptions are noted under the par- 
ticular cooperative program described in 
the Academic Program chapter of the 
catalog. Students interested in these pro- 
grams should contact the program direc- 
tor before finalizing their individual pro- 
grams. Credit may not be earned for both 
Biology 101 and 1 10 or for both Biology 
102 and 111. Consent of instructor may 
replace Biology 110-111 as a prerequi- 
site for all biology courses. 

A minor in Biology requires the com- 
pletion of four upper-level (200's or 



27 



higher) courses, with their appropriate 
prerequisites. At least two of these must 
be from the 200' s series of courses. A 
minor with a special name (e.g.. Envir- 
onmental Science) may be designed by 
an individual. 

101-102 PRINCIPLES OF BIOLOGY 

An investigation of biological principles, 
including ecological systems, form and 
function in selected representative organisms 
(especially man), cell theory, molecular 
biology, reproduction, inheritance, adapta- 
tion, and evolution The course is designed 
primarily for students not planning to major 
in the biological sciences. Three hours of 
lecture and one two-hour laboratory per 
week. 

110-111 INTRODUCTION TO BIOLOGY 

An introduction to the study of biology- 
designed for students planning to major in 
the biological sciences. Major topics consid- 
ered include the origin of life, cellular respi- 
ration and photosynthesis, genetics, devel- 
opment, anatomy and physiology, ecology, 
behavior, and evolution. Three hours of lec- 
ture and one three-hour laboratory per 
week 

113-114 HUMAN ANATOMY 
AND PHYSIOLOGY 
Using the organ-systems approach, the 
course is an introduction to the human body 
— its anatomy, physiology, and normal 
development — with particular attention to 
structure and function at all levels of its 
biological organization (molecular through 
organism a I ) Three hours of lecture, one 
hour of discussion, and one three-hour labo- 
ratory per week. Prerequisite: Chemistry 
115 or Chemistry 220 or consent of instruc- 
tor. 

221 MICROBIOLOGY 

A study of microorganisms. Emphasis is 
given to the identification and physiology of 
microorganisms as well as (o their role in 
disease, their economic importance, and 
industrial applications. Three hours of lec- 
ture anil two two-hour laboratory periods 
per week. Prerequisite: Biology 1 10-111. 
Not open to students who have received 
credit for Biology 22f> 

222 GENETICS 

A general consideration of the principles 
governing inheritance, including treatment 
of classical, molecular, cytological. physio- 
logical, microbial, human, and population 
genetics Three hours of lecture and two 
two-hour laboratory periods per week. Pre- 
requisite Biology 110-111. 



223 ANIMAL PHYSIOLOGY 

The mechanisms and functions of animal 
systems, including the autonomic, endo- 
crine, digestive, cardio-vascular. respirat- 
ory, renal, nervous, and reproductive sys- 
tems. Mammalian physiology is stressed. 
Three hours of lecture and one three-hour 
laboratory per week. Prerequisite: Biology 
110-111 

224 ECOLOGY 

The study of the principles of ecology with 
emphasis on the role of chemical, physical, 
and biological factors affecting the distribu- 
tion and succession of plant and animal 
populations and communities. Included will 
be field studies of local habitats as well as 
laboratory experimentation. Two hours of 
lecture and one four-hour laboratory per 
week. Prerequisite: Biology 1 10-11 1 

225 PLANT SCIENCES 

A survey of the structure, development, 
function, classification, and use of plants and 
related organisms. The study will comprise 
four general topic areas: form, including 
morphology and anatomy of plants in growth 
and reproduction; function, concentrating on 
nutrition and metabolism peculiar to photo- 
synthetic organisms; classification systems 
and plant identification, and human uses of 
plants. Three hours of lecture and one 
three-hour laboratory per week. Prerequi- 
site: Biology 110-111 . 

226 MICROBIOLOGY FOR THE 
HEALTH SCIENCES 

A study of microorganisms with emphasis 
given to their taxonomy and their role in 
various aspects of human infectious disease. 
Mechanisms for treating and preventing 
infectious diseases will be presented. Labo- 
ratory to include diagnostic culture proce- 
dures, antibiotic sensitivity testing, serolo- 
gy, anaerobic techniques and a study of 
hemolytic reactions. Three hours of lecture 
and four hours oj laboratory per week. Pre- 
requisites: one year oj introductory level 
biology . one year of chemistry or consent oj 
instructor. Not open to students who tunc 
received credit lor Biology 221. 

328 AQUATIC BIOLOGY 

A field-oriented course dealing with fresh- 
water ecosystems. Studies will include a 
survey of the plankton, benthos, and fish — 
as well as the physical and chemical charac- 
teristics of water that influence their distri- 
bution Several local field trips and a one- 
week trip to a field station will familiarize 
students w ith the diversity of habitats and the 
techniques of limnologists. May term only 
Prerequisites Biology 110-11 I. 



330 COMPARATIVE ANATOMY 
OF VERTEBRATES 

Detailed examination of the origins, struc- 
ture, and functions of the principal organs of 
the vertebrates Special attention is given to 
the progressive modification of organs from 
lower to higher vertebrates. Three hours of 
lecture and one four-hour laboratory per 
week. Prerequisite: Biology 110-111 . Alter- 
nate years. 

332 PLANT AND 

GREENHOUSE MANAGEMENT 
A course concerned with the care of house- 
plants and the management of small green- 
houses. Class time will include lectures, 
discussions, demonstrations, greenhouse 
exercises, and field trips to local green- 
houses. Topics will include the theoretical 
and practical aspects of the care and feeding, 
propagation, light and water requirements, 
and disease control for many of the common 
house and greenhouse plants. Prerequisite: 
Biology 101-102 or 110-111. May term 
only. 

334 INVERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY 
Comparative study of the invertebrate phyla 
with emphasis on phylogeny. physiology, 
morphology, and ecology. Two three-hour 
lecture! laboratory periods per week. Pre- 
requisite: Biology 1 10- 111. Alternate years. 

335 CELLULAR PHYSIOLOGY 
Physicochemical background of cellular 
function, functions of membrane systems 
and organelles; metabolic pathways; bio- 
chemical and cellular bases of growth, devel- 
opment and responses of organisms. Three 
hours of lecture and one three-hour labora- 
tory per week. Prerequisites: Biology 
110-111 and a year of chemistry. Alternate 
years. 

339 MEDICAL GENETICS 

This course is concerned with the relation- 
ships of heredity to disease. Discussions will 
focus on topics such as chromosomal abnor- 
malities, metabolic variation and disease, 
somatic cell genetics, genetic screening, and 
immunogenelics. Laboratory exercises will 
offer practical experiences in genetic diag- 
nostic techniques. Prerequisite: Biology 
101 102 or 110-111 Mav term only. 

342 ANIMAL BEHAVIOR 

A study of the causation, function, evolu- 
tion, and biological significance of animal 
behaviors in their normal environment and 
social contexts. Three hours of lecture and 
one four-hour laboratory each week. Pre- 
requisite Biolog\ 110-111. Alternate years. 

347 IMMUNOLOGY 

The course introduces concepts concerning 
how pathogens cause disease and host 



28 



defense mechanisms against infectious dis- 
eases. Characterization of and relationships 
between antigens, haptens, and antibodies 
are presented. Serological assays will 
include: agglutination precipitations, immu- 
nofluorescence, Immunoelectrophoresis, 
and complement fixation. Other topics are: 
immediate and delayed hypersensitivities 
(i.e. allergies such as hay fever and poison 
ivy), immunological renal diseases, immu- 
nohematology (blood groups, etc.). the 
chemistry and function of complement auto- 
immunity, and organ graft rejection phe- 
nomena. Three hours of lecture, one three- 
hour laboratory, and one hour of arranged 
work per week. Prerequisite: Biology 
110-111 Alternate years. 

403 FIELD BIOLOGY FOR TEACHERS 

A methods course for students preparing to 
teach biology. Sources and methods of col- 
lecting and preserving various plant and ani- 
mal materials. Summer term only. 

431 HISTOLOGY 

A study of the basic body tissues and the 
microscopic anatomy of the organs and 
structures of the body which are formed from 
them. Focus is on normal human histology. 
Three hours of lecture and one four-hour 
laboratory per week. Prerequisite: Biology 
1 10-111 . Alternate years. 

433 ECONOMIC AND 

SYSTEMATIC BOTANY 
Structure and classification of plants with 
emphasis on those species, particularly food 
and drug plants, having significance for 
human affairs. Three hours of lecture and 
one three-hour laboratory per week. Prereq- 
uisites: Biology 110-111. Biology 225 
Alternate years. 

440 PARASITOLOGY AND 
MEDICAL ENTOMOLOGY 

The biology of parasites and parasitism. 
Studies on the major groups of animal para- 
sites and anthropod vectors of disease will 
involve taxonomy and life cycles. Emphasis 
will be made on parasites of medical and 
veterinary importance. Three hours of lec- 
ture and one three-hour laboratory per 
week. Prerequisite: Biology 110-111. Alter- 
nate years. 

441 VERTEBRATE EMBRYOLOGY 

A study of the development of vertebrates 
from fertilization to the fully formed fetus 
Particular attention is given to the chick and 
human as representative organisms. Two 
three-hour lecture' laboratory periods per 
week. Prerequisite: Biology 110-111. Alter- 
nate years. 

444 BIOCHEMISTRY 

Emphasis is given to the metabolism of car- 
bohydrates, lipids, amino acids, proteins. 



and nucleic acids; integration of metabolism; 
and biochemical control mechanisms, 
including allosteric control, induction, rep- 
ression, as well as the various types of mhi- 
bitive control mechanisms. Three hours of 
lecture, one three-hour laboratory and one 
hour of arranged work per week. Prerequi- 
site: Chemistry 220-221 or Chemistry 115. 
or consent of instructor. Cross-listed as 
Chemistry 444. Alternate years. 

445 RADIATION BIOLOGY 

A study of the effects of ionizing and non- 
ionizing irradiations on cells, tissues and 
organisms. Consideration will be given to 
repair mechanisms and how repair deficien- 
cies elucidate the nature of irradiation dam- 
age. Three hours of lecture and one three- 
hour laboratory per week. Prerequisites: 
Biology 110-111 , one year of chemistry. 
Alternate years. 

446 PLANT ANATOMY 
AND PHYSIOLOGY 

A study of plant physiology as a function of 
plant anatomy. Metabolic relationships and 
environmental factors w ill be examined from 
a background of the structure and develop- 
ment of cells, tissues, organs, and whole 
plants. Three hours of lecture and one 
three-hour laboratory per week. Prerequi- 
sites: Biology 110-111, Biology 225. Alter- 
nate years. 

448 ENDOCRINOLOGY 

This course begins with a survey of the role 
of the endocrine hormones in the integration 
of body functions. This is followed by a 
study of the control of hormone synthesis and 
release, and a consideration of the mechan- 
isms by which hormones accomplish their 
effects on target organs. Two three-hour 
lecture! laboratory periods per week. Pre- 
requisite: Biology 110-111 . Alternate years. 

349 & 449 BIOLOGY COLLOQUIUM 

This course offers the student a chance to 
become familiar with research in the Biologi- 
cal Sciences using techniques such as meet- 
ing and talking with active researchers, 
reading and critically analyzing the current 
literature, and discussing the ideas and 
methods shaping Biology. Students will be 
required to read and analyze scientific pap- 
ers, actively participate in discussions, and. 
in the senior year, present the results of a 
literature survey or of individual research. 
Students majoring in this department are 
required to enroll during all semesters spent 
on campus in the junior and senior years. A 
letter grade will be given in a semester when 
the student gives a lecture: in other semesters 
the grade will be S/U. Non-credit course. 
One hour per week. Prerequisites: Biology 
majors with junior or senior class standing. 



470 & 479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Recent samples of internships in the depart- 
ment include ones with the Department of 
Environmental Resources, nuclear medicine 
or rehabilitative therapies at a local hospital. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Departmental studies are experimentally 
oriented and may entail either lab or field 
work. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 
Examples of recent honors projects have 
involved stream analysis, gypsy moth 
research, drug synthesis and testing. 



BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

Professor: Hollenback 
Associate Professor: Weaver 
Assistant Professors: Altenburger, 

Gordon (Chairperson) 
Lecturer: Larrabee 

To graduate with a major in business 
administration, a student must complete 
one of two tracks: 

Track I — Business Management 

This track is designed to train students 
in the functions of today's profit and 
nonprofit organizations. The program 
provides a well-balanced preparation for 
a wide variety of careers, including gen- 
eral administration, personnel adminis- 
tration, commercial banking, invest- 
ments and portfolio management, 
security analysis, corporate financial 
management, general marketing, sales, 
product management, advertising, retail 
merchandising, and production and man- 
ufacturing management. 

Required courses are Business 110, 
111, 223, 228-229, 338, 339, 440. and 
44 Land Mathematics 103. Business 332 
or 443 may be substituted for Business 
229, and Business 340 may be substi- 
tuted for Business 329. Accounting 1 10 
may be substituted for Business 110 if the 
student is transferring into the business 
administration major, but duplicate 
credit will not be granted. 

Majors are also urged to enroll in Eco- 



29 



nomics 110 and 111, Business 335 and 
336, Mathematics 112, and Computer 
Science 125. Majors also are encouraged 
to take a foreign language. The addition- 
al elective offerings are intended to add 
depth in the areas of finance, marketing, 
and management. 

Track II — Management Science 

This track is designed to train students 
in the quantitative aspects of business 
administration. It provides excellent 
undergraduate preparation for graduate 
study in management science, operations 
research, and quantitative business 
administration. The program also pro- 
vides a solid preparation for careers in 
production control, systems analysis, 
research, forecasting, industrial and 
technical sales and any of the functional 
areas of business where quantitative 
training would be an added qualification. 

Required courses are Business 110, 

111, 223, 338, 339, 446; Economics 
110, 111, 441; Mathematics 128, 129, 

112, 103, 338, and Computer Science 
125. Accounting 110 may be substituted 

for Business 110 if the student is trans- 
ferring into the business administration 
major. 

I in FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING 

An introduction to the art of measuring, 
communicating, and interpreting financial 
activity. Recording, classifying and sum- 
marizing business transactions, the interpre- 
tation of accounts, and the preparation of 
financial statements are studied. Not open to 
students who have received credit for 
Accounting 110. 

1 1 1 MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING 

An introduction to the various components of 
managerial accounting. Emphasis is placed 
on managerial problem solving techniques 
and the analysis of the results. Accounting 
systems, costing procedures, cost-volume 
profit relationships, managerial control pro- 
cesses and the use of computers as aids to 
decision making are studied. Students will 
gain hands-on experience with various com- 
puter applications of managerial accounting 
Prerequisite: Business 110 or Accounting 
110. 

223 QUANTITATIVE 

BUSINESS ANALYSIS 

Techniques of quantitative analysis useful in 

making business decisions. Topics include 



decision theory, inventory models, network 
models, forecasting, and other selected 
applications. Students will be introduced to 
computer applications of the quantitative 
models. Prerequisite: Mathematics 105 or 
consent of instructor. 

228-229 MARKETING MANAGEMENT 

Planning, organization, and control of the 
distribution activities of the firm, and an 
analysis and evaluation of the marketing 
system, its institutions, and processes. 
Application of marketing principles and the 
development of strategies for specific mark- 
eting problems. Product, channel flow, pro- 
motion, and pricing strategies explored. 
Readings, cases, and games. 

332 ADVERTISING 

Nature, scope, methods, and effects of pro- 
motion. Techniques of analysis and control 
in the use of advertising and publicity as tools 
in developing business strategy. 

335 LEGAL PRINCIPLES I 

Lectures and analysis of cases on the nature, 
sources, and fundamentals of the law in 
general, and particularly as relating to con- 
tracts, agency, and negotiable instruments. 
Open only to juniors and seniors. 

336 LEGAL PRINCIPLES II 

Lectures on the fundamentals and history of 
the law relating to legal association, real 
property, wills, and estates. Open only to 
juniors and seniors. 

338 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT I 

An introduction to working capital manage- 
ment and financial analysis and planning. 
Topics are covered through readings, cases 
and problem solving in the areas of decisions 
on current asset and liability structures, cash 
and marketable securities, accounts receiv- 
ables, inventory management and control, 
spontaneous financing, short-term borrow- 
ing, ratio and financial statement analysis, 
source and use statements, cash flow fore- 
casting, and financial statements forecast- 
ing. Prerequisites: Mathematics 103: Busi- 
ness 110. III. and 223: or consent of 
instructor. 

339 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT II 

A study of capital asset structure and long- 
term financial decisions. Topics are covered 
through readings, cases, and problem sol- 
ving in the areas of capital budgeting, 
including risk and required rates of return, 
leveraging the firm, concepts of capital 
structures, dividend policy, external financ- 
ing, term and lease financing, long-term 
debt, equity securities, convertible securities 
and warrants. Prerequisite: Business 338 or 
consent oj instructor. 



340 INVESTMENTS 

An introduction to the financial sector of the 
economy and the structure and functions of 
financial markets and the agencies involved; 
brokerage houses and stock exchanges; the 
various types of investments available. 
Techniques used to evaluate financial sec- 
urities. Also covered are recent develop- 
ments in investment theory. 

440 MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS 
Structural characteristics and functional 
relationships of a business organiztion as 
well as the problems encountered in coordi- 
nating the internal resources of a firm. 
Emphasis on administrative efficiency and 
procedures. 

441 BUSINESS POLICIES 

Planning, organization, and control of busi- 
ness operations; setting of goals; coordina- 
tion of resources, development of policies. 
Analysis of strategic decisions encompass- 
ing all areas of a business, and the use and 
analysis of control measures. Emphasis on 
both the internal relationship of various ele- 
ments of production, finance, marketing, 
and personnel, and the relationship of the 
business entity to external stimuli. Readings, 
cases, and games. Prerequisites: Business 
223. 228-229. 338. 339. and440. or consent 
of instructor. Seniors only. 

442 PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT 

An introduction to the managerial problems 
of recruiting, selecting, training, and 
retraining the human resources of the firm. 
Emphasis is placed on the interrelationship 
of personnel policies with management 
objectives and philosophies in such areas as 
fringe benefits, wage and salary policies, 
union activities, and health and safety. 

443 RETAIL MANAGEMENT I 

Planning, organization, and control of the 
retailing firm. Competitive strategy develop- 
ment through store location, layout, admin- 
istration organization, buying, and pricing 
Cases, readings, and papers. 

445 MARKETING RESEARCH 

This is a study of the principles and practices 
of Marketing Research The focus is on the 
development and application of Marketing 
Research Studies Topics covered include 
selection of a research design, project plan- 
ning and scheduling, data specification and 
gathering, quantitative methods to analyze 
data, interpretation of data, and research 
report writing. Readings, cases, and research 
project. Prerequisite: Mathematics 103. 
Business 228. or consent of instructor. 

446 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT 

An introduction to the planning, organiza- 



30 



tion, and controlling of operations in a pro- 
duction facility. The course also incorporates 
quantitative techniques and computer appli- 
cations used in the production and operations 
management environment. Topics include 
capacity and layout planning, facility loca- 
tion analysis, job design and work measure- 
ment, production scheduling, materials 
requirement planning models, and quality 
controls. Students will engage in the actual 
design of an inventory status file and MRP 
system. Prerequisite: Business 223 or con- 
sent of instructor. 

447 CREATIVE ADVERTISING 

A workshop concerned with theme, copy, 
and effective presentation of advertisements 
for print media, radio, and direct mail Pri- 
marily an exploration of creativity through 
analysis of works of artists and writers with 
application to practical advertising, and tail- 
ored to the interests of individual students. 
May term. 

448 SALES SEMINAR 

The role of selling in the economy. The art of 
creative selling; application of theories from 
the behavioral sciences to selling through the 
analysis of sales situations and techniques. 

449 MANAGING THE 
SMALL BUSINESS 

How the potential businessman proceeds in 
establishing, operating, and profiting from a 
small business operation. Considered and 
analyzed are such aspects as marketing, 
managing, financing, promoting, insuring, 
establishing, developing, and staffing the 
small retail, wholesale service, and manu- 
facturing firm. May term. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Typical examples are marketing analysis for 
a paper products firm, planning a branch 
store, hotel and real estate management, 
banking and insurance. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Examples of recent studies are: the economic 
impact of a college on a community; a mark- 
eting strategy for a local firm enterting the 
consumer market. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index I 
A recent project was a study of the evolution 
of anti-trust legislation in the United States. 



CHEMISTRY 



Professors: Hummer. Radspinner 
Associate Professor: Franz 

(Chairperson) 
Part-time Instructor. Director of 

General Chemistry Laboratories: 

Baggett 

A major in chemistry consists of 
Chemistry 110-111. 220-221, 330-331. 
332 and 333; Physics 225-226; Mathe- 
matics 128, 129 and one of the following 
courses: Mathematics 103, 231, 238, 
332, or Computer Science 125. Mathe- 
matics 231 and 238 and French or Ger- 
man are strongly recommended for stu- 
dents planning on graduate study in 
chemistry. To be certified in secondary 
education, chemistry majors must also 
pass two biology courses numbered 1 10 
or higher. 

A minor in Chemistry requires com- 
pletion of four courses numbered 220 or 
higher; at least one must be taken from 
each of the following groups: Group A 
(220-221, 440, 441, 444, 445) and 
Group B (226 or 332. 330-331, 333, 
439, 443). Named minors in specialized 
areas may be designed by students with 
departmental approval. 

108 CHEMICAL PRINCIPLES 

An introduction to the principles of inorganic 
chemistry. Topics include atomic and 
molecular structure, nomenclature, gases, 
solutions, acids and bases, kinetics, equilib- 
rium, oxidation-reduction, and stoichiome- 
try. The approach is primarily descriptive, 
with illustrations drawn mostly from the 
health sciences. Along with Chemistry 1 15. 
this course is designed for those students who 
require only two semesters of chemistry, and 
is not intended for students planning to enroll 
in chemistry courses numbered 200 or 
above. Three hours lecture . one hour discus- 
sion, and one three-hour laboratory period 
each week. Prerequisite: high school alge- 
bra or Math 005. Not open for credit to 
students who have received credit for Chem- 
istry 1 10. 

1 10 GENERAL CHEMISTRY I 

A quantitative introduction to the concepts 
and models of chemistry. Topics include 
stoichiometry. atomic and molecular struc- 
ture, nomenclature, bonding, thermochem- 
istry, gases, solutions, and chemical reac- 



tions. The laboratory introduces the student 
to methods of separation, purification, and 
identification of compounds according to 
their physical properties. This course is 
designed for students who plan to major in 
one of the sciences. Three hours lecture, one 
hour discussion and one three-hour labora- 
lory period each week. Prerequisite: place- 
ment in Chemisln- 110 is determined in part 
b\ a student's score on the mathematics 
placement examination. Not open for credit 
to students who have received credit for 
Chemistry 108. except b\ permission of the 
Chemistry Department 

1 1 1 GENERAL CHEMISTRY II 

A continuation of Chemistry 110. with 
emphasis placed on the foundations of 
analytical, inorganic, and physical chemis- 
try. Topics include kinetics, general and 
ionic equilibria, acid-base theory, electro- 
chemistry, thermodynamics, nuclear chem- 
istry, coordination chemistry, and descrip- 
tive inorganic chemistry of selected 
elements. The laboratory treats aspects of 
quantitative and qualitative inorganic analy- 
sis. Three hours lecture, one hour discus- 
sion, and one three-hour laboratory period 
each week. Prerequisite: Chemistry 1 10 or 
consent of the Chemistry Department. 

1 15 BRIEF ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 

A descriptive study of the compounds of 
carbon. This course will illustrate the princi- 
ples of organic chemistry with material 
relevant to students in medical technology, 
biology, nursing, forestry, education and the 
humanities. Topics include nomenclature, 
alkanes. arenes. functional derivatives, ami- 
no acids and proteins, carbohydrates and 
other naturally occurring compounds. This 
course is designed for students who require 
only one semester of organic chemistry. 
Three hours lecture, one hour discussion, 
and one four-hour laboratory period each 
week. Prerequisite: Chemistry 108 or 1 10. 
Not open for credit to students who have 
received credit for Chemistry 220. 

220-221 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 

A systematic study of the compounds of 
carbon, including both aliphatic and aroma- 
tic series. The laboratory work introduces the 
student to simple fundamental methods of 
organic synthesis, isolation, and analysis. 
Three hours lecture and one four-hour labo- 
ratory period each week. Prerequisite: 
Chemistry 111. 

226 CLINICAL ANALYSIS 

A presentation of selected wet-chemical and 
instrumental methods of quantitative analy- 
sis with an orientation toward clinical appli- 
cations in medical technology. Topics 
include: general methods and calculations, 
solutions: titrations; photometric analyses 



31 



(colorimetric. atomic absorption, flame 
emission); electrochemical methods (ion- 
selective electrodes, coulometry), automa- 
tion. Lecture, recitation, and laboratory 
daily. Prerequisite: Chemistry 110-11 1 or 
consent of instructor. May not be taken for 
credit following Chemistry 332. Max term 
only, 

330-331 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY 

A study of the fundamental principles of 
theoretical chemistry and their applications. 
The laboratory work includes techniques in 
physicochemical measurements. Three 
hours lecture and one four-hour laboratory 
period each week. Prerequisite: Chemistry 
111. Mathematics 129. and one sear of 
physics or consent of instructor. 

332 ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY 

A study of the fundamental methods of gra- 
vimetric, volumetric, and elementary instru- 
mental analysis together with practice in 
laboratory techniques and calculations of 
these methods. Two hours lecture and two 
three-hour laboratory periods each week. 
Prerequisite: Chemistry HI or consent of 
instructor. 

333 ADVANCED INORGANIC CHEMISTRY 
A study of modern theories of atomic and 
molecular structure and their relationship to 
the chemistry of selected elements and their 
compounds. Three hours lecture and one 
four-hour laboratory period each week. Pre- 
requisite: Chemistry 330. Mathematics 129. 
and one year of physics or consent of 
instructor. 

439 INTRODUCTION TO 

QUANTUM MECHANICS 
After presenting the origin, basic concepts, 
and formulation of quantum mechanics with 
emphasis on its physical meaning, the free 
particle, simple harmonic oscillator, and 
central-force problems will be investigated. 
Both time-independent and time-dependent 
perturbation theory will be covered. The 
elegant operator formalism of quantum 
mechanics will conclude the course. Four 
hours of lecture and recitation. Prerequi- 
sites: Mathematics 231. either Chemistry 
331 or Physics 226. and consent of instruc- 
tor. Cross-listed as Physics 439. 

44(1 ADVANCED ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 
Selected topics, which may include 
mechanisms of organic reactions, synthesis, 
detailed structure and chemistry of natural 
products, polynuclear hydrocarbons, and 
aromatic heterocyclics. Three hours lecture. 
Prerequisite: Chemistry 221. 

441 QUALITATIVE ORGANIC ANALYSIS 
Theory and application of the systematic 
identification of pure organic compounds 



and mixtures. Two hours lecture and two 
three-hour laboratory periods each week. 
Prerequisite: Chemistry 221 . 

443 ADVANCED 
ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY 

A study of advanced analytical methods with 
emphasis on chromatographic, electro- 
chemical, and spectroscopic methods of 
instrumental analysis. Three hours lecture 
and one four-hour laboratory period each 
week. Prerequisite: Chemistry 331 and 332 
or consent of instructor. 

444 BIOCHEMISTRY 

Emphasis is given to the metabolism of car- 
bohydrates, lipids, amino acids, proteins, 
and nucleic acids; integration of metabolism; 
and biochemical control mechanisms, 
including allosteric control, induction, rep- 
ression as well as the various types of mhibi- 
tive control mechanisms. Prerequisite: 
Chemistry 221 or 115 or consent of instruc- 
tor. Cross-listed as Biology 444. 

445 SPECTROSCOPY AND 
MOLECULAR STRUCTURE 

Theory and practice of molecular structure 
determination by spectroscopic methods. 
Three hours lecture. Pre- or co-requisites: 
Chemistry 331 , 333, or consent of instruc- 
tor. 

348 & 448 CHEMISTRY COLLOQUIUM 

A seminar in which faculty, students, and 
invited professional chemists discuss their 
own reseach activities or those of others 
which have appeared in recent chemical liter- 
ature. Prerequisite: Three semesters of non- 
credit Chemistry Colloquium taken during 
the junior and senior years. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

The student will ordinarily work under 
supervision in an industrial laboratory and 
submit a written report on his project. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 

(See index) 
The student will ordinarily work on a labora- 
tory research project and will write a thesis 
on his work. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 
The student will ordinarily work on a labora- 
tory research project with emphasis being on 
the student's show ing initiative and making a 
scholarly contribution. A thesis will be writ- 
ten. 



CRIMINAL JUSTICE 



Assistant Professor: Strauser 
(Coordinator) 

This major is designed to acquaint 
students with the American criminal jus- 
tice system and to provide an under- 
standing of the social, psychological, 
philosophical, and political contexts 
within which the system of criminal jus- 
tice functions. Its aim is to develop stu- 
dents' intellectual and scientific skills in 
raising and attempting to answer impor- 
tant questions about the system of justice 
and its place in society. The program 
offers opportunity for intern experience 
in the field, and prepares for careers in 
the areas of law enforcement, probation 
and parole, prisons, and treatment ser- 
vices. 

The major has two tracks. Track I 
prepares for careers in law enforcement. 
Track II prepares for careers in correc- 
tions. 

Track I — Law Enforcement. 

The major consists of 10 courses, dis- 
tributed as follows: 

A. Professional courses in criminal 
justice (three courses): 
Introduction to the Criminal Justice 
System (Sociology and Anthropolo- 
gy H5) 

Introduction to Law Enforcement 
(Sociology and Anthropology 223) 
The American Prison System 
(Sociology and Anthropology 339) 

B. Courses in the social, psychological, 
philosophical, and political context 
of the justice system (seven courses): 
Criminology (Sociology and Anthro- 
pology 300) and either Juvenile 
Delinquency (Sociology and Anthro- 
pology 221) or Racial and Cultural 
Minorities (Sociology and Anthro- 
pology 334) (two courses) 
Abnormal Psychology (Psychology 
1 16) (one course) 

America as a Civilization (American 
Studies 200). Afro-American History 
(History 230) or United States Social 
and Intellectual History Since 1877 
(Historv 443) (one course) 



32 



Law and Society (Political Science 
335) and Civil Rights and Liberties 
(Political Science 33 1 ) (two courses) 
Philosophical Issues in Criminal Jus- 
tice (Philosophy 218) (one course) 
C. Internship or practicum in law 
enforcement. (Recommended but not 
required for the major) 

Track II — Corrections. 

The major consists of 10 courses, dis- 
tributed as follows: 

A. Professional courses in criminal 
justice (three courses): 
Introduction to the Criminal Justice 
System (Sociology and Anthropolo- 
gy 115) 

The American Prison System 
(Sociology and Anthropology 339) 
Introduction to Human Services 
(Sociology and Anthropology 222) 

B. Courses in the social, psychological, 
philosophical, and political context 
of the justice system (seven courses): 
Criminology (Sociology and Anthro- 
pology 300) and either Juvenile 
Delinquency (Sociology and Anthro- 
pology 221) or Racial and Cultural 
Minorities (Sociology and Anthro- 
pology 334) (two courses) 
Abnormal Psychology (Psychology 
1 16) (one course) 

America as a Civilization (American 
Studies 200), Afro- American History 
(History 230) or United States Social 
and Intellectual History Since 1877 
(History 443) (one course) 
Law and Society (Political Science 
335) and Civil Rights and Liberties 
(Political Science 331) (two courses) 
Philosophical Issues in Criminal Jus- 
tice (Philosophy 218) (One course) 

C. Internship or practicum in correc- 
tions. (Recommended but not 
required for the major). Prerequi- 
sites: Mathematics 103, Psychology 
431 . and Psychology 239. These pre- 
requisites may be waived in certain 
cases by the coordinating committee. 

Majors should seek advice concerning 
course selection from members of the 
coordinating committee and should note 
course prerequisites in planning their 
programs. 



A minor in Criminal Justice consists 
of five courses. Required courses 
include: Soc 1 15. Introduction to Crimi- 
nal Justice; and any four other courses in 
the Criminal Justice major listed above, 
at least three of which must be numbered 
200 or above. To receive credit for a 
minor in Criminal Justice, a student must 
maintain a minimum 2.0 cum in courses 
completed for the minor. 



ECONOMICS 

Professor: Opdahl (Chairperson) 

The major has two tracks. Track I is 
designed for the student whose primary 
interest lies in business management; 
Track II is designed to provide a broad 
understanding of economic theory and its 
application to economic, social, and 
business problems. In addition to pre- 
paring students for a career in business or 
government, this track provides an 
excellent background for graduate or 
professional studies. 

Track I — Managerial Economics 

requires Economics 1 10, 111, 332, and 
either 330 or 441 ; Business 1 10 and 111 
or Accounting 110 and 220; Business 
338 and 339, plus two electives from 
Economics 220, 229, 331, 335, 337, 
443, and Business 440. Business 340 
(Investments) may be substituted for 
Business 339 (Financial Management 
II). 

Track II — Political Economy requires 
Economics 1 10 and 1 1 1 . 331 , 440, 330 
or 441, and three other courses in eco- 
nomics. Depending on their academic 
and career interests, students are encour- 
aged to select a minor in another depart- 
ment such as political science, philoso- 
phy, or history. 

In addition, the following courses are 
recommended: all majors — Math 103 
and Business 223; majors planning gra- 
dute work — Math 1 1 2 and 1 28 ; Track 1 1 
majors — Business 110 and 1 1 1 or 
Accounting 1 10 and 220. 

A minor in Economics requires the 



completion of Economics 1 10 and 1 1 1 
and three other economics courses num- 
bered 200 or above, or any four econom- 
ics courses numbered 200 or above. 

102 CONSUMER ECONOMICS 

A course in "family" or "practical" eco- 
nomics, designed to leach students how they 
and their families can be intelligent consum- 
ers: that is. how they can spend, save, and 
borrow so as to maximize the value they 
receive for the income they have. Treats 
subjects such as intelligent shopping; the 
uses and abuses of credit; investing savings; 
buying insurance, automobiles, and houses; 
medical care costs; estates and wills, etc. 
Alternate years. 

1 10 PRINCIPLES OF 
POLITICAL ECONOMY I 
Macroeconomics. Deals with problems of 
the economic system as a whole. What influ- 
ences the level of national income and 
employment? What is inflation and why do 
we have it? What is the role of government in 
a modern capitalistic system? How does 
business organize to produce the goods and 
services we demand? How are the American 
financial and banking systems organized? 
What is the nature of American unionism ? 
What are the elements of government finance 
and fiscal policy? 

1 1 1 PRINCIPLES OF 
POLITICAL ECONOMY II 

This course focuses upon microeconomics 
and selected current economic problems It 
deals with the relatively small units of the 
economy such as the firm and the family. 
Analyzes demand and supply Discusses 
how business firms decide what and how 
much to produce and how goods and services 
are priced in different types of markets. Also 
considers such problems as economic 
growth, international trade, poverty, discri- 
mination, ecology, and alternative economic 
systems. 

220 MONEY AND BANKING 

Covers business fluctuations and monetary 
and fiscal policy: the financial organization 
of society; the banking system; credit insti- 
tutions; capital markets, and international 
financial relations. Prerequisite: Economics 
110 and 221. 

221 COMPARATIVE 
ECONOMIC SYSTEMS 

A comparative analysis of the underlying 
ideologies, the basic institutions, and the 
performance of selected economic systems. 
Alternate years. 

224 URBAN PROBLEMS 

The application of economic theory to the 
study of significant social, political, and 



33 



economic problems associated with urbani- 
zation, including poverty, employment, edu- 
cation, crime, health, housing, land use and 
the environment, transportation, and public 
finance. Analysis of solutions offered. Alter- 
nate years. 

225 ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS 

A study of the relationship between environ- 
mental decay and economic growth, with 
particular reference to failures of the price 
and property-rights systems; application of 
cost/benefit analysis, measures aimed at the 
creation of an ecologically viable economy. 

226 DEVELOPMENT OF LESS 
DEVELOPED COUNTRIES 

A study of the theories and problems of 
capital accumulation, allocation of 
resources, technological development, 
growth, planning techniques, and institu- 
tions and international relations encountered 
by the developing nations. Alternate years. 

229 BUSINESS CYCLES 
AND FORECASTING 

An introduction to the nature and history of 
business fluctuations, the tools used in 
aggregate analysis, theories that seek to 
explain the cycle, and techniques used in 
forecasting economic activity. Prerequisite: 
Economics 1 10 or permission of the instruc- 
tor. Alternate years. 

330 INTERMEDIATE MICROECONOMICS 
An advanced analysis of contemporary 
theory regarding consumer demand, pro- 
duction costs and theory, profit maximiza- 
tion, market structures, and the determinants 
of returns to the factors of production. Pre- 
requisites: Economics 110 and 111 . Alter- 
nate years. Not open to students who have 
i,i eived credit for Economics 441 . 

331 INTERMEDIATE MACROECONOMICS 
An advanced analysis of contemporary 
theory and practice with regard to business 
fluctuations, national income accounting, 
the determination of income and employ- 
ment levels, and the use of monetary and 
fiscal policy. Prerequisites: Economics 1 10 
and 111. Alternate years. 

332 GOVERNMENT AND THE ECONOMY 
An analytical survey of government's ettorts 
to maintain competition through antitrust 
legislation; to supervise acceptable cases ol 
private monopoly through public utility reg- 
ulation and via means of regulatory commis- 
sions, and to encourage or restrain various 
types of private economic activities Prereq- 
uisites: Economics I III unci III or consent oj 
instructor. 

335 LABOR PROBLEMS 

The history of organized labor in the United 
States, including the structure of unions. 



employers' opposition to unions, the role of 
government in labor-management relations. 
the economic impact of unions. Alternate 
yean 

337 PUBLIC FINANCE 

An analysis of the fiscal economics of the 
public sector, including the development, 
concepts, and theories of public expendi- 
tures, taxation, and debt at all levels of 
American government. Includes also the use 
of fiscal policy as an economic control 
device Prerequisites: Economics 110 and 
111 or consent of instructor . Alternate years. 

440 HISTORY OF ECONOMIC THOUGHT 
A discussion of the origins, development, 
and significance of the economic ideas 
embodied in the works of Smith. Marx, 
Schumpeter. Keynes, and others. Prerequi- 
sites: Economics 110 and 111 or consent of 
instructor. Alternate years. 

441 MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS 

The application of economic theory and 
methodology to the solution of business 
problems. Subjects include: optimizing tech- 
niques, risk analysis, demand theory, pro- 
duction theory, cost theory, linear program- 
ming, capital budgeting, market structures, 
and the theory of pricing. Prerequisites: 
Economics 110 and 111. Some understand- 
ing of differential calculus is recommended. 
Not open to students who have received 
credit for Economics 3 30. 

443 INTERNATIONAL TRADE 

A study of the principles, theories, develop- 
ment, and policies concerning international 
economic relations, with particular reference 
to the United States. Subjects covered 
include: U.S. commercial policy and its 
development, international trade theory, 
tariffs and other protectionist devices, inter- 
national monetary system and its problems, 
balance of payments issues. Alternate years. 
Prerequisites: Economics 110 and 111. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Typically off campus in business, banking, 
or government, supervised by assigned 
employee of sponsoring organization. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 

(Sec index) 
Superior students may select independent 
study in various courses, particularly in pre- 
paration tor graduate school 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index I 



EDUCATION 



Associate Professor: Keesbury 

(on leave) 
Assistant Professors: Conrad 

(Chairperson), Cherrington 

Lycoming believes that the liberal arts 
provide the best preparation for future 
teachers, thus all education students 
complete a liberal-arts major in addition 
to the certification requirements. Stu- 
dents can be certified in elementary edu- 
cation or one or more of the following 
secondary areas: biology, chemistry, 
English, French, general science (with 
biology or astronomy/physics tracks), 
German, mathematics, physics, social 
studies, and Spanish. All teacher- 
education programs are approved by the 
Pennsylvania Department of Education, 
and Pennsylvania certificates are recog- 
nized in most other states whether 
through reciprocal agreements or by 
transcript evaluation. 

Education 200 and Psychology 338 
are prerequisites to all other offerings in 
the Department of Education. Education 
200 should be taken at least two semes- 
ters before the professional semester. 

Students seeking elementary certifi- 
cation must complete Mathematics 105, 
Education 341, 342. 343 and 344 as 
prerequisites to the professional semester 
(Education 445, 447, and 448). 

Students interested in the teacher- 
education program should consult with a 
member of the department no later than 
the first semester of the sophomore year. 
Application for the professional semester 
must be made during the Fall Semester of 
the junior year. The Department of Edu- 
cation will admit to the professional 
semester those applicants who are in 
good academic standing, have satisfac- 
torily completed the participation 
requirements, have paid the student 
teaching fee. and have received a posi- 
tive recommendation based upon: (a) 
letters from each student's major depart- 
ment, two additional faculty outside the 
Department of Education: (b) a screening 
interview conducted by the Education 
Department, and (c) a writing sample 



34 



from each student applicant. Major 
departments have different criteria for 
their recommendations. Therefore, stu- 
dents should consult with the chairperson 
of their major department about those 
requirements as soon as they begin to 
study for certification. 

005 DEVELOPMENTAL SEMINAR 

The course focuses on developing reading 
and study skills which are useful in college. 
Reading comprehension, vocabulary build- 
ing, and critical reading are especially 
emphasized. Study skills, including time 
management, textbook reading, reading- 
study systems, notetaking. test-taking skills, 
and library reference skills are also stressed. 
Open only to freshmen who are enrolled in 
Engish 005 or with consent of instructor. 
One-half unit of credit. 

200 INTRODUCTION TO 

THE STUDY OF EDUCATION 

A study of teaching as a profession with 
emphasis on the economic, social, political, 
and religious conditions which influence 
American schools and teachers. Considera- 
tion is given to the school environment, the 
curriculum, and the children with the inten- 
tion that students will examine more ration- 
ally their own motives for entering the pro- 
fession. 

232 INSTRUCTIONAL MEDIA 
AND COMMUNICATIONS 

A study of the value, design, construction, 
and application of the visual and auditory 
aids to learning. Practical experience in the 
handling of audio-visual equipment and 
materials is provided. Application of audio- 
visual techniques. Application of the visual 
and auditory aids to learning. Students will 
plan and carry out actual teaching assign- 
ments utilizing various A-V devices. 

239 PUBLIC SCHOOL CURRICULUM 

An examination of the various curricula of 
the public schools and their relationships to 
current practices. Special attention will be 
given to the meaning and nature of the curric- 
ulum, the desirable outcomes of the curric- 
ulum, conflicting and variant conceptions of 
curricular content, modem techniques of 
curricular construction . criteria for the evalu- 
ation of curricula, the curriculum as a teach- 
ing instrument. Emphasis will be placed 
upon the curriculum work w ithin the teach- 
ing field of each individual. 

341 TEACHING THE SOCIAL STUDIES 
IN THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 
Studies and experiences to develop a basic 
understanding of the structure, concepts, and 
processes of anthropology, economics, 
geography, history, .political science, and 
sociology as they relate to the elementary 



school social-science cumculum. Practical 
applications, demonstrations of methods, 
and the development of integrated teaching 
units using tests, reference books, films, and 
other leaching materials Observation and 
participation in Greater Williamsport 
elementary schools. Prerequisites: Educa- 
tion 200 and Psychology 338 or consent of 
instructor. 

342 TEACHING SCIENCE IN 
THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 

Science methods and materials interpreting 
children's science experiences and guiding 
the development of their scientific concepts. 
A study of the science content of the curricu- 
lum, its material, and use. Observation and 
participation in Greater Williamsport 
elementary schools. Prerequisites: Educa- 
tion 200 and Psychology 338 or consent of 
instructor. 

343 TEACHING LANGUAGE ARTS 
AND CHILDREN'S LITERATURE IN 
THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL. 

A course designed to consider the principal 
means of communication, oral and written, 
including both practical and creative uses. 
Attention will be given to listening, speak- 
ing, written expression, linguistics and 
grammar, spelling, and handwriting. Stress 
will be placed upon the interrelatedness of 
the language arts. Children's literature will 
be explored as a vehicle for developing crea- 
tive characteristics in children and for ensur- 
ing an appreciation of the creative writing of 
others. Observation and participation in 
Greater Williamsport elementary schools. 
Prerequisites: Education 200 and Psycholo- 
gy 338 or consent of instructor. 

344 TEACHING READING IN 
THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 

A basic course in the philosophy and ration- 
ale for the implementation of an elementary 
developmental-reading program from kin- 
dergarten through sixth grade Emphasis is 
upon designing a reading instructional pro- 
gram which reflects the nature of the learning 
process and recognizes principles of child 
development through examination of the 
principles, problems, methods, and materi- 
als used in elementary reading programs. 
Observation and participation in Greater 
Williamsport elementary schools. Prerequi- 
sites: Psychology 338. Education 200. or 
consent of instructor. 

445 METHODS OF TEACHING 

IN THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 
(PART OF THE 
PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 
The course emphasizes the relationship 
between the theoretical studies of physical, 
social, and cognitive development and the 
elementary classroom environment. Parti- 
cular consideration will be given to the 



appropriate age and developmental level of 
the students with an emphasis upon selection 
and utilization of methods in all the elemen- 
tary subject areas, including art and music. 
Specific attention will be given to the devel- 
opment of strategies for structuring lesson 
plans, for maintaining classroom control, 
and for overall classroom management. 
Direct application will be made to the indi- 
vidual student-teaching experience. Prereq- 
uisites: Math 105. Education 341. 342. 343 
and 344, or consent of instructor. 

446 METHODS OF TEACHING 

IN THE SECONDARY SCHOOL 
(PART OF THE 
PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 
A study of materials, methods, and tech- 
niques with emphasis on the student's major. 
Stress is placed on the selection and utiliza- 
tion of visual and auditory aids to learning. 
Students w ill teach demonstration lessons in 
the presence of the instructor and the mem- 
bers of the class and will observe superior 
teachers in Greater Williamsport secondary- 
schools. Prerequisites: Education 200. Psx- 
chology 338. and the participation experi- 
ence. 

447 PROBLEMS IN CONTEMPORARY 
AMERICAN EDUCATION 
(PART OF THE 
PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 
Seminar in the issues, problems, and chal- 
lenges encountered by teachers in the Ameri- 
can public schools, especially those related 
to the student-teaching experience. 

448 STUDENT TEACHING 

IN THE ELEMENTARY SCHOOL 
(PART OF THE 
PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 
Two units. Exceeds state-mandated mini- 
mum requirements. Professional laboratory 
experience under the supervision of a 
selected cooperating teacher in a public 
elementary school in Greater Williamsport. 
Organizes learning experiences. Actual 
classroom experience.* 

449 STUDENT TEACHING 

IN THE SECONDARY SCHOOL 
(PART OF THE 
PROFESSIONAL SEMESTER) 
Two units. Exceeds state-mandated mini- 
mum requirements. Professional laboratory 
experience under the supervision of a 
selected cooperating teacher in a public sec- 
ondary school in Greater Williamsport. 
Organized learning experience. Emphasis on 
actual classroom experience, responsibility 
in the guidance program, and out-of-class 
activities.* 

*Student teachers are required to follow the calen- 
dar of the school district to which thev are assigned. 



35 



ENGLISH 



Professors: Jensen (Chairperson), 

Van Marter 
Associate Professor: Rife 
Assistant Professors; Gold, 

Moses, Wild 
Part-time Instructors: Hartsock, Lakey, 

Logue, Stone 

A major consists of nine courses not 
including English 005 or 106. These nine 
courses must include English 217, 220. 
22 1 . 222, 223, and one from English 335 
and 336. 

The remaining electives may include 
any course from English 1 12 and above 
not already taken to satisfy the preceding 
requirements. With the consent of the 
Department of English, an appropriate 
course from the offerings of other depart- 
ments may be substituted for an English 
elective. 

Majors seeking secondary certifica- 
tion in English are required to take Eng- 
lish 335 and English 338. 

The Department of English partici- 
pates with seven others in the American 
Studies interdisciplinary major, in which 
American literature courses constitute an 
important part of the American-arts con- 
centration area. 

Because of its emphasis on communi- 
cation skills, a major or a minor in Eng- 
lish is excellent preparation for a wide 
range of professions. In addition to pre- 
paring students for graduate work or for 
teaching, a major or a minor in English 
can be valuable for those interested in a 
career in law, ministry, publishing, edit- 
ing or writing, and business, to name a 
few. 

Two minors are available in the 
Department of English. A minor in Liter- 
ature consists of five literature courses 
numbered 1 1 2 and above, three of which 
must be numbered 200 or above, and at 
least one of which must be numbered 300 
or above. With the written consent of the 
department, one writing course may be 
substituted for a literature course. A 
minor in Writing consists of five courses 
selected from the following: English 
215, 216. 217. 228. 327. 329 and 338; 



cither 216 or 217 is required. With the 
written consent of the department, one 
literature course may be substituted for a 
writing course. 

005 WORKSHOP IN 

DEVELOPMENTAL WRITING 
Classroom and laboratory instruction in or- 
ganizing and writing the detailed paragraph 
and illustrative expository theme, with major 
emphasis on spelling, grammar, and sen- 
tence structure Writing assignments and 
classroom exercises designed to ensure 
mastery of the student's special problems in 
basic writing. 

One-half unit grade of "S" will be 
assigned when the student has successfully 
completed all of the work in the course. 
Required of. and limited to, those who have 
not been exempted from English 005. 

106 COMPOSITION 

Extensive practice in analytical writing. Spe- 
cial emphasis on developing the composing 
skills needed to articulate and defend a posi- 
tion in various situations requiring the use of 
written English. 

1 1 2 INTRODUCTION TO LITERATURE 

An introduction to the study of literature 
designed for the general student and utilizing 
one of the following approaches: major liter- 
ary genres, selected literary masterpieces, or 
traditional themes in literature. Prerequisite: 
English 106 or consent of instructor. 

2 1 5 INTRODUCTION TO MEDIA WRITING 
Analysis of and practice in the basic forms of 
media writing: the elements of lead, style and 
structure. Frequent workshop sessions for 
detailed critiques and discussion of student 
writing. Prerequisites: Mass Communica- 
tion 1 10 or consent of instructor, and a grade 
of C or better in English 106. 

216 WRITING FOR SPECIAL AUDIENCES 
Intensive practice in writing and presenting 
information to various audiences within the 
student's own discipline Includes training in 
the use of graphics and in basic library 
research methods Prerequisites: a grade of 
C or better in English 106 or consent of 
instructor. Alternate years. 

217 CRITICAL WRITING 

Designed to provide intermediate students of 
literature with the critical skills necessary for 
an understanding of poetry, fiction, drama, 
and film Intensive reading and extensive 
practice in writing the critical essay. 
Required of English majors. Prerequisite: 
English 106 or consent of instructor. 

220 BRITISH LITERATURE I 

Literal} forms, themes, and authors from the 

Anglo-Saxon through the Nco-Classical 



periods. Such writers as Chaucer, Spenser, 
Shakespeare, Milton. Swift. Pope, and John- 
son; representative works from Beowulf to 
Sterne's Sentimental Journey. Prerequisite: 
English 106 or consent of instructor. 

221 BRITISH LITERATURE II 

Literary movements and authors from the 
Romantic Period to the present. Particular 
emphasis on such writers as Blake. Words- 
worth. Shelley, Keats, Tennyson. Brown- 
ing. Arnold, Hardy. Yeats. Eliot. Prerequi- 
site: English 106 or consent of instructor. 

222 AMERICAN LITERATURE I 

Brief survey of American literature and 
thought before 1800. followed by more 
intensive study of the literature and thought 
of the period 1800-1900. Major focus on the 
works of Emerson. Thoreau, Poe. Hawthor- 
ne, Melville, Whitman. Dickinson, and 
Howells. Prerequisite: English 106 or con- 
sent of instructor. 

223 AMERICAN LITERATURE II 

Major writers, movements, and tendencies 
in American literature during the present 
century. Such forces as naturalism, realism, 
and modernism; such writers as James, 
Dreiser, Hemingway. Faulkner, Frost, and 
Stevens. Prerequisite: English 106 or con- 
sent of instructor. 

224 THE SHORT STORY 

Historical and critical study of the short 
story. Consideration of representative exam- 
ples of the form w ith emphasis on American 
and European writers of the 19th and 20th 
centuries. Prerequisite: English 106 or con- 
sent of instructor. 

225 THE NOVEL 

Historical study of the development of the 
novel from the 18th through the 20th centu- 
ries. Novels analyzed both as works of prose 
art and as turning points in the development 
of the novel Alternate years. Prerequisite: 
English 106 or consent of instructor. 

226 LITERATURE AND FILM 

The relationship between the conventions of 
literature and film with emphasis on exami- 
nation of representative literary and film 
works. Media comparison to reveal the 
problems of adaptation. Prerequisite: 
English 106 or consent of instructor. 

228 CREATIVE WRITING WORKSHOP: 
FICTION AND POETRY 
A beginning course in the theory and practice 
of writing fiction and poetry. Students may 
concentrate in either genre or both. Alternate 
years. Prerequisite: English 106 or consent 
of instructor. 



36 



327 PRINT JOURNALISM 

Techniques in reporting news and trends at 
the local, regional, and county levels; 
emphasis on writing the longer news and 
feature article, the editorial, and the investi- 
gative news story. Prerequisite: a grade ofC 
or better in English 21S. Alternate years. 

329 BUSINESS AND 

PUBLICITY WRITING 

Analyzing media and audiences for public 
relations and business purposes; planning, 
designing, and writing business reports and 
procedures: press relations and publicity 
methods; the news and feature publicity 
release. Prerequisites: a grade ofC or better 
in English 215 or completion of at least one 
Business Administration or Accounting 
course. Alternate years. 



330 ROMANTIC LITERATURE 

A study of the major poetry and fiction, plus 
some non-fiction prose, written during the 
years. 1789-1832. Emphasis on the work of 
at least three poets, two novelists, and 
assorted prose writers. Prerequisite: English 
106 or consent of instructor. Alternate years. 



331 MODERN FICTION 

Study of the novels and short fiction of such 
major British and American figures as Con- 
rad, Forster, Woolf, Lawrence, Joyce, 
Hemingway, Faulkner, Nabokov, and Bel- 
low. Prerequisite: English 106 or consent of 
instructor. 

332 MODERN POETRY 

A study of the poetry written in this century, 
beginning with Yeats and Eliot and continu- 
ing through such writers as Frost, Williams, 
Moore, Stevens, Auden, Lowell. Roethke, 
Thomas, Ginsberg, and Rich. Prerequisite: 
English 106 or consent of instructor. Alter- 
nate years. 

333 COMEDY. TRAGEDY. AND 
THE MODERN THEATRE 

Introduction to the theories of comedy and 
tragedy as those theories help us to deepen 
our response to the theatre. Major focus on 
plays, including musicals, from Ibsen and 
Shaw to the present. Prerequisite: English 
106 or consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

334 WOMEN AND LITERATURE 
Through an examination — literary, social, 
and historical — of selected British and 
American literature by women, this course 
will seek to identify those elements which 
distinguish women's particular contribution 
to the literary canon. Prerequisite: English 
106 or consent of instructor. Alternate years. 



335 CHAUCER 

A study of the major works with emphasis on 
The Canterbury Tales and Troilus and Cri- 
seyde. Some attention to the traditions out of 
which these works arose. Required of majors 
seeking secondary certification in English. 
Prerequisite: English 106 or consent of 
instructor. Alternate years. 

336 SHAKESPEARE 

A study of representative plays: comedies, 
tragedies, histories, romances. Attention 
given to Shakespeare's life and times. Pre- 
requisite: English 106 or consent of instruc- 
tor. Alternate years. 

338 LINGUISTICS AND THE ANALYSIS 
OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE 
Introduction to methods of analyzing spoken 
and written English. Classroom work sup- 
ported by weekly tutorials, in which the 
student gains practical experience in iden- 
tifying, diagnosing, and correcting basic 
communications problems. Required of 
majors seeking secondary certification in 
English. Prerequisite: English 106 or con- 
sent of instructor. Alternate years. 

440 SELECTED WRITERS 

An intensive study of no more than three 
writers, selected on the basis of student and 
faculty interest. Possible combinations 
include: Frost. Hemingway, and Faulkner; 
O'Connor, Welty, and Porter; Spenser and 
Milton; Hawthorne. Melville, and Dickens; 
Woolf. Forster. and Lawrence; Joyce and 
Yeats. May be repeated for credit if the 
writers are different. Prerequisite: English 
106 or consent of instructor . Alternate years. 

441 TOPICS IN LITERATURE 
Examination of a literary theme, idea, or 
movement as it appears in one or more types 
of literature and as it cuts across various 
epochs. Possible topics include: American 
Novelists and Poets of the Jazz Age and 
Depression; Religion and Literature; Gothic 
Tradition in American Literature; Realism in 
the Novel; Literary Modernism; Literature 
and Mythology; The Hero in Literature. May- 
be repeated for credit if the topic is different. 
Prerequisite: English 106 or consent of 
instructor. Alternate years. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Interns typically work off campus in a pro- 
fession related to their career interest such as 
law. public relations, journalism, and others. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 

(See index) 
Recent studies include The Arthurian 
Legend. Shakespeare's Women, D.H. 
Lawrence, and T.S. Eliot: The Social Vis- 
ion. 



490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 
Recent projects include The Creative Process 
in Literature and Art and Images of Women 
in the I890's. 



FOREIGN LANGUAGES 

AND LITERATURES 

Associate Professors: Flam, Maples, 

MacKenzie (Chairperson) 
Assistant Professor: Barker 

Study of foreign languages and litera- 
tures offers opportunity to explore 
broadly the varieties of human experi- 
ence and thought. It contributes both to 
personal and to international under- 
standing by providing competence in a 
foreign language and a critical acquain- 
tance with the literature and culture of 
foreign peoples. A major can serve as 
entree to careers in business, industry, 
government, publishing, education, 
journalism, social agencies, translating, 
and writing. It prepares for graduate 
work in literature or linguistics and the 
international fields of politics, com- 
merce, law, health, and area studies. 

French, German, and Spanish are 
offered as major fields of study. The 
major consists of at least eight courses 
numbered 1 1 1 or above. Majors seeking 
teacher certification and students plan- 
ning to enter graduate school are advised 
to begin study of a second foreign lan- 
guage. The department encourages the 
development in breadth of programs, 
including allied courses from related 
fields or a second major, and also indi- 
vidual or established interdisciplinary 
majors combining interest in several lit- 
eratures or area or cross-cultural studies; 
for example, International Studies, 20th 
Century Studies, the Major in Literature. 
Majors, teacher certification candidates, 
and all students are encouraged to spend 
at least a semester of study abroad by 
applying to one of the many programs 
available. The department maintains a 
file of such programs. 

Courses taught in English: Foreign 
Languages and Literatures 225, French 



37 



228 (Section A) and Spanish 331 (Sec- 
tion A). 

Foreign Languages and Literatures 

225 CONTINENTAL LITERATURE 

A study of such major continental authors as 
Cervantes. Dostoevsky. Chekhov. Dante. 
Ibsen. Proust, Gide. Kafka. Hesse. Goethe, 
Sartre, Camus. Brecht. and lonesco. Work-. 
read in English translation will vary and be 
organized around a different theme or topic; 
recent topics have been existentialism, mod- 
ernism, drama, the Weimar era, and 20th 
century Scandinavian and German prose 
writers. Prerequisite: None. May be 
repeated for credit with consent of instruc- 
tor. May be accepted toward the English 
major with consent of the Department of 
English. 

338 FOREIGN LANGUAGE: 
SYSTEMS AND PROCESS 
Study of basic linguistic concepts as a tool 
for language learning and teaching. Discus- 
sion and application of languge teaching 
techniques, including work in the language 
laboratory. Designed for future teachers of 
one or more languages and normally taken in 
the junior year. Students should arrange 
through the Department of Education to ful- 
fill in the same semester the requirements of 
a participation experience in area schools. 
Prerequisite: consent of instructor 

French 

A major consists of a minimum of 
eight courses numbered 111 or above, 
including at least two from 402, 412, 
423. and 427. In addition, all majors who 
wish to be certified for teaching must 
pass courses 221-222, and Foreign Lan- 
guages and Literatures 338 (the latter 
course with a C or better). 

A minor in French consists of at least 
four courses numbered 221 and above. 
Courses 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 may be counted 
toward the minor, but then the minor 
must consist of at least five courses, three 
of which must be numbered 200 and 
above. 

101-102 ELEMENTARY FRENCH 

The aim of the course is to acquire the funda 
mentals of the language with a view to using 
them Regular practice in speaking, under- 
standing, and reading. 

1 11-1 12 INTERMEDIATE FRENCH 

Review and development of the fundamen- 
tals of the language for immediate use in 
speaking, understanding, and reading with a 



view to building confidence in self- 
expression. Prerequisite: French 102 or 
equivalent. 

221-222 FRENCH LANGUAGE PRACTICE 
Further training in speaking, listening com- 
prehension, reading, and writing. Includes 
extensive work in grammar. Prerequisite. 
French 112 or equivalent. 

228 MODERN FRANCE 

A course designed to familiarize students 
with political and social structures and cul- 
tural attitudes in contemporary French soci- 
ety Materials studied may include such 
documents as newspaper articles, interviews 
and sociological surveys, and readings in 
history, religion, anthropology, and the arts 
Some attention to the changing education 
system and the family and to events and ideas 
which have shaped French society. May 
include some comparative study of France 
and the United States. 

English Section: Not applicable toward 
satisfying the foreign language distribution 
requirement. Prerequisite: none. 

French Section: Offers readings, papers, 
and interviews in French for students with 
sufficient language skill. Can be applied 
toward the foreign language distribution 
requirement. Prerequisite: French 221 or 
consent of instructor. 

402 FRENCH LITERATURE TO 1800 

Major authors and movements from the 
Medieval. Renaissance. Classical and 
Enlightenment periods. Includes the chan- 
son de geste. Villon. Montaigne. Corneille, 
Racine. Moliere, Voltaire and Rousseau. 
Prerequisite: French 222 or 228 or consent 
of instructor. Alternate years. 

4 1 2 FRENCH LITERATURE OF 
THE 19TH CENTURY 

The dimensions of the Romantic sensibility: 
Musset, Hugo. Vigny. Balzac. Stendhal 
Realism and Naturalism in the novels of 
Flaubert and Zola. Reaction in the poetry of 
Baudelaire, Rimbaud, Verlaine, and Mallar- 
mc. Prerequisite: French 222 or 228 or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

423 MODERN FRENCH THEATRE 

Major trends in French drama from the turn 
of the century to Existentialism and the 
Theatre of the Absurd. Giraudoux. Anouilh. 
Sartre. Camus. Beckett, lonesco. Genet. 
Adamov. and others. Prerequisite: French 
222 or 22S or consent of instructor. 

427 FRENCH LITERATURE OF 
THE 20TH CENTURY 
Representative poets and novelists of mod- 
ern France Readings selected from the 
works of authors such as Proust. Gide. Ara- 
gon. Giono, Mauriac. Celine. Malraux. 



Saint-Exupery, Camus, the "new novelists" 
(Robbe-Gnllet. Butor. Sarraute. Le Clezio). 
and the poetry of Apollinaire. Valery. the 
Surrealists (Breton. Reverdy. Eluard. Charl. 
Saint-John Perse. Superviellc. Prevert. and 
others. Some attention to works of French- 
speaking African writers. Prerequisite: 
French 222 or 228 or consent of instructor. 
Alternate years. 

44 1 ADVANCED LANGUAGE PRACTICE 
Intensive practice for advanced students who 
wish to improve further their spoken and 
written French. Includes work in oral com- 
prehension, phonetics, pronunciation, oral 
and written composition, and translation. 
Prerequisite: one course from French 402. 
412, 423. 427 or consent of instructor. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Examples of recent studies in French include 
translation, existentialism, the classical peri- 
od, enlightenment literature, and Saint- 
Exupery. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 



German 

A major consists of a minimum of 
eight courses numbered 1 1 1 or above. 
One unit of Foreign Languages and Lit- 
eratures 225 may be included in the 
major with permission. German 431 or 
German 441 is required of all majors. 

All majors who wish to be certified for 
teaching must pass German 323 and 325. 
In addition to the eight courses for the 
major they must also pass Foreign Lan- 
guages and Literatures 338 with a grade 
of C or better. All majors are urged to 
enroll in History 416, Music 336, Politi- 
cal Science 220 and Theatre 335. 

A minor in German consists of at least 
four courses numbered 200 and above. 
Courses 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 may be counted 
toward the minor, but then the minor 
must consist of at least five courses, three 
of which must be numbered 200 and 
above. 

101-102 ELEMENTARY GERMAN 

Aim of course is to acquire the fundamentals 
of the language with a view to using them. 
Regular practice in speaking, understanding. 
and reading. 



38 



111-112 INTERMEDIATE GERMAN 

Review and development of fundamentals of 
the language for immediate use in speaking, 
understanding, and reading with a view to 
building confidence in self-expression. 
Prerequisite: German 102 or equivalent. 

221-222 COMPREHENSIVE REVIEW AND 
LANGUAGE PRACTICE 
A two-semester course designed to review 
and develop skills in speaking, listening, 
writing and reading. Grammar and vocabul- 
ary building are stressed with intensive 
review, writing practice and some reading on 
contemporary issues in German-speaking 
countries. As the course progresses, greater 
emphasis is placed on speaking, listening 
comprehension, and translation. Some 
attention is given to the development of the 
language and its relationship to English . Pre- 
requisite: German 112 or equivalent. 

323 SURVEY OF GERMAN LITERATURE 
AND CIVILIZATION I 
Designed to acquaint the student with 
important periods of German literature, rep- 
resentative authors, and major cultural 
developments in Germany. Austria, and 
Switzerland. The course deals with literature 
and culture from the Early Middle Ages 
through the 18th century. Prerequisite: Ger- 
man 222 or consent of instructor. 

325 SURVEY OF GERMAN LITERATURE 
AND CIVILIZATION II 
Designed to acquaint the student with 
important periods of German literature, rep- 
resentative authors, and major cultural 
developments in Germany, Austria, and 
Switzerland. The course deals with literature 
and culture from the 19th century to the 
present. Prerequisite: German 222 or con- 
sent of instructor. 

4 1 1 THE NOVELLE 

The German Novelle as a genre relating to 
various literary periods. Prerequisite: Ger- 
man 323 or 325 or consent of instructor. 

421 GERMAN POETRY 

A study of selected poets or the poetry of 
various literary periods. Possible topics 
include: Romantic poetry. Heine, Rilke. and 
Benn. Prerequisite: German 323 or 325 or 
consent of instructor. 

43 1 GOETHE 

A study of the life and works of Goethe. 
Goethe's significance in the Classical period 
and later. Readings in the major works. 
Prerequisite: German 323 or 325 or consent 
of instructor. 

433 CLASSICAL GERMAN DRAMA 

The development of das klassische Drama 



with emphasis on works of Lessing, Goethe, 
Kleist, and Schiller Prerequisite: German 
323 or 325 or consent of instructor. 

441 CONTEMPORARY GERMAN 
LITERATURE 

Representative poets, novelists and drama- 
tists of contemporary Germany, Switzerland 
and Austria covering the period from 1 945 to 
the present. Readings selected from writers 
such as: Borchert, Boll. Brecht, Benn. 
Frisch. Diirrenmatt. Bichsel. Handke. Wal- 
ser. Grass and others. Prerequisite: German 
323 or 325 or consent of instructor. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Examples of recent studies in German 
include Classicism. Germanic Mythology, 
Hermann Hesse, the dramas of Frisch. and 
Diirrenmatt. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 

Greek 

Greek is not offered as a major. An 
interdisciplinary minor in Biblical Lan- 
guages requires the completion of Greek 
221, 222 and Hebrew 221 and 222. 

101-102 NEW TESTAMENT GRAMMAR 
AND READINGS 
Fundamentals of New Testament Greek 
grammar and readings of selected passages 
of the Greek text. Alternate years. 

221 READINGS IN THE 
SYNOPTIC GOSPELS 

A comparative study of the synoptic tradition 
in Greek. Prerequisite: Greek 102 or equi- 
valent. Alternate years. 

222 READINGS IN THE 
PAULINE EPISTLES 

Selected readings from the letters of Paul in 
Greek. Prerequisite: Greek 221 or equiva- 
lent. Alternate years. 

Hebrew 

Hebrew is not offered as a major. An 
interdisciplinary minor in Biblical Lan- 
guages requires the completion of Greek 
221, 222 and Hebrew 221 and 222. 

101-102 OLD TESTAMENT GRAMMAR 
AND READINGS 
Fundamentals of Old Testament Hebrew 
grammar and readings of selected passages 
of the Hebrew text. Alternate years. 



221 READINGS IN OLD 
TESTAMENT NARRATIVE 

A critical reading of the Hebrew text of 
selected narrative portions of the Old Testa- 
ment with special attention being given to 
exegetical questions. The text read varies 
from year to year. Prerequisite: Hebrew 102 
or equivalent. Alternate years. 

222 READINGS IN THE PROPHETIC 
BOOKS AND WISDOM LITERATURE 

A critical reading of the Hebrew text of 
selected portions of Old Testament prophecy 
and wisdom literature with special attention 
being given to exegetical questions. The text 
read varies from year to year. Prerequisite: 
Hebrew 221 or equivalent. Alternate years. 

Spanish 

A major consists of eight courses num- 
bered 1 1 1 or above. Foreign Languages 
and Literatures 338 does not count 
toward the major. 

All majors who wish to be certified for 
teaching in secondary school must pass 
Foreign Languages and Literatures 338 
(grade of C or better) and Spanish 448. 

A minor in Spanish consists of at least 
four courses numbered 200 and above. 
Courses 111 and 112 may be counted 
toward the minor, but then the minor 
must consist of at least five courses , three 
of which must be numbered 200 and 
above. 

101-102 ELEMENTARY SPANISH 

Aim of course is to acquire the fundamentals 
of the language with a view to using them. 
Regular practice in speaking, understanding, 
and reading. 

111-112 INTERMEDIATE SPANISH 

Review and development of fundamentals of 
the language for immediate use in speaking, 
understanding, reading and writing with a 
view to building confidence in self- 
expression. Usually the student chooses 
from among the following areas for their 
work in building vocabulary and fluency: 
Spanish for Business and Economics. Span- 
ish for Social Services, Spanish for Law 
Enforcement, Spanish for Health Care Pro- 
fessionals, or. for the student who does not 
plan to use the language for one of these 
specific career goals. Spanish for Communi- 
cation. Prerequisite: Spanish 102 or equi- 
valent. 

221-222 COMPREHENSIVE REVIEW AND 
LANGUAGE PRACTICE 
This course consists of a thorough review of 
grammar, drills for oral comprehension and 



39 



expression, discussion of readings and the 
writing of compositions. It is designed to 
develop the student's ability to read, write 
and converse in Spanish with confidence. 
Prerequisite: Spanish 1 12 or equivalent. 

311 HISPANIC CULTURE 

To introduce students to the Spanish- 
speaking people — their values, customs and 
institutions, with reference to the geographic 
and historical forces governing present-day 
Spain and Spanish America. Prerequisite: 
Spanish 222 or consent of instructor . Alter- 
nate years. 

323 SURVEY OF SPANISH 

LITERATURE AND CIVILIZATION 
Designed to acquaint the student with 
important periods of Spanish literature, rep- 
resentative authors, and major socio- 
economic developments. The course deals 
with the literature from the beginning to the 
present. Prerequisite: Spanish 222 or con- 
sent of instructor. Alternate years. 

325 SURVEY OF SPANISH-AMERICAN 
LITERATURE AND CIVILIZATION 
Designed to acquaint the student with 
important periods of Spanish-American liter- 
ature, representative authors, and major 
socio-economic developments. The course 
deals with the literature, especially the essay 
and poetry, from the 1 6th century to the 
present. Prerequisite: Spanish 222 or con- 
sent of instructor. Alternate years. 

418 ADVANCED LANGUAGE PRACTICE 

Intensive practice for advanced students who 
wish to improve further their spoken and 
written Spanish. Includes work in oral com- 
prehension, pronunciation, oral and written 
composition, and translation. Prerequisite: 
One Spanish course at the 300' s level or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

424 SPANISH LITERATURE OF 
THE GOLDEN AGE 

A study of representative works and princi- 
pal literary figures in the poetry, prose, and 
drama of the 16th and 17th centuries. Pre- 
requisite: Spanish 323. 325, or consent of 
instructor. 

426 MODERN HISPANIC LITERATURE 

Readings of important works of drama, poet- 
ry, and prose from the major periods of 1 yth 
and 20th century Spanish and Latin- 
American literature. Prerequisite: Spanish 
323, 325, or consent of instructor. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See indexl 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See indexl 
Recent studies include literary, linguistic. 



and cultural topics and themes such as urban 
problems as reflected in the modem novel. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 



HISTORY 

Professor: Piper 

Associate Professor: Larson 

Assistant Professor: Morris 

(Chairperson) 

A major consists of 10 courses, 
including 110, 111, and 449. At least 
seven courses must be taken in the 
department. The following courses may 
be counted toward fulfilling the major 
requirements: American Studies 200, 
Political Science 439, Religion 226 and 
228. Other appropriate courses outside 
the department may be counted upon 
departmental approval. For history 
majors who student teach in history, the 
major consists of nine courses. In addi- 
tion to the courses listed below, special 
courses, independent study, and honors 
are available. Special courses recently 
taught and anticipated include a biogra- 
phical study of European Monarchs, the 
European Left, the Industrialization and 
Urbanization of Modern Europe. Uto- 
pian Movements in America, the Peace 
Movement in America, The Vietnam 
War, and American Legal History. His- 
tory majors are encouraged to participate 
in the internship program. 

Three minors are offered by the 
Department of History. The following 
courses are required to complete a minor 
in American History: History 125, 126, 
and three courses in American history 
numbered 200 and above. A minor in 
European History requires the comple- 
tion of History 110. Ill, and three 
courses in European history numbered 
200 and above. To obtain a minor in 
History (without national or geographic 
designation), a student must complete 
six courses in history, of which three 
must be chosen from History 110. 111. 
125 and 126 and three must be history 
courses numbered 200 and above. 



105 SELECTED THEMES IN 
WESTERN CIVILIZATION 
A survey of the political, economic, social, 
and cultural values and institutions in West- 
ern Civilization from the time of classical 
Greece to the present. One-half unit of cred- 
it. (Not open to students who have had His- 
tory 110 and llll. 

lit) EUROPE 1500-1815 

An examination of the political, social, cul- 
tural, and intellectual history of Europe and 
its relations with other areas of the world 
from 1500 to 1815. 

Ill EUROPE 181 5-Present 

An examination of the political, social, cul- 
tural, and intellectual history of Europe and 
its relations with other areas of the world 
from 1815 to the present. 

120 LATIN AMERICAN HISTORY 

An examination of the native civilization, the 
age of discovery and conquest . Spanish colo- 
nial policy, the independence movements, 
and the development of modem institutions 
and governments in Latin America. Alter- 
nate years. 

125 UNITED STATES HISTORY 1607-1877 
A study of the men, measures, and move- 
ments which have been significant in the 
development of the United States between 
1607 and 1877. Attention is paid to the 
problems of minority groups as well as to 
majority and national influences. 

126 UNITED STATES HISTORY 
1877-Present 

A study of men, measures, and movements 
which have been significant in the develop- 
ment of the United States since 1877. Atten- 
tion is paid to the problems of minority 
groups as well as to majority and national 
influences. 

210 ANCIENT HISTORY 

A study of the ancient western world, 
including the foundations of the western 
tradition in Greece, the emergence and 
expansion of the Roman state, its experience 
as a republic, and its transformation into the 
Empire. The course will focus on the social 
and intellectual life of Greece and Rome as 
well as political and economic changes. 
Alternate years. 

212 MEDIEVAL EUROPE AND 
ITS NEIGHBORS 

The history of Europe from the dissolution of 
the Roman Empire to the mid- 15th century. 
The course will deal with the growing 
estrangement of western Catholic Europe 
from the Byzantium and Islam, culminating 
in the Crusades; the rise of the Islamic 



40 



Empire and its later fragmentation; the devel- 
opment and growth of feudalism; the conflict 
of empire and papacy, and the rise of the 
towns. Alternate years. 

216 FRENCH REVOLUTION 
AND NAPOLEON 

An analysis of the political, social, and 
intellectual background of the French Revo- 
lution, a survey of the course of revolution- 
ary development, and an estimate of the 
results of the Napoleonic conquests and 
administration. Prerequisite: History 110 or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

218 EUROPE IN THE ERA OF 
THE WORLD WARS 

An intensive study of the political, econom- 
ic, social, and cultural history of Europe 
from 1900-1945. Topics include the rise of 
irrationalism. the origins of the First World 
War, the Communist and Fascist Revolu- 
tions, and the attempts to preserve peace 
before 1939. Prerequisite: History 111 or 
consent of instructor. 

219 CONTEMPORARY EUROPE 

An intensive study of the political, econom- 
ic, social, and cultural history of Europe 
since 1945. Topics include the post-war eco- 
nomic recovery of Europe, the Sovietization 
of Eastern Europe, the origins of the Cold 
War. decolonization, and the flowering of 
the welfare state. Prerequisite: History 111 
or consent of instructor. 

222 HISTORY OF WORLD WAR II 

A comprehensive examination of World War 
II emphasizing the effect of ideological, eco- 
nomic, and political forces on the formula- 
tion of military strategy and the conduct of 
operation; the nature and extent of the expan- 
sion of government powers; and the experi- 
ence of war from the perspective of ordinary 
civilians and military alike. Does not count 
toward distribution. 

226 COLONIAL AMERICA AND 
THE REVOLUTIONARY ERA 

The establishment of British settlements on 
the American continent, their history as colo- 
nies, the causes and events of the American 
Revolution, the critical period following 
independence, and proposal and adoption of 
the United States Constitution. Alternate 
years. 

230 AFRO-AMERICAN HISTORY 

A study of the experiences and participation 
of Afro-Americans in the United States. The 
course includes historical experiences such 
as slavery, abolition, reconstruction, and 
urbanization. It also raises the issue of the 
development and growth of white racism, 
and the effect of this racism on contemporary 



Afro-American social, intellectual, and 
political life. Alternate years. 

244 20TH CENTURY UNITED STATES 

This course begins with the Progressive Era 
and includes the political, economic, and 
social developments in the 20th century. 
Emphasis will be placed on the domestic and 
international demands which have faced the 
United States in the period following World 
War II 

310 WOMEN IN HISTORY 

An examination of the social, political, eco- 
nomic and intellectual experience of women 
in the Western World from ancient times to 
the present. May be taken for either one-half 
unit (section 310A) or full unit (section 
310B); declared majors and prospective 
majors should take the full-unit course, 
310B. 

316 CONFLICT IN 

WESTERN CIVILIZATION 
An in-depth study of the changing nature of 
war and its relationship to the development 
of Western Civilization since the end of the 
Middle Ages. Particular emphasis will be 
placed on the role of war in the development 
of the modem nation state and the origins and 
nature of total war. Alternate years. 

320 DIPLOMATIC HISTORY OF 
EUROPE SINCE 1789 
A survey of the development of the 
European-states system and the relations 
between the European states since the begin- 
ning of the French Revolution. Prerequisite: 
History 111 or consent of instructor . Alter- 
nate years. 

322 THE CRISIS OF LIBERALISM AND 
NATIONALISM. EUROPE 1848-1870 
An in-depth investigation of the crucial 
"Middle Years" of 19th century Europe 
from the revolutions of 1848 through the 
unification of Germany. The course centers 
on the struggles for power within the major 
states of Europe at this time, and how the 
vehicle of nationalism was used to bring 
about one type of solution. Alternate years. 

328 AGE OF JEFFERSON AND JACKSON 
The theme of the course is the emergence of 
the political and social characteristics that 
shaped modem America. The personalities 
of Thomas Jefferson, John Marshall, John 
Randolph, Aaron Burr, and Andrew Jackson 
receive special attention. Special considera- 
tion is given to the first and second party 
systems, the decline in community cohesive- 
ness. the westward movement, and the 
growing importance of the family as a unit of 
social organization. Alternate years. 



332 CIVIL WAR AND RECONSTRUCTION 
The problems and events leading to war. the 
political and military history of the war. and 
the bitter aftermath to the Compromise of 
1877. 

340 20TH CENTURY 

UNITED STATE RELIGION 

The study of historical and cultural develop- 
ments in American society which relate to 
religion or what is commonly called religion. 
This involves consideration of the institu- 
tional and intellectual development of sever- 
al faith groups as well as discussion of certain 
problems, such as the persistence of religious 
bigotry and the changing modes of church- 
state relationships. Alternate years. 

416 HISTORY OF 

REFORMATION THOUGHT 
A study of the ideas and systems of ideas 
propounded prior to the Reformation, but 
which are historically related to its inception, 
and of the ideas and systems of ideas 
involved in the formulation of the major 
Reformation Protestant traditions, and in the 
Catholic Reformation. Included are the ideas 
of the humanists of the Reformation Era. 
Alternate years. 

418 HISTORY OF 

RENAISSANCE THOUGHT 
A study of the classical, humanist, and scho- 
lastic elements involved in the development 
of the Renaissance outlook on views and 
values, both in Italy and in Northern Europe. 
The various combinations of social and 
political circumstances which constitute the 
historical context of these intellectual devel- 
opments will be noted. Alternate years. 

442 UNITED STATES SOCIAL AND 
INTELLECTUAL HISTORY TO 1877 

A study of the social and intellectual experi- 
ence of the United States from its colonial 
antecedents through reconstruction. Among 
the topics considered are Puritanism, tran- 
scendentalism, community life and organi- 
zation, education, and social-reform move- 
ments. Prerequisites: two courses from 
History 125, 126, 230, or consent of 
instructor. 

443 UNITED STATES SOCIAL AND 
INTELLECTUAL HISTORY SINCE 1877 
A study of the social and intellectual experi- 
ence of the United States from reconstruction 
to the present day. Among the topics consid- 
ered are social Darwinism, pragmatism, 
community life and organization, education 
and social reform movements. Prerequi- 
sites: two courses from History 125, 126, 
230, or consent of instructor. 

449 HISTORICAL METHODS 

This course focuses on the nature and mean- 



41 



ing of history. It will open to the student 
different historical approaches and will pro- 
vide the opportunity to explore these 
approaches in terms of particular topics and 
periods. Majors are required to enroll in this 
course in either their junior or senior year. 
The course is open to other students who 
have two courses in history or consent of 
instructor. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Typically, history interns work for local gov- 
ernment agencies engaged in historical proj- 
ects or for the Lycoming County Historical 
Museum. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Recent topics include studies of the immig- 
ration of American blacks, political dissen- 
sion in the Weimer Republic. Indian rela- 
tions before the American Revolution, and 
the history of Lycoming County. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 



INTERNATIONAL STUDIES 

Associate Professor: Larson 
(Coordinator) 

The major is designed to integrate an 
understanding of the changing social, 
political, and historical environment of 
Europe today with study of Europe in its 
relations to the rest of the world, particu- 
larly the United States. It stresses the 
international relations of the North 
Atlantic community and offers the stu- 
dent opportunity to emphasize either 
European studies or international rela- 
tions. The program provides multiple 
perspectives on the cultural traits that 
shape popular attitudes and institutions. 
Study of a single country is included as a 
data-base for comparisons, and study of 
its language, as a basis for direct commu- 
nication with its people. 

The program is intended to prepare a 
student either for graduate study or for 
careers which have an international com- 
ponent. International obligations are 
increasingly assumed by government 
agencies and a wide range of business, 
social, religious, and educational organi- 
zations. Opportunities are found in the 



fields of journalism, publishing, com- 
munications, trade, banking, advertis- 
ing, management, and tourism. The pro- 
gram also offers flexible career 
preparation in a variety of essential 
skills, such as research, data analysis, 
report writing, languge skills, and the 
awareness necessary for dealing with 
people and institutions of another cul- 
ture. Preparation for related careers can 
be obtained through the guided selection 
of courses outside the major in the areas 
of business, economics, foreign lan- 
guages and literatures, government, his- 
tory, and international relations or 
through a second major. Students should 
design their programs in consultation 
with members of the Committee on Inter- 
national Studies. 

By completing six to eight additional 
courses in the social sciences (which 
include those courses needed to complete 
a major in economics, history, political 
science, or sociology/anthropology) and 
the required program in eduction, stu- 
dents can be certified for the teacher 
education program in social studies. By 
completing a major in the foreign lan- 
guage (five or more courses) and the 
education program, students can be certi- 
fied to teach that language. The Interna- 
tional Studies program also encourages 
participation in study-abroad programs, 
as well as the Washington and United 
Nations semesters. 

The major includes 1 1 courses 
selected as follows: 

International Relations Courses — 

Four or two courses (if two, then four 
must be taken from Area Courses). 
Courses within this group are designed to 
provide a basic understanding of the 
international system and of Europe's 
relations with the rest of the world. 
Political Science 225 is required. 

Political Science 225: World Politics 
Economics 443: International Trade 
History 320: European Diplomatic History 
Political Science 439: American Foreign 
Policy 

Area Courses — Four or two courses (if 
two. then lour must be taken from Inter- 



national Relations Courses). Courses 
within this group are designed to provide 
a basic understanding of the European 
political, social, and economic environ- 
ment. History 1 1 1 and Economics 222 
are required. 

History 111: Europe 1815-Present 
Economics 221: Comparative Economic 

Systems 
Political Science 220: European Politics 
History 218: Europe in the Era of the 

World Wars 
History 219: Contemporary Europe 

National Courses 

Language — Two courses in one lan- 
guage. 

French 221 . plus one course numbered 222 or 

above (except 228) 
German 22 1 , plus one course numbered 222 or 

above 
Spanish 22 1 . plus one course numbered 222 or 

above 

Country — One course. The student 
must select, according to his or her lan- 
guage preparation, one European coun- 
try which will serve as a special interest 
area throughout the program. The coun- 
try selected will serve as the base for 
individual projects in the major courses 
wherever possible. 

France — French 228: Modem France 
Germany — History N80: Topics in German 

History 
Spain — Spanish 311: Hispanic Culture 

Elective Course — One course which 
should involve further study of some 
aspect of the program. Appropriate 
courses are any area or international 
relations courses not yet taken. History 
1 10, 316; Economics 226; Political Sci- 
ence 326. 327, 438; related foreign- 
literature courses counting toward the 
fine-arts requirement and internships. 

449 SENIOR SEMINAR 

A one-semester seminar, taken in the senior 
year, in which students and several faculty 
members will pursue an integrative topic in 
the field of international studies. Students 
will work to some extent independently. 
Guest speakers will be invited The seminar 
will be open to qualified persons from out- 
side the major and the College. Prerequisite. 
consent of instructor. 



42 



LITERATURE 



Associate Professor: Maples 
(Coordinator) 

This major recognizes literature as a 
distinct discipline beyond national 
boundaries and combines the study of 
any two literatures in the areas of 
English. French. German, and Spanish. 
Students can thus explore two literatures 
widely and intensively at the upper levels 
of course offerings within each of the 
respective departments while developing 
and applying skills in foreign languages. 
The major prepares students for graduate 
study in either of the two literatures 
studied or in comparative literature. 

The major requires at least six litera- 
ture courses, equally divided between 
the two literatures concerned. The six 
must be at the advanced level as deter- 
mined in consultation with advisors (nor- 
mally courses numbered 200 and above 
in English and 400 and above in foreign 
languges). In general, two of the 
advanced courses in each literature 
should be period courses. The third 
course . taken either as a regular course or 
an independent study, may have as its 
subject another period, a particular 
author, genre, or literary theme, or some 
other unifying approach or idea. Beyond 
these six. the major must include at least 
two additional courses from among those 
counting toward a major in the depart- 
ments involved. Any prerequisite 
courses in the respective departments 
(for example: English 106. French 
221-222 or 228, German 221-222, 
Spanish 221-222) should be taken during 
the freshman year. Students should 
design their programs in consultation 
with a faculty member from each of the 
literatures concerned. Programs for the 
major must be approved by the depart- 
ments involved. 



MASS COMMUNICATION 

Assistant Professor: Nason 
(Chairperson) 

The interdisciplinary major in Mass 
Communication recognizes the need for 
a liberal arts foundation and requires 
selected courses from the Departments of 
Art, Business Administration, English, 
Political Science, Psychology, and 
Sociology/Anthropology. The major 
combines a core of Mass Communica- 
tion courses with one of three profession- 
al tracks: Advertising/Public Relations, 
Broadcast Journalism, and Journalism. 
Emphasis is placed on developing an 
understanding of the cultural and histori- 
cal roles of the mass media and on deve- 
loping the communicative skills neces- 
sary for careers in the media. 

Students majoring in Mass Communi- 
cation must complete the Core Curricu- 
lum and one professional track. Each 
track requires a combination of theory, 
production, and writing courses. 

A minor in Mass Communication con- 
sists of Mass Communication 110. 211, 
English 215, and three of the following 
courses: Mass Communication 224, 329. 
330, 331,448. 



1 THE CORE 
REQUIRED 

English 215 

Mass Comm 
Mass Comm 
Mass Comm 
Mass Comm 
Pol Sci -448 



CURRICULUM 

OF ALL STUDENTS 



Introduction to 

Media Writing 

1 10 Introduction to 

Mass Communication 

2 1 1 Fundamentals of 

Oral Communication 

330 Theories and Issues 
in Mass Communication 

331 Mass Media Law 
and Regulation 
Public Opinion 

and Polling* 

'Business 445 (Marketing Research). Psychol- 
ogy 224 (Social Psychology) or Sociology 447 
(Research Methods in Sociology) may be sub- 
stituted. These courses require departmental 
prerequisites or consent of individual instruc- 
tors. 

Students must complete the require- 
ments of one of the following profession- 
al tracks: 



Track I — Advertising/Public Relations 

Business 228 Marketing Management I 

Business 332 Advertising 

English 329 Business and 

Publicity Writing 

One of the following writing courses: 
English 2 1 6 Writing for Special Audiences 
English 327 Print Journalism 

Mass Comm 329 Broadcast Journalism 

Two of the following production courses: 
Art 1 1 5 Two-Dimensional Design 

Art 227 Introduction to Photography 

GCO 511 Layout and Design (WACO 

Mass Comm 218 Radio Programming 

and Production 
Mass Comm 224 Television Production 

Track O — Journalism 

Art 227 Introduction to Photography 

Engish 327 Print Journalism 

GCO 5 1 1 Layout and Design (WACO 

Pol Sci III State and Local Government 

One of the following additional writing 

courses: 

Mass Comm 329 Broadcast Journalism 

Pol Sci 434 Political Newswriting 

One of the following courses: 
History 126 United States History. 

1 877-present 
Philosophy 1 1 5 Philosophy and 

Public Policy 
Sociology 227 Social Problems* 

Sociology 334 Racial and 

Cultural Minorities* 
'Requires prerequisite or consent of instruc- 
tor 

Track III — Broadcast Journalism 

Mass Comm 218 Radio Programing 

and Production 
Mass Comm 224 Television Production 

Mass Comm 329 Broadcast Journalism 

Pol Sci 111 State and Local Government 

Pol Sci 434 Political Newswriting 

One of the following courses: 
History 126 United States History. 

1 877-present 
Philosophy and 
Public Policy 
Social Problems* 
Racial and 
Cultural Minorities* 
prerequisite or consent of 



Philosophy 1 1 5 

Sociology 227 
Sociology 334 

'Requires a 
instructor 



110 INTRODUCTION TO 

MASS COMMUNICATION 

Theories of the process of mass communica- 
tion and introduction to the mass media; 
attention will be given to problems of censor- 
ship and media ethics. Analysis of the mass 



43 



media's impact on society: emphasis will be 
placed on the social, psychological, and 
political implications of the media's shaping 
influence on man and institutions. 

2 1 1 FUNDAMENTALS OF 

ORAL COMMUNICATION 
The dynamics of oral communication. The 
development of elementary principles of 
simple oral communication through lectures, 
prepared assignments in speaking, and infor- 
mal class exercises. Utilizes video-tape 
sequences for feedback to students 

218 RADIO PROGRAMMING 
AND PRODUCTION 

Contemporary broadcast programming tech- 
niques including station scheduling, pro- 
gram development and analysis, and 
implementation in real and hypothetical situ- 
ations. Emphasis on management functions. 

224 TELEVISION PRODUCTION 

Technical, aesthetic, organizational, and 
business aspects of video programs. Study 
and use of basic equipment to produce stan- 
dard formats on videotape. 

329 BROADCAST JOURNALISM 

Study of. and practical experience in, the 
newsgathering process for electronic media. 
Emphasis on covering the local story from 
the small-station perspective. Students in the 
course are responsible for writing, produc- 
ing, editing and broadcasting newscasts for 
WRLC-FM. The course also looks at the 
special ethical problems of electronic news 
coverage. Prerequisites: English 215 and 
Mass Communication 218 or consent of 
instructor. 

330 THEORIES AND ISSUES IN 
MASS COMMUNICATION 

An analysis of current theories dealing with 
mass communication systems and the 
behavior and attitudes of, and effects on, 
their audiences. The course also examines 
contemporary mass media issues with an 
emphasis on developing critical thinking 
skills. Prerequisite: Mass Comm 110. 

331 MASS MEDIA LAW 
AND REGULATION 

An examination of the legal structure and the 
system by which mass communication is 
controlled in this society. The forces which 
shape, influence, and make policy will be 
considered. Cross-listed as Political Science 
436. Prerequisite: junior or senior standing 
or consent of instructor. 

448-449 PRACTICUM IN 

MASS COMMUNICATION 
Utilization of mass communication princi- 
ples, techniques, and skills in an applied 



setting through work experience in a commu- 
nication agency or organization. This experi- 
ence is coordinated with regular class meet- 
ings to analyze and evaluate relationships 
between theory and practice. Prerequisite: 
upper division status and consent of instruc- 
tor. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See indexl 

Interns usually work off campus in a field 
related to their communication sequence; 
some may work with the campus radio sta- 
tion. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 

(See indexl 
Studies involve research related to the com- 
munication sequence of the student 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 

Graphic Arts 

Through special arrangements, the 
following course offered at the Williams- 
port Area Community College is avail- 
able only to students in the Mass Com- 
munication major and in the Art Track III 
major in Commercial Design. The 
WACC course is taken as part of the 
student's schedule and is listed with 
Lycoming offerings during registration 
periods. 

5 1 1 LAYOUT AND DESIGN 

Analysis of materials, tools, and techniques 
used in preparalion of copy for reproduction; 
paste-up and color separation overlays. 4 cr. 



MATHEMATICAL SCIENCES 

Associate Professors: Getchell, Haley 
Assistant Professors: Bucki, DeSilva, 

Roy, Sprechini (Chairperson), 

Wallace 
Part-time Instructors: Davis, Dotzel 

and Srinivasan 

The Department of Mathematical Sci- 
ences offers major programs in computer 
science and mathematics. 

Computer Science 

A major in computer science consists 
of 11 courses: Mathematics 116, 128, 
and 129, and Computer Science 125. 



246, 247, 247, 321, 344, 445, and two 
other computer science courses num- 
bered 320 or above. Recommended 
extradepartmental courses: Physics 229, 
Philosophy 225, and Psychology 337. In 
addition to the regular courses listed 
below, special courses are occasionally 
available. 

A minor in Computer Science consists 
of Computer Science 246, 247, and two 
other computer science courses num- 
bered 220 or above. 

1 25 INTRODUCTION TO 
COMPUTER SCIENCE 
Introduction to programming and software 
utilities. Topics include algorithms, program 
structure, computer configuration, memory 
allocation, and an exposure to application 
packages. Laboratory experience is 
included, most recently using OMSI Pascal, 
the MiniCalc spreadsheet, and RUNOFF, a 
text formatting package. Prerequisite: credit 
for or exemption from Mathematics 005. 

246 PRINCIPLES OF 
ADVANCED PROGRAMMING 

Principles of effective programming, 
including structured programming, stepwise 
refinement, assertion proving, style, debug- 
ging, control structure, decision tables, finite 
state machines, recursion, and encoding. 
Utilities most recently used include SVS 
Pascal, the UNIX operating systems, C, and 
Shell programming. Prerequisite: a grade of 
C or better in Computer Science 125 or 
consent of instructor. 

247 DATA STRUCTURES 
Representation of data and algorithms asso- 
ciated with data structures. Topics include 
representation of lists, trees, graphs and 
strings, algorithms for searching and sorting. 
Prerequisite: a grade ofCor better in Com- 
puter Science 246 or consent of instructor. 
Corequisite: Mathematics 116. 

321 INTRODUCTION TO 

NUMERICAL ANALYSIS 
Topics from the theory of interpolation; 
numerical approaches to approximating 
roots and functions, integration, systems of 
differential equations, linear systems, ma- 
trix inversion, and the eigenvalue prob- 
lem. Prerequisite: Computer Science 125 
and Mathematics 129: Mathematics 130 
strongly recommended. 

344 MACHINE LANGUAGE 

Principles of machine language program- 
ming; computer organization and represen- 
tation of numbers, strings, arrays, and list 
structures at the machine level; interrupt pro- 



44 



gramming. relocatable code, linking loaders; 
interfacing with operating systems. Prereq- 
uisite: a grade of C or better in Computer 
Science 246 or consent of instructor. 

345 INTRODUCTION TO 

COMPUTER GRAPHICS 

An introduction to graphics hardware and 
software with emphasis on the mathematics 
necessary to represent, transform, and dis- 
play images of two and three dimensional 
objects. Laboratory exercises will be 
designed to explore the capabilities of the 
graphics system and to test the students' 
understanding of the principles discussed in 
class. Prerequisite: Computer Science 246 
and either Computer Science 247 or permis- 
sion of the instructor: Mathematics 130 re- 
commended. Alternate years. 

349 DATABASE SYSTEMS 

External storage structures, hashed files, 
indexed files; relational, network, and hier- 
archical data models; relational algebra and 
the relational calculus; design theory for 
relational databases; query optimization; 
concurrent operations; database protection. 
Prerequisite: Computer Science 247. Alter- 
nate years. 

445 SYSTEMS PROGRAMMING 

The emphasis in this course is on the algo- 
rithms used in programming the various parts 
of a computer system. These parts include 
assemblers, loaders, editors, interrupt pro- 
cessors, input/output schedulers, processor 
and job schedulers, and memory managers. 
Prerequisite: Computer Science 247 and 
344. 

446 COMPILER CONSTRUCTION 

The emphasis in this course is on the con- 
struction of translators for programming lan- 
guages. Topics include lexical analysis, 
block structure, grammars, parsing, program 
representation, and run-time organization. 
Prerequisite: Computer Science 247. Alter- 
nate years. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See index) 



Mathematics 

A major in mathematics consists of 10 
units of courses in the mathematical sci- 
ences: Computer Science 125, Mathe- 
matics 128, 129, 130, 234, 238, 434, 
432, and two other mathematics courses 



numbered 220 or above, one of which 
may be replaced by Mathematics 112, 

1 16, or 214. Students seeking secondary 
certification in mathematics are required 
to complete Mathematics 330 and 336 
and are advised to enroll in Philosophy 

117. In addition, all majors are advised 
to elect Philosophy 225 and 333, Physics 
225 and 226. 

In addition to the regular courses listed 
below, special courses are occasionally 
available. 

A minor in Mathematics consists of 
Mathematics 234, 238, and two other 
courses numbered 220 or above. 

005 INDIVIDUALIZED LABORATORY 
INSTRUCTION IN BASIC ALGEBRA 
A self-paced study of arithmetic and decimal 
numerals, fractions, the real number line, 
factoring, solutions to linear and quadratic 
equations, graphs of linear and quadratic 
functions, expressions with rational expo- 
nents, algebraic functions, exponential 
functions, and inequalities. THIS COURSE 
IS LIMITED TO STUDENTS PLACED 
THEREIN BY THE MATHEMATICS 
DEPARTMENT. One-half unit of credit. 

103 INTRODUCTION TO STATISTICS 

Empirical distributions of measurements, 
probability and random variables, discrete 
and continuous probability distributions, 
statistical inference from small samples, 
linear regression and correlation, analysis of 
enumerative data. Prerequisite: credit for or 
exemption from Mathematics 005. 

105 MATHEMATICS IN 

ELEMENTARY EDUCATION 
This course is intended for prospective 
elementary school teachers and is required of 
all those seeking elementary certification. 
Topics include systems of numbers and of 
numeration, computational algorithms, 
environmental and transformation geometry 
measurement, and mathematical concept 
formation. Observation and participation in 
Greater Wilhamsport elementary schools. 
Corequisile: any education course numbered 
341 or above which is specifically required 
for elementary certification or consent of 
instructor. 

107 PRECALCULUS MATHEMATICS 

The study of logarithmic, exponential, trigo- 
nometric, polynomial, and rational func- 
tions, their graphs, and elementary proper- 
ties. Prerequisite: credit for or exemption 
from Mathematics 005. 

109 INTRODUCTION TO CALCULUS 

An intuitive approach to the calculus con- 



cepts with applications to business, biology, 
and social-science problems. Not open to 
students who have completed Mathematics 
128. Prerequisite: credit for or exemption 
from Mathematics 005. Alternate years. 

1 1 2 FINITE MATHEMATICS 
FOR DECISION MAKING 
An introduction to some of the principal 
mathematical models, not involving calcu- 
lus, which are used in business administra- 
tion, social sciences, and operations 
research. The course will include both deter- 
ministic models such as graphs, networks, 
linear programming and voting models, and 
probabilistic models such as Markov chains 
and games. Prerequisite: credit for or 
exemption from Mathematics 005. 

116 DISCRETE MATHEMATICS 

An introduction to discrete structures. Top- 
ics include equivalence relations, partitions 
and quotient sets, mathematical induction, 
recursive functions, elementary logic, dis- 
crete number systems, elementary combina- 
torial theory, and general algebraic struc- 
tures emphasizing semi-groups, groups, 
lattices. Boolean algebras, graphs and trees. 
Prerequisite: Computer Science 125 or con- 
sent of instructor. 

128 CALCULUS WITH 
ANALYTIC GEOMETRY I 
Differentiation of algebraic functions, 
graphing plane curves, applications to 
related rate and extremal problems, integra- 
tion of algebraic functions, areas of plane 
regions, volumes of solids or revolution, and 
other applications. Prerequisite: a grade of 
C or better in Mathematics 107 or consent of 
instructor. 

129 CALCULUS WITH 
ANALYTIC GEOMETRY II 
Differentiation and integration of transcen- 
dental functions, parametric equations, polar 
coordinates, the conic sections and their 
applications, infinite sequences, and series 
expansions. Prerequisite: a grade of C or 
better in Mathematics 128 or consent of 
instructor. 

130 INTRODUCTION TO 
MATRIX ALGEBRA 

Systems of linear equations and matrix arith- 
metic. Points and hyperplanes in dimension- 
al geometries. Bases and linear indepen- 
dence. Matrix representations of linear 
mappings. The fixed point problem. Special 
classes of matrices Prerequisite: Mathe- 
matics 107 or its equivalent. 

2 1 4 MULTIVARIATE STATISTICS 

The study of statistical techniques used in 
experimental designs where more than one 
random variable is involved. Techniques 



45 



include analysis of variance, analysis of 
covariance. multiple regression and correla- 
tion, factor anaylsis and canonical correla- 
tions, contingency tables, discriminative 
analysis, and non-parametric techniques. 
Further topics will be chosen from cluster 
analysis, time series analysis, and repeated 
measure analysis. Extensive use of a statisti- 
cal package is made (currently BMDPl. Pre- 
requisite: Mathematics 103 or its equivalent. 
Alternate years. 

231 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 

A study of ordinary differential equations 
and linear systems. Solution techniques 
include: reduction of order, undertermined 
coefficients, variation of parameters. 
Laplace transforms, power series, and eigen- 
values and eigenvectors. A brief discussion 
of numerical methods may also be included 
Prerequisite: a grade ofC or better in Math- 
ematics 129: Mathematics 130 recom- 
mended. 

233 COMPLEX VARIABLES 

Complex numbers, analytic functions, com- 
plex integration. Cauchy's theorems and 
their applications. Corequisite: Mathematics 
238. Alternate years. 

234 FOUNDATIONS OF MATHEMATICS 
Topics regularly included are the nature of 
mathematical systems, essentials of logical 
reasoning, and axiomatic foundations of set 
theory. Other topics frequently included are 
approaches to the concepts of infinity and 
continuity, and the construction of the real 
number system. The course serves as a 
bridge from elementary calculus to advanced 
courses in algebra and analysis Prerequi- 
site: Mathematics 129 or consent of instruc- 
tor. 

238 MULTIVARIABLE CALCULUS 

Algebra, geometry, and cacluclu in multi- 
dimensional Euclidean space; n-tuples. mat- 
rices: lines, planes, curves, surfaces: vector 
functions of a single variable, acceleration, 
curvature: functions of several variables, 
gradient; line integrals, vector fields, multi- 
ple integrals, change of variable, areas, vol- 
umes; Green's theorem Prerequisites: a 
grade of C or better in Mathematics 129. 
Mathematics 130 or consent of instructor 

321 INTRODUCTION TO 

NUMERICAL ANALYSIS 
Topics from the theory of interpolation, 
numerical approaches to approximating 
roots and functions, integration, systems of 
differential equations, linear systems, matrix 
inversion, and the eigenvalue problem. Pre- 
requisite: Computer Science 125 and Mathe- 
matics 129. Mathematics 130 strongh 
recommended. 



330 TOPICS IN GEOMETRY 

An axiomatic treatment of Euclidean 
geometry, and an introduction to related 
geometries. Prerequisite: Mathematics 128. 
Alternate years 

332-333 MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS III 
A study of probability, discrete and continu- 
ous random variables, expected values and 
moments, sampling, point estimation, sam- 
pling distributions, interval estimation, test 
of hypotheses, regression and linear hypoth- 
eses, experimental design models. Core- 
quisite: Mathematics 238. Alternate years. 

336 CONCEPTS OF MATHEMATICS 
IN SECONDARY EDUCATION 
A course designed for mathematics majors 
who are planning to teach at the secondary 
level. Emphasis will be placed on the mathe- 
matics that form the foundation of secondary 
mathematics. Ideas will be presented to 
familiarize the student with various curricu- 
lum proposals, to provide for innovation 
within the existing curriculum, and to 
expand the boundaries of the existing curric- 
ulum. Open only to junior and senior mathe- 
matics majors enrolled in the secondary- 
education program. Alternate rears. 

338 OPERATIONS RESEARCH 

Queuing theory, including simulation tech- 
niques; optimization theory, including linear 
programming, integer programming, and 
dynamic programming; game theory, 
including two-person zero-sum games, 
cooperative games, and multiperson games. 
Prerequisite: Mathematics 112 or Mathe- 
matics 130. Alternate years. 

432 REAL ANALYSIS 

An introduction to the rigorous analysis of 
the concepts of real variable calculus in the 
setting of normed spaces. Topics from: 
topology of the Euclidean plane, complete- 
ness, compactness, the Heine-Borel 
theorem; functions on Euclidean space, con- 
tinuity, uniform continuity, differentiability; 
series and convergence; Riemann integral. 
Prerequisite: Mathematics 234 and 238. 

434 MODERN ALGEBRA 

An integrated approach to groups, rings. 
fields, and vector spaces and functions which 
preserve their structure. Prerequisite: Math- 
ematics 130 and 234 

438 SEMINAR 

Topics in modem mathematics of current 
interest to the instructor A different topic is 
selected each semester. This semester is 
designed to provide junior and senior mathe- 
matics majors and other qualified students 
with more than the usual opportunity for 
concentrated and cooperative inquiry. Pre- 



requisite: consent of instructor. One-half 
unit of credit. This course may be repeated 
for credit. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 

(See index) 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index! 



MUSIC 

Associate Professors: Boerckel 

(Chairperson), Thayer 
Assistant Professor: Jeffers 
Part-time Instructors: Cooper, 

Feist, Guth, Lakey, Leitzel, 

Nacinovich, Payn, Russell 

The music major is required to take a 
balanced program of theory, applied 
music, music history, and music ensem- 
ble. A minimum of eight courses (exclu- 
sive of all ensemble and applied music 
courses except Music 446) is required, 
and these must include Music 110. 111. 
220, 221 , 335 and 336. Each major must 
participate in an ensemble (Music 167, 
168 and/or 169) and take one hour of 
applied music per week for a minimum 
of four semesters. (See Music 160-166). 
The major must include at least one-half 
hour of piano in the applied program 
unless a piano proficiency test is 
requested and passed. Anyone declaring 
music as a second major must do so by 
the beginning of the junior year. 

The Music Department recommends 
that non-majors select courses from the 
following list to meet distribution 
requirements: Music 116, 117; Music 
118, 119; Music 113 or Music 224 in 
combination with 116. 117. 1 18 or 1 19. 

Student recitals offer opportunities to 
gain experience in public performance. 
Music majors and other students quali- 
fied in performance may present formal 
recitals. 



1 10-1 1 1 MUSIC THEORY I AND 11 

A two-semester course open to all students 
An examination of the fundamental compo- 
nents and theoretical concepts of music The 



46 



student will develop musicianship through 
application of applied skills. (Music 1 10 is 
prerequisite to Music 111). 

113 MUSIC OF TODAY 

Non-technical survey of styles, techniques 
and contents of music produced since 1950. 
with emphasis on developments in electronic 
music. Leading figures of major contempo- 
rary movements in music, literature and the 
visual arts and their works will be presented 
and discussed in relation to musical culture. 
The course will include some practical expo- 
sure to the electronic music studio and 
recording techniques. 

1 16 INTRODUCTION TO MUSIC 

A basic course in the materials and tech- 
niques of music. Examples drawn from vari- 
ous periods and styles are designed to 
enhance perception and appreciation through 
careful and informed listening 

1 1 7 SURVEY OF WESTERN MUSIC 

A chronological survey of music in Western 
civilization from Middle Ages to the present. 
Composers and musical styles are considered 
in the context of the broader culture of each 
major era. 

118 AMERICAN MUSIC I 

For the major or non-major interested in 
studying all types of American music, from 
pre-Revolutionary days through World War 
I. Areas explored will include Indian. Afri- 
can, and European roots influencing the seri- 
ous music for small and large ensembles, the 
development of show music from minstrels 
to Broadway musicals, the evolution of "Tin 
Pan Alley," and the beginnings of jazz. 
Alternate years. 

119 AMERICAN MUSIC II 

For the major or non-major interested in 
studying all types of American music. 
American Music II will cover post-world 
War I days to the present. Areas explored 
will include indigenous serious music for 
small and large ensembles, the mature 
Broadway musical, the evolution of jazz, the 
development of rock, and the fusion of musi- 
cal styles in the 1970's. Alternate years. 

220-221 MUSIC THEORY III AND IV 

A continuation of the integrated theory 
course moving toward newer uses of music 
materials. Prerequisite: Music III. Alter- 
nate years. 

224 ELECTRONIC MUSIC I 

Technical introduction to synthesizer studio 
techniques. Topics will include musical 
acoustics, basic recording, sound generation 
and modification devices and the analysis of 
relevant examples in popular and avant- 



garde styles. Students will produce synthe- 
sized tape projects during assigned studio 
hours. Alternate vears. 

225 ELECTRONIC MUSIC II 

Further consideration of recording tech- 
niques. Use of microphones, multi-track 
recording, mixing, special effects devices 
and synchronization will be introduced. Stu- 
dents will take part in live recording of con- 
certs and rehearsals of a variety of ensem- 
bles. Student projects will include complete 
recording sessions and the production of 
electronic music compositions utilizing clas- 
sical studio techniques and real-time net- 
works. Prerequisite: Music 224 or consent of 
instructor. Alternate years. 

330 COMPOSITION I 

Creative writing in smaller vocal and instru- 
mental forms. Students identify and use the 
techniques employed by major composers of 
the 20th century . Prerequisite: Music III or 
consent of instructor. 

331 CONDUCTING 

A study of the fundamentals of conducting 
w ith frequent opportunity for practical expe- 
rience. The College music organizations 
serve to make performance experience possi- 
ble. Prerequisite: Music 1 1 0-1 II or consent 
of instructor. Alternate years. 

335 HISTORY OF WESTERN MUSIC I 

The development of musical styles and forms 
from Gregorian chant through Mozart, 
including composers from the medieval. 
Renaissance, baroque and early classical 
eras. Prerequisite: Music 110, 116. or 117 
or consent of instructor. 

336 HISTORY OF WESTERN MUSIC II 

The development of musical styles and forms 
from Beethoven to the present, including 
composers from the late classical, romantic 
and modem eras. Prerequisite: Music 335 or 
consent of instructor. 

339 ORCHESTRATION 

A study of modem orchestral instruments 
and examination of their use by the great 
masters with practical problems in 
instrumentation. The College music organi- 
zations serve to make performance experi- 
ence possible. Prerequisite: Music 110-1 11 
or consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

440 COMPOSITION II 

Creative writing in larger vocal and instru- 
mental forms. Students write more extended 
works in order to develop an individual style 
of composition. Prerequisite: Music 330 or 
consent of instructor. 

442 PROJECTS IN ELECTRONIC MUSIC 

Digital techniques of Electronic Music pro- 
duction. Notation systems for electronic 



music. Aesthetics of electronic music. Stu- 
dents will use the full resources of the studio 
to complete original compositions and will 
study, prepare and present works by major 
composers of electronic music. Prerequisite: 
Music 225 or consent of instructor. 

445 SPECIAL TOPICS IN MUSIC 

The intensive study of a selected area of 
music literature, designed to develop 
research techniques in music. The topic is 
announced at the Spring pre-registration. 
Sample topics include: Beethoven, Impress- 
ionism, Vienna 1900-1914. Prerequisite: 
Music 116. 117 or221 or consent of instruc- 
tor. 

446 RECITAL 

The preparation and presentation of a full- 
length public recital, normally during the 
student's senior year. Prerequisite: approval 
by the department. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index I 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 

Applied Music and Ensemble 

The study of performance in piano, 
harpsichord, voice, organ, strings, gui- 
tar, brass, woodwinds, and percussion is 
designed to develop sound technique and 
a knowledge of the appropriate literature 
for the instrument. Student recitals offer 
opportunities to gain experience in pub- 
lic performance. 

Credit for applied music courses (pri- 
vate lessons) and ensemble (choir, 
orchestra and band) is earned on a frac- 
tional basis. One half-hour lesson per 
week earns Vi hour credit; one hour les- 
son per week earns one hour creidt. 
Ensemble credit totals one hour credit if a 
student enrolls for one or two ensembles 
(for more information, see course 
descriptions below). When scheduling 
please note that an applied course or 
ensemble should not be substituted for an 
academic course, but should be taken in 
addition to the normal four academic 
courses. 

Extra fees apply for private lessons 
(Music 60-66) as follows: 
$135 per semester for a half-hour lesson 
per week. S270 per semester for an hour 



47 



lesson per week. Private lessons are 
given for 13 weeks. 
160 Piano or Harpsichord. 161 Voice. 
162 Strings or Guitar. 163 Organ. 164 
Brass. 165 Woodwinds. 166 Percussion. 

167 ORCHESTRAL ENSEMBLE 

The Williamsport Symphony Orchestra 
allows students with significant instrumental 
experience to become members of this reg- 
ional ensemble. Participation in the W.S.O 
is contingent upon audition and the availa- 
bility of openings. Students are allowed a 
maximum of one hour of Ensemble credit per 
semester A student who is enrolled in 
orchestra only should register for Music 
167B (one hour credit). A student may- 
belong to two ensembles, choosing either 
Choir or Wind Ensemble as the second 
group. Such a student will then register for 
Music 167A ('/; hour credit) plus either 
Music 168A ( 'A hour credit) or Music I64A 
('/: hour credit). 

168 CHORAL ENSEMBLE (CHOIR) 
Participation in the College choir is designed 
to enable any student possessing at least 
average talent an opportunity to study choral 
technique. Emphasis is placed upon 
acquaintance w ith choral literature, tone pro- 
duction, diction, and phrasing. Students are 
allowed a maximum of one hour of Ensemble 
credit per semester. A student who is 
enrolled in Choir only should register for 
Mumc I68B (one hour credit). A student may 
belong to two ensembles, choosing either 
Orchestra or Wind Ensemble as the second 
group. Such a student will then register tor 
Music 168A ('/: hour credit) plus either 
Music 167A ('/: hour credit! or Music I69A 
('/• hour credit i 

169 WIND ENSEMBLE (BAND) 

The College Wind Ensemble allows students 
with some instrumental experience to 
become acquainted w ith good band literature 
and develop personal musicianship through 
participation in group instrumental activity. 
Students are allowed a maximum of one hour 
"t 1 nsemble credit per semester. A student 
who is enrolled in Band only should register 
for Music 169B (one hour credit) A student 
may belong to two ensembles, choosing 
either Orchestra or Choir as the second 
group. Such a student will then register for 
Music 169A ('/: hour credit) plus either 
Music 167A ('/: hour credit) or Music 168A 
hour credit). 



NEAR EAST CULTURE 
AND ARCHAEOLOGY 

Professor: Guerra (Coordinator) 

The Near East culture and archaeology 
interdisciplinary major is designed to 
acquaint students with the "cradle of 
Western civilization," both in its ancient 
and modern aspects. Majors will com- 
plete a minimum of eight to ten courses 
related to the Near East. 

Required courses are described in their 
departmental sections and include: 

1. Four courses in language and cul- 
ture from: 

History and Culture of the Ancient 
Near East (Religion 228) 
History of Art (Art 222) 
Ancient History (History 210) 
Old Testament Faith and History 
(Religion 113) 

Judaism and Islam (Religion 224) 
Two semesters of foreign language 
(Hebrew 101-102, or Greek 101-102) 

2. Two courses in archaeology from: 
Biblical Archaeology (Religion 226) 
Special Archaeology courses, such as 
independent studies or in May or 
summer terms in the Near East. 

3. Two courses in the cooperating 
departments (art. history, political 
science, religion and sociology- 
anthropology) or related depart- 
ments. These two courses, usually 
taken in the junior or senior years, can 
be independent study. Topics should 
be related either to the ancient or the 
modern Near East and must be 
approved in advance by the commit- 
tee supervising the interdisciplinary 
program. The study of modern Arabic 
or Hebrew is encouraged. 

Other courses may be suggested by the 
supervisory committee within the limits 
of a 10-course major. The number of 
courses taken within this program appli- 
cable toward fulfilling the College distri- 
bution requirements will vary according 
to the selection of courses. 



NURSING 



Professor: Rodgers, (Chairperson) 
Assistant Professors: Gingrow, Parrish 
Instructors: Atkinson, Dunkelberger, 
Ficca, Pagana (on leave) 

Students wishing to major in nursing 
will be admitted to the College under the 
usual admission procedures. Freshmen 
should follow the nursing curriculum 
plan for the freshman year in the 
sequence designated. To be considered 
for continuation in nursing, a minimum 
G.P.A. of 2.5 is required at completion 
of the freshman year. A supplementary 
application should be submitted to the 
Department of Nursing by January 15 of 
the freshman year. 

Clinical Learning Resources 

In addition to the College's new well- 
equipped Nursing Skills Lab, opportu- 
nity for self-learning is provided in the 
adjacent Learning Center which is 
equipped with electronic study carrels 
and audio-visual materials. 

A wide variety of health-care agencies 
in the surrounding area are utilized for 
clinical experiences. Cooperating hos- 
pitals and agencies include: Divine 
Providence Hospital, Williamsport Hos- 
pital, Evangelical Hospital, Geisinger 
Medical Center, Leader Nursing Home 
and Rehabilitation Center, Danville 
State Hospital, Pennsylvania Depart- 
ment of Health, Regional Home Health 
Services, the County Health Improve- 
ment Plan (CHIP), and The Williamsport 
Home. 

Expenses of the Nursing Program 

Students are responsible for their own 
transportation to assigned clinical areas. 
The student of nursing assumes all finan- 
cial obligations listed in the section on 
fees in this bulletin including a S40 lab 
fee for each of the clinical nursing 
courses (Nursing 221, 330. 331, 332, 
333. 440 and 441 ). Additional expenses 
include uniforms, name pin, watch with 
second hand, bandage scissors, stetho- 
scope, blood pressure cuff, liability 



48 



insurance, annual health examinations, 
and standardized achievement tests. 

Major in Nursing 

The major in nursing consists of: 
Nursing 220, 221, 330, 331, 332, 333, 
334, 335, 336, 440, 441 , 442, and 443 or 
N80-N89. In addition, the following are 
prerequisites for specific nursing 
courses: Chemistry 10, 115; Biology 
113-114, 226; Psychology 110, 117; 
Mathematics 103, and Computer Sci- 
ence 125. The religion/philosophy distri- 
bution requirement is met by the required 
courses: Philosophy 219 and Religion 
120. The history/social science distribu- 
tion requirement is met by the required 
courses: Psychology 110 and 117. In 
addition, the student is required to take 
one course from among Sociology/ 
Anthropology 110, 114, 220, 228, or 
229. The fine arts/foreign language dis- 
tribution requirement can be met by two 
courses in one department from among 
art, literature, music, or theatre; or by 
two courses in foreign language on the 
intermediate or higher course level. 

Unless otherwise indicated, nursing 
courses are open only to nursing majors. 



Policies Specific to Nursing 

In addition to the Lycoming College 
continuance policies, the following poli- 
cies are specific to all declared majors in 
the Department of Nursing: 

1 . A grade of C or better is required in 
all clinical nursing courses to con- 
tinue in the nursing program. These 
courses are Nursing 221, 330, 331, 
332, 333, 440 and 441 . Students who 
earn a grade of less than 70 percent or 
1 .67 in either the theoretical or clini- 
cal component of a nursing course 
will be required to repeat both compo- 
nents of the course before being per- 
mitted to continue in the nursing 
sequence. 

2. Policies regarding absence from class- 
es or from the clinical portion of 
nursing courses are determined by the 
instructor(s) responsible for the 
course. No absence from the clinical 
portion of the course will be excused 



other than for illness or family 
emergency with one exception. In 
individual cases, students may make 
arrangements with instructors to be 
excused for extracurricular activities. 
Excessive absences for any reason 
will necessitate repeating the entire 
course. 

Typical Plan of Study for B.S.N. 

FRESHMAN YEAR 

Fall 

Chem. 108* (Inorganic 

Chemistry) 1 

Eng. 106 (Composition) 1 

Psych. 110*(Intro to Psych.) .... 1 

Fine Arts/Lang 1 

Physical Education 

4 
Spring 

Chem. H5*(Brief Organic 

Chemistry) 1 

Eng. Elective 1 

Psych. 1 17* (Developmental 

Psych.) 1 

Fine Arts/Lang 1 

Physical Education 

4 
SOPHOMORE YEAR 

Fall 



Bio. 113 


(Anatomy and 






Physiology) 


1 


Cptr. 125 


(Intro, to Computer 
Science) 


1 


Nur. 220 


(Concepts of 
Nutrition in 






Family Health) 


.75 


Rel. 120 


(Death and Dying) 


1 

3.75 


Spring 






Bio. 114 


(Anatomy and 






Physiology) 


1 


Math 103 


(Intro, to Statistics) 


1 


Bio. 226 


(Microbiology for 
Health Sciences) ... 


1 


Nur. 221 


(Foundations of 
Professional 






Practice) 


1.25 



4.25 



JUNIOR YEAR 

Fall 

Nur. 330 (Nursing Care of the 

Developing 

Family I) 1.5 

Nur. 332 (Nursing Care of the 

Adult I) 15 

Nur. 334 (Basic Concepts of 

Pharmacology and 

Therapeutics) J 

4 
Spring 
Nur. 331 (Nursing Care of the 

Developing 

Family II) 1.5 

Nur. 333 (Nursing Care of the 

Adult II) 1.5 

Nur. 335 (Research in 

Nursing) J 

4 
May Term 
Nur. 336 (The Nurse in the 

Social System) 1 

SENIOR YEAR 

Fall 

Nur. 440 (Nursing Care of the 
Emotionally Troubled 
Individual & Family) 1.5 

Elective 1 

Guided Elective** 1 

Nur. 443 (Topics in 

Nursing) .5 

4 
Spring 
Nur. 441 (Comprehensive 

Nursing Care) 1.5 

Nur. 442 (Professional 

Issues) 5 

Phil. 219 (Ethical Issues in 

Biology and 

Medicine) J 

3 

*Prerequisite to Sophomore year. 
**Student must select one course from 
Sociology/ Anthropology which may be 
taken at any point in the program. Re- 
commended courses at this time are Soc. 
110, Soc. 220, Soc. 228, Soc. 114 and 
Soc. 229. 



49 



Requirement for Graduation: 32 Units 
(128 Credits). 

The student may take additional units 
for electives, independent study and/ 
or honors. 

220 CONCEPTS OF NUTRITION 
IN FAMILY HEALTH 

Essentials of normal nutrition and their rela- 
tionship to the health of individuals and fam- 
ilies These concepts serve as a basis for the 
development of an understanding of thera- 
peutic application of dietary principles and 
the health professional's role and responsi- 
bility in this facet of client care. Three hours 
of lecture. V* unit. Prerequisites: Chemistry 
108. 115, or consent of instructor Open to 
non-nursing majors. 

221 FOUNDATIONS OF 
PROFESSIONAL NURSING PRACTICE 
Introduction of major theoretical elements 
underlying professional nursing practice. 
Focus on the concept of health and common 
health problems recognizing the multi- 
directional influence of the individual, fami- 
ly, and environment. In this first clinical 
course the student will utilize the nursing 
process in assisting clients to attain a maxi- 
mum level of functioning. Three hours of 
lecture and five hours clinical laboratory 
/'/« units. Prerequisites: Chemistry 108, 
115, Nursing 220, and Biology 113. 



330-331 



NURSING CARE OF THE 
DEVELOPING FAMILY 



Examination of health and nursing needs of 
beginning and developing families. Initial 
emphasis on nursing needs of mothers and 
infants within the family unit as well as the 
common health problems of children through 
adolescence. Subsequent emphasis on nurs- 
ing needs of children and mothers with health 
problems of actue and long term nature, the 
influence of illness on their development and 
the effect of illness on the family configura- 
tion. Three hours of lecture and 7'/: hours 
clinical laboratory l'h units. Prerequisite 
for Nursing 330. Nursing 221 . Biology 114. 
226. Prerequisite for Nursing 331: Nursing 
330 and 334. 

332-333 NURSING CARE OF THE ADULT 
Identification of adult health care needs and 
implementation of nursing activities based 
on an understanding of growth and develop- 
ment, pathophysiology, communication 
skills, interpersonal dynamics, and psych- 
osocial interventions. Three hours of lecture 
and 7'A hours clinical laboratory. 1'/: units. 
Prerequisite for Nursing 332: Nursing 221 , 
Biology 114 and 226. Corequisite: Nursing 
334. Prerequisite for Nursing 333: Nursing 
332 and 334. 



334 BASIC CONCEPTS OF 
PHARMACOLOGY AND 
THERAPEUTICS 

Fundamentals of pharmacology and thera- 
peutics are presented for the various classes 
of drugs. Relationships of pharmacological 
mechanisms to the affected biochemical and 
physiological processes. Interactions and 
loxicological aspects of drug therapy are 
reviewed. Four hours of lecture. I unit. 
Corequisite: Nursing 330, 332. or consent of 
instructor. Open to non-nursing majors. 

335 RESEARCH IN NURSING 

Expansion of theoretical basis of research 
methodology with emphasis on analyzing, 
criticizing, and interpreting nursing 
research. Development of a research propos- 
al focusing on a nursing problem. Four hours 
of lecture. 1 unit. Prerequisite: Mathematics 
103, Computer Science 125. and Nursing 
330 and 332 or consent of instructor. Open 
to non-majors. 

336 THE NURSE IN 

THE SOCIAL SYSTEM 

Seminar discussions and clinical laboratory 
using the hospital as a prototype. Theories of 
social systems. Examination of induction 
into the hospital system. Evaluation of stan- 
dards of care. Focus on utilization of change 
theory. Twelve hours of lecture and °6 hours 
of clinical laboratory. I unit. Prerequisites 
Nursing 331. 333, 334. Required for the 
nursing major and offered only in May term. 

440 NURSING CARE OF THE 
EMOTIONALLY TROUBLED 
INDIVIDUAL AND FAMILY 

Examination of disturbed human relation- 
ships with focus on intrapsychic, interper- 
sonal, and physiologic etiology. Emphasis 
on advanced therapeutic nurse-patient rela- 
tionships within context of family, commu- 
nity, and health care systems. Three hours of 
lecture and 7'/: hours clinical laboratory. 
l'h units. Prerequisites: Nursing 331 . 333. 
336. 

441 COMPREHENSIVE NURSING CARE 
Culminating nursing course with focus on 
leadership and management skills in a choice 
of clinical settings. Seminars provide oppor- 
tunities for students to share commonalities 
and unique aspects of professional practice. 
Three hours of lecture and 7'/; hours of 
clinical laboratory. IV; units. Prerequisites: 
Nursing 336, 440. 

442 PROFESSIONAL ISSUES 

An analysis of nursing issues in the context 
of the historical background of the profes- 
sion, the social forces which influence nurs- 
ing, and nursing's impact upon society 
Two-hour seminar. '/: unit. Prerequisite: 
Senior standing or consent of instructor. 



443 TOPICS IN NURSING 

Selected topic courses in nursing designed to 
permit students to pursue subjects which, 
because of their specialized nature, may not 
be offered on a regular basis. '/: unit. Prereq- 
uisite: Senior standing or consent of instruc- 
tor. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
IN NURSING 
An opportunity to develop and implement an 
individual plan of study under faculty guid- 
ance. '/: unit. Prerequisite: Senior standing 
or consent of chairperson. 



PHILOSOPHY 



Associate Professor: Griffith 

(Chairperson), Whelan 
Assistant Professor: Herring 

The study of philosophy develops a 
critical understanding of the basic con- 
cepts and presuppositions around which 
we organize our thought in science, 
religion, education, morality, the arts, 
and other human enterprises. A major in 
philosophy, together with appropriate 
other courses, can provide an excellent 
preparation for policy-making positions 
of many kinds, for graduate study in 
several fields, and for careers in educa- 
tion, law, and the ministry. The major in 
philosophy consists of eight courses 
numbered 1 10 or above, including 438, 
439, 449 and at least three other courses 
numbered 225 or above. 

A minor in Philosophy consists of any 
four philosophy courses numbered 220 
or above. Three more specialized minors 
are also available: a minor in Philosophy 
and Law consists of four courses from 
Philosophy 221 , 222. 225, 334, 335,449 
or Studies; a minor in Philosophy and 
Science requires completion of four 
courses from Philosophy 221, 222, 225, 
333, 449 or Studies; a minor in the His- 
tory of Philosophy may be completed by 
selecting four courses from Philosophy 
221. 222, 438, 439. 449 or Studies. 
Since topics in Philosophy 449 and inde- 
pendent studies projects vary, these 
courses may be used to count toward a 
specialized minor only if they are 
approved in advance by the department. 



50 



One one unit of independent studies may 
be used. 

105 PRACTICAL REASONING 

A general introduction to topics in logic and 
their application to practical reasoning, with 
primary emphasis on detecting fallacies, 
evaluating inductive reasoning, and under- 
standing the rudiments of scientific method 

110 INTRODUCTION TO 

PHILOSOPHICAL PROBLEMS 

An introductory course designed to show the 
nature of philosophy by examination of sev- 
eral examples of problems which have 
received extended attention in philosophical 
literature. These topics often include the 
relation of the mind to the body, the possibil- 
ity of human freedom, arguments about the 
existence of God, the conditions of know- 
ledge, and the relation of language to 
thought. Some attention is also given to the 
principles of acceptable reasoning. 

114 PHILOSOPHY AND 
PERSONAL CHOICE 

An introductory philosophical examination 
of a number of contemporary moral issues 
which call for personal decision. Topics 
often investigated include: the "good" life, 
obligation to others, sexual ethics, abortion, 
suicide and death, violence and pacifism, 
obedience to the law. the relevance of per- 
sonal beliefs to morality. Discussion centers 
on some of the suggestions philosophers 
have made about how to make such deci- 
sions. 

115 PHILOSOPHY AND PUBLIC POLICY 
An introductory philosophical examination 
of the moral and conceptual dimension of 
various contemporary public issues, such as 
the relation of ethics to politics and the law, 
the enforcement of morals, the problems of 
fair distribution of goods and opportunities, 
the legitimacy of restricting the use of natural 
resources, and the application of ethics to 
business practice. Discussion centers on 
some of the suggestions philosophers have 
made about how to deal with these issues. 

216 ETHICAL ISSUES IN BUSINESS 

An introductory philosophical examination 
of a variety of moral problems that arise 
concerning the American business system. 
Included are a systematic consideration of 
typical moral problems faced by individuals 
and an examination of common moral criti- 
cisms of the business system itself. 

217 PHILOSOPHICAL ISSUES 
IN EDUCATION 

An examination of the basic concepts 
involved in thought about education, and a 
consideration of the various methods for 
justifying educational proposals. Typical of 



the issues discussed are: Are education and 
indoctrination different? What is a liberal 
education? Are education and schooling 
compatible' 1 What do we need to learn? 
Alternate years. 

218 PHILOSOPHICAL ISSUES 
IN CRIMINAL JUSTICE 

An introductory examination of various phi- 
losophical issues and concepts which are of 
special importance in legal contexts. Discus- 
sion includes both general topics, such as the 
justification of punishment, and more spe- 
cific topics, such as the insanity defense and 
the rights of the accused. Readings are 
arranged topically and include both classical 
and contemporary sources. 

219 ETHICAL ISSUES IN 
BIOLOGY AND MEDICINE 

A philosophical investigation of some of the 
ethical issues which arise as a result of con- 
temporary medical and biological technolo- 
gy. Typical of these issues are euthanasia, 
behavior control, patient rights, experimen- 
tation on humans, fetal research, abortion, 
genetic engineering, population control, and 
distribution of health resources. 

221-222 INTRODUCTION TO THE 
HISTORY OF PHILOSOPHY 
An introductory survey of the history of 
philosophy from the ancient Greeks through 
the early modem period Particular attention 
will be paid to the common origins of philos- 
ophy and science and their subsequent rela- 
tionship and to the role which philosophy has 
played in the evolution of social and political 
thought . Philosophy 22 1 is not a prerequisite 
for Philosophy 222. 

225 SYMBOLIC LOGIC 

A study of modem symbolic logic and its 
application to the analysis of arguments. 
Included are truth-functional relations, the 
logic of propositional functions, and deduc- 
tive systems. Attention is also given to vari- 
ous topics in the philosophy of logic. 

331 PHILOSOPHY AND HUMAN NATURE 
An examination of a variety of classical and 
contemporary philosophical questions about 
human nature. Among the questions typical- 
ly considered are these: Is there such a thing 
as human nature? Are human beings differ- 
ent, in any fundamental way. from other 
animals? Are human beings free - ' Is human 
consciousness just a brain process? Are 
human beings inherently predisposed toevil? 
Are human beings biologically determined to 
be selfish or aggressive? Are the differences 
in achievement between men and women 
biologically based 9 Prerequisite: Students 
without previous study in philosophy must 
have instructor' s permission. 



332 PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION 

A philosophical examination of religion. 
Included are such topics as the nature of 
religious discourse, arguments for and 
against the existence of God . and the relation 
between religion and science. Readings from 
classical and contemporary sources. Prereq- 
uisite: students without previous study in 
philosophy must have instructor' s permis- 
sion. Alternate years. 

333 PHILOSOPHY OF NATURAL SCIENCE 

A consideration of philosophically important 
conceptual problems arising from reflection 
about natural science, including such topics 
as the nature of scientific laws and theories, 
the character of explanation, the import of 
prediction, the existence of "non- 
observable" theoretical entities such as 
electrons and genes, the problem of justify- 
ing induction, and various puzzles associated 
with probability. Prerequisite: students 
without previous study in philosophy must 
have instructor's permission. Alternate 
years. 

334 SOCIAL AND 
POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY 

A systematic philosophical investigation of 
the relation between human nature and the 
proper social and political order. Topics 
studied include the purpose of government, 
the nature of legitimate authority, the foun- 
dation of human rights, and the limits of 
human freedom. Emphasis is placed on the 
logic of social and political thought and on 
the analysis of basic principles and concepts. 
Prerequisite: students without previous phil- 
osophy must have instructor's permission. 

335 ETHICAL THEORY 

An inquiry concerning the grounds which 
distinguish morally right from morally 
wrong actions Central to the course is criti- 
cal consideration of the proposals and the 
rationale of relativists, egoists, utilitarians, 
and other ethical theorists. Various topics in 
metaethics are also included. Prerequisite: 
students without previous study in philoso- 
phy must have instructor's permission. 

438 ANCIENT GREEK PHILOSOPHY 

A critical examination of the ancient Greek 
philosophers, with particular emphasis on 
Plato and Aristotle. Prerequisite: two 
courses in philosophy or consent of instruc- 
tor. Alternate years. 

439 EARLY MODERN PHILOSOPHY 

A critical examination of the Continental 
Rationalists (Descartes. Spinoza, Leibniz). 
the British Empiricists (Locke, Berkeley, 
Hume) and Kant. Prerequisite: two courses 
in philosophy or consent of instructor. Alter- 
nate \ears. 



51 



449 DEPARTMENTAL SEMINAR 

An investigation carried on by discussions 
and papers, into one philosophical problem, 
text, philosopher, or movement. A different 
topic is selected each semester. Recent topics 
include artifical intelligence, the ethics of 
research of human subjects, life after death, 
personal identity, and human rights. This 
seminar is designed to provide junior and 
senior philosophy majors and other qualified 
students with more than the usual opportuni- 
ty for concentrated and cooperative inquiry. 
Prerequisite: consent of instructor. This 
seminar may be repealed for cretin. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index! 
Recent independent studies in philosophy 
include Nietzsche, moral education. Rawls' 
theory of justice, existentialism, euthanasia. 
Plato's ethics, and philosophical aesthetics. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 



PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

Associate Professor: Burch 
Assistant Professor: Whitehill 

(Chairperson) 
Instructor: Holmes 

101 PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

Coeducational physical education classes. 
Basic instructions in fundamentals, know- 
ledge, and appreciation of sports that include 
swimming, tennis, bowling, volleyball, 
archery, field hockey, soccer, golf, badmin- 
ton, modern dance, skiing, elementary 
games (for elementary teachers), toneastics, 
physical fitness, and other activities. Back- 
packing, cross-country and alpine skiing, 
jogging, and cycling are offered on a contract 
basis Het'inning swimming is required for 
all non-swimmers Students may select any 
activity offered. A reasonable degree of pro- 
ficiency is required in the activities. Empha- 
sis is on the potential use of activities .is 
recreational and leisure-time interests. Two 
semesters of physical education (two hours 
per weekl are required. All physical educa- 
tion classes are open to men and women 

Athletic Training 

Lycoming College established an 
apprenticeship program in athletic train- 
ing in 1979 after recognizing two condi- 
tions: the importance of the care and 
prevention of athletic injuries by trained 



professionals, and the career's promising 
growth potential. 

To complete this non-credit program 
students participate in practical as well as 
classroom work under the supervision of 
Lycoming's certified athletic trainer. 
Students become eligible to participate in 
the National Athletic Trainers Associa- 
tion (N.A.T.A.) Certification examina- 
tion to earn the status of an N.A.T.A. 
certified trainer. 



POLITICAL SCIENCE 

Professor: Giglio 
Associate Professor: Roskin 

(Chairperson) 

The major is designed to provide a 
systematic understanding of government 
and politics at the international, national, 
state, and local levels. Majors are 
encouraged to develop their faculties to 
make independent, objective analyses 
which can be applied to the broad spec- 
trum of the social sciences. 

Although the political science major is 
not designed as a vocational major, stu- 
dents with such training may go directly 
into government service, journalism, 
teaching, or private administrative agen- 
cies. A political science major can pro- 
vide the base for the study of law, or for 
graduate studies leading to administra- 
tive work in federal, state, or local gov- 
ernments, international organizations, or 
college teaching. Students seeking certi- 
fication to teach secondary school social 
studies may major in political science but 
should consult their advisors and the 
education department. 

A major consists of eight political sci- 
ence courses, including Political Science 
116B. Prospective majors are encour- 
aged to register for this course during 
their freshman year. An exemption will 
be granted only if it strengthens the stu- 
dent's program. In addition to L16B, 
students must take at least one course in 
each of five areas (A to E). Students are 
encouraged, also, to select a minor in 
another department in accordance with 
their academic and career interests and in 



consultation with their departmental 
advisor. 

For non-majors, the department offers 
three minors: a minor in Political Science 
consists of any four courses numbered 
200 or above from areas A to E; a minor 
in Foreign Affairs consists of four 
courses selected from Political Science 
220, 225, 326, 327, 438 and 439; and a 
minor in Legal Studies consists of Politi- 
cal Science 331, 335, 436 and one other 
course numbered 200 or above. Students 
are encouraged to consult with depart- 
ment members on the selection of a 
minor. 

I In INTRODUCTION TO POLITICS 
AND PUBLIC POLICY 

An examination of public policy within the 
context of American politics. Includes iden- 
tification and analysis of contemporary poli- 
cy issues, alternative solutions, factors in 
formulation, and evaluation of impact. May 
be taken for either one-half unit (section 
1 16A) or full unit (section 1 16B); declared 
majors and prospective majors should take 
(he full-unit course. 116B 

A. American Politics 

1 10 GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS 
IN THE UNITED STATES 

An introduction to American national gov- 
ernment which emphasizes both structural- 
functional analysis and policy-making pro- 
cesses. In addition to the legislative, execu- 
tive, and judicial branches of government, 
attention will be given to political parties and 
interest groups, elections and voting behav- 
ior, and constitutional rights. Recommended 
to all social science-education majors and to 
those students who have had inadequate or 
insufficient preparation in American govern- 
ment. 

1 1 1 STATE AND LOCAL GOVERNMENT 
An examination of the general principles, 
major problems, and political processes of 
the states and their subdivisions, together 
with their role in a federal type of govern- 
ment. 

223 AMERICAN PRESIDENCY 

A study of the office and powers of the 
president with analysis of his major roles as 
chief administrator, legislator, political lead- 
er, foreign policy maker, and commander- 
in-chief. Special attention is given to those 
presidents who led the nation boldly. Subject 
to itudenl demand, but offered at least once 
during a four-year cycle. 



52 



B. Legal Studies 

331 CIVIL RIGHTS AND LIBERTIES 

What are our rights and liberties as Ameri- 
cans? What should they be? A frank discus- 
sion of the nature and scope of the constitu- 
tional guarantees. First Amendment rights. 
the rights of criminal suspects and defen- 
dants, racial and sexual equality, and equal 
protection of the laws. Students will read and 
brief the more important Supreme Court 
decisions. Prerequisite: junior or senior 
standing or consent of instructor. 

335 LAW AND SOCIETY 

An examination of the nature, sources, func- 
tions, and limits of law as an instrument of 
political and social control. Included for dis- 
cussion are legal problems pertaining to the 
family, crime, deviant behavior, poverty, 
and minority groups. Prerequisite: junior or 
senior standing or consent of instructor. 

436 MASS MEDIA LAW AND REGULATION 
An examination of the legal structure and the 
system by which mass communication is 
controlled in this society. The forces which 
shape, influence, and make policy will be 
considered. Cross-listed as Mass Communi- 
cation 331 . Prerequisite: junior or senior 
standing or consent of instructor. 

C. Applied Politics 

333 BUREAUCRACY AND 

PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION 
What is bureaucracy? Why and how do 
bureaucracies arise? What has been the 
political impact of growth of bureaucracy in 
government? These questions, among 
others, will be considered in this examina- 
tion of public bureaucracies. This course is 
highly recommended to students planning to 
take an internship in city or county govern- 
ment through the political science depart- 
ment. Subject to student demand, but offered 
at least once during a four-year cycle. 

434 POLITICAL NEWSWRITING 

A workshop course in the reporting and 
rewriting of public affairs at the local, 
national, and international levels. There will 
be neither texts nor examinations, but short 
written assignments will be due every class 
meeting. Prerequisite: Mass Comm 329 or 
consent of instructor. Alternate years. 

448 PUBLIC OPINION AND POLLING 

A course dealing with the general topic and 
methodology of polling. Content includes 
exploration of the processes by which peo- 
ple's political opinions are formed, the 
manipulation of public opinion through the 
uses of propaganda, and the American 
response to politics and political issues. 



D. Comparative Politics 

220 EUROPEAN POLITICS 

A study of the political systems of East and 
West Europe with emphasis on comparison 
and patterns of government. The course will 
review politics in Northern (Britain. West 
Germany. Sweden). Latin (France. Italy. 
Spain), and Eastern (Soviet Union. East Ger- 
many, Yugoslavia) Europe and attempt to 
find underlying similarities and differences. 

326 POLITICAL CULTURES 

An exploration of the "people" aspects of 
political life in several countries. The way 
people interact with each other and with 
government, what they expect from the sys- 
tem, how they acquire their political attitudes 
and styles, and how these contribute to the 
type of government. Alternate years. 

438 POLITICS OF DEVELOPING AREAS 
The causes and possible cures for socio- 
political backwardness in Asia. Africa, and 
Latin America. Alternate years. 

E. International Relations 

225 WORLD POLITICS 

Why is there war? An introduction to inter- 
national relations with emphasis on the var- 
ieties of conflicts which may grow into war. 

327 CRISIS AREAS IN WORLD POLITICS 

The study of several current areas of interna- 
tional tension and conflict, including rela- 
tions among the United States, Soviet Union, 
and China, plus the Middle East and whatev- 
er new danger spots arise over time. Alter- 
nate years. 

439 AMERICAN FOREIGN POLICY 

The U.S. role in the world in geographic, 
strategic, historical, and ideological per- 
spectives, plus an examination of the 
domestic forces shaping U.S. policy. Alter- 
nate years. 

F. Special Programs 

470-479 INTERNSHIPS (See index) 

Students may receive academic credit for 
serving as interns in structured learning situ- 
ations with a wide variety of public and 
private agencies and organizations. Students 
have served as interns w ith the Public Defen- 
der's Office, the Lycoming County Court 
Adminstrator. and the Williamsport City 
government. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 

(See index) 
Current studies relate to elections — local. 



state, and federal — while past studies have 
included Soviet and world politics. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 



PSYCHOLOGY 



Professor: Hancock 
Associate Professor: Berthold 

(Chairperson) 
Assistant Professor: Balleweg. 

Ryan 

The major provides training in both 
theoretical and applied psychology. It is 
designed to meet the needs of students 
seeking careers in psychology or other 
natural or social sciences. It also meets 
the needs of students seeking a better 
understanding of human behavior as a 
means of furthering individual and career 
goals in other areas. Psychology majors 
and others are urged to discuss course 
selections in psychology with members 
of the department to help insure appro- 
priate course selection. 

A major consists of Psychology 110. 
336, 43 1 , 432 and four other psychology 
courses. Statistics also is required. 

A minor in Psychology consists of 
Psychology 1 10 and four other psycholo- 
gy courses (three of which must be num- 
bered 200 or above) which must be 
approved by the department. 

110 INTRODUCTORY PSYCHOLOGY 

An introduction to the empirical study of 
human and other animal behavior. Areas 
considered may include: learning, personal- 
ity, social, physiological, sensory, cogni- 
tion, and developmental. 

1 1 2 GROUP PROCESSES AND 

INTERPERSONAL COMMUNICATION 
The introduction to the research and theory 
from social psychology related to small- 
group dynamics and interpersonal communi- 
cation. Topics covered will include commu- 
nication processes, interpretation of motiva- 
tion, conceptualization of individual 
personalities, problem solving and leader- 
ship. The first stage of the course will focus 
on research and theory; the second half will 
emphasize the development of skills and 
techniques where students become members 
of a self-analytic — practicing the skills and 



53 



making a case study of the processes 
involved. May term only. 

116 ABNORMAL PSYCHOLOGY 

An introduction to the patterns of deviant 
behavior with emphasis on cause, function. 
and treatment The various models for the 
conceptualization of abnormal behavior are 
Critically examained. Prerequisite: Psychol- 
ogy 110. 

117 DEVELOPMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY 

A study of the basic principles of human 
growth and development throughout the life 
span. Prerequisite: Psychology 1 10. 

118 ADOLESCENT PSYCHOLOGY 

The study areas will include theories of 
adolescence; current issues raised by as well 
as about the "generation of youth"; research 
findings bearing on theories and issues of 
growth beyond childhood, and self- 
exploration. Prerequisite: Psychology 110. 

224 SOCIAL PSYCHOLOGY 

The scientific exploration of interpersonal 
communication and behavior. Topics 
include attitudes and attitude change, attrac- 
tion and communication, social perception 
and social influence, prosocial and antisocial 
behavior and group processes. Prerequisite: 
Psychology 110. 

225 INDUSTRIAL AND 
ORGANIZATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 
The application of the principles and 
methods of psychology to selected industrial 
and organizational situations. Prerequisite: 
Psychology 1 10 or consent of instructor. 

239 BEHAVIOR MODIFICATION 

A detailed examination of the applied analy- 
sis of behavior. Focus will be on the applica- 
tion of experimental method to the individual 
clinical case. The course will cover target- 
ing, behavior, base-rating, intervention 
strategies, and outcome evaluation 
Learning-based modification techniques 
such as contingency management, counter- 
conditioning, extinction, discrimination 
training, aversive conditioning, and negative 
practice will be examined. Prerequisite 
Psychology 110 or consent of instructor. 

333 PHYSIOLOGICAL PSYCHOLOGY 

An introduction to the physiological psy- 
chologist's method of approach to the under- 
standing of behavior as well as the set of 
principles that relate the function and organi- 
zation of the nervous system to the phenome- 
na of behavior. Prerequisite: Psychology 
1 10 or consent of instructor. 

334 PRINCIPLES OF MEASUREMENT 

Psychometric methods and theory, including 



scale transformation, norms, standardiza- 
tion, validation procedures, and estimation 
ol reliability Prerequisites Psychology 1 10 

ami statistics. 

335 HISTORY AND 
SYSTEMS OF PSYCHOLOGY 

The growth of scientific psychology and the 
theories and systems that have accompanied 
its development. Prerequisite: four courses 
in psychology. 

336 PERSONALITY THEORY 

A review of the major theories of personality 
development and personality functioning. In 
addition to covering the details of each 
theory, the implications and applications of 
each theory will be considered . Prerequisite: 
Psychology 110. 

337 COGNITION 

An investigation of human mental processes 
along the two major dimensions directed and 
undirected thought. Topic areas include rec- 
ognition, attention, conceptualization, 
problem-solving, fantasy, language, dream- 
ing, and creativity. Prerequisite: Psychology 
110. 

338 EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY 

An introduction to the empirical study of the 
teaching-learning process. Areas considered 
may include educational objectives, pupil 
and teacher characteristics, concept learn- 
ing, problem solving and creativity, attitudes 
and values, motivation, retention and trans- 
fer, evaluation and measurement. Prerequi- 
site: Psychology 110 or consent of instruc- 
tor. 

34 1 PSYCHOLOGY OF WOMEN 

A review of contemporary theory and 
research on the psychology of gender differ- 
ences. The major theories and basic research 
on gender differences will be covered. Spe- 
cial topics include sex differences in achieve- 
ment, power, and communication; sex-role 
slcieonpcs. beliefs about masculinit) and 
femininity; and gender influences on mental 
health. Prerequisite: Psychology 110. 

431 LEARNING 
EXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY 
Learning processes The examination of (he 
basic methods and principles of animal and 
human learning. Prerequisites: Psychology 
1 10 and statistics. 

432 SENSORY 
EXPERIMENTAL PSYCHOLOGY 

The examination of psychophysical method- 
ology and basic neurophysiological methods 
is they are applied to the understanding of 
sensor processes. Prerequisites: Psychology 
III) ami slatistii s. 



448-444 PRACTICUM IN PSYCHOLOGY 

An off-campus experience in a community 
setting offering psychological services, sup- 
plemented with classroom instruction and 
discussion Psychology 448 covers the basic 
counseling skills, while Psychology 449 
covers the major theoretical approaches to 
counseling. Prerequisite: consent of 
instructor. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Internships give students an opportunity to 
relate on-campus academic experiences to 
society in general and to their post- 
baccalaureate objectives in particular. Stu- 
dents have, for example, worked in prisons, 
public and private school, county govern- 
ment, and for the American Red Cross. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Independent study is an opportunity for stu- 
dents to pursue special interests in areas for 
which courses are not offered. In addition, 
students have an opportunity to study a topic 
in more depth than is possible in the regular 
classroom situation. Studies in the past have 
included child abuse, counseling of hospital 
patients, and research in the psychology of 
natural disasters. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 
Honors in psychology requires original con- 
tributions to the literature of psychology 
through independent study. The most recent 
honors project was a study of the relationship 
between socio-economic status and visual 
versus auditory learning. 



RELIGION 

Professor: Guerra (Chairperson) 
Associate Professor: Hughes 

A major consists of 10 courses, 
including Religion 113,1 14, and 120. At 
least seven courses must be taken in the 
department. The following courses may 
be counted toward fulfilling the major 
requirements: Greek 221 and 222, 
Hebrew 221 and 222. History 340 and 
416, Philosophy 332, and Sociology 
333. 

A minor in Religion consists of one 
course from Religion 1 10, 1 13, 1 14 and 
four religion courses numbered 200 or 
above. 

An interdisciplinary minor in Biblical 



54 



Languages requires the completion of 
Greek 221. 222 and Hebrew 221 and 
222. 

110 INTRODUCTION TO RELIGION 

Designed for the beginning student, this 
course examines what it means to be reli- 
gious. Some of the issues are the definition of 
religion, the meaning of symbolism, con- 
cepts of God, ecstatic phenomena. Specific 
attention will be devoted to the current prob- 
lem of cults and religious liberty. 

113 OLD TESTAMENT 
FAITH AND HISTORY 

A critical examination of the literature within 
its historical setting and in the light of 
archaeological findings to show the faith and 
religious life of the Hebrew-Jew ish commu- 
nity in the Biblical period, and an introduc- 
tion to the history of interpretation with an 
emphasis on contemporary Old Testament 
criticism and theology. 

114 NEW TESTAMENT 
FAITH AND HISTORY 

A critical examination of the literature w ithin 
its historical setting to show the faith and 
religious life of the Christian community in 
the Biblical period, and an introduction to the 
history of interpretation with an emphasis on 
contemporary New Testament criticism and 
theology. 

1 1 7 INTRODUCTION TO 

SUPERNATURAL PHENOMENA 
An examination of claims for supernatural or 
paranormal phenomena with an emphasis on 
critical methodology and the evaluation of 
evidence. The course is designed to teach 
students the difference between the scientific 
and religious methodologies, the proper role 
of each, and the hazards of mixing the two 
Subjects covered include ESP. Spiritualism, 
the Bermuda Triangle, witchcraft, faith 
healing. Noah's Ark. ghosts, monsters, and 
others . Offered May and summer terms onlx. 

120 DEATH AND DYING 

A study of death from personal, social, and 
universal standpoints with emphasis upon 
what the dying may teach the living. Princi- 
pal issues are the stages of dying, bereave- 
ment, suicide, funeral conduct, and the reli- 
gious doctrines of death and immortality. 
Course includes, as optional, practical pro- 
jects with terminal patients under profession- 
al supervision. Only one course from the 
combination 120-121 may be used for distri- 
bution. 

\2\ AFTER DEATH AND DYING 

An examination of the question of life after 
death in terms of contemporary clinical 
studies, the New Testament resurrection nar- 



ratives, the Asian doctrine of reincarnation, 
and the classical theological beliefs of provi- 
dence and predestination. Religion 120 is 
recommended but not required. Only one 
course from the combination 120-121 max 
be used for distribution. 

222 PROTESTANTISM IN 
THE MODERN WORLD 

An examination of Protestant thought and 
life from Luther to the present against the 
backdrop of a culture rapidly changing from 
the 17th century scientific revolution to 
Marxism. Darwinism, and depth psycholo- 
gy. Special attention will be paid to the 
constant interaction between Protestantism 
and the world in which it finds itself. 

223 CHRISTIAN ORIGINS 

A study of the historical, cultural, and reli- 
gious background of the formation of Chris- 
tianity and the antecedents of Christian belief 
and practice in post-exilic Judaism and in 
Hellenism. 

224 JUDAISM AND ISLAM 

An examination of the rise, growth, and 
expansion of Judaism and Islam with special 
attention given to the theological contents of 
the literatures of these religions as far as they 
are normative in matters of faith, practice, 
and organization. Also, a review of their 
contributions to the spiritual heritage of man- 
kind. 

225 ORIENTAL RELIGION 

A phenomenological study of the basic con- 
tent of Hinduism. Buddhism, and Chinese 
Taoism with special attention to social and 
political relations, mythical and aesthetic 
forms, and the East-West dialogue. 

226 BIBLICAL ARCHAEOLOGY 

A study of the role of archaeology in recon- 
structing the world in which the Biblical 
literature originated with special attention 
given to archaeological results that throw 
light on the clarification of the Biblical text. 
Also, an introduction to basic archaeological 
method and a study in depth of several rep- 
resentative excavations along with the arti- 
facts and material culture recovered from 
different historical periods. 

228 HISTORY AND CULTURE OF 
THE ANCIENT NEAR EAST 
A study of the history and culture of Meso- 
potamia. Anatolia. Syria-Palestine, and 
Egypt from the rise of the Sumerian culture 
to Alexander the Great Careful attention 
will be given to the religious views prevalent 
in the ancient Near East as far as these views 
interacted w ith the culture and faith of Bibli- 
cal man. 

230 PSYCHOLOGY OF RELIGION 

A study into the broad insights of psychology 



in relation to the phenomena of religion and 
religious behavior. The course concentrates 
on religious experience or manifestations 
rather than concepts. Tentative solutions will 
be sought to questions such as: What does it 
feel like to be religious or to have a religious 
experience'' What is the religious function in 
human development' 1 How does one think 
psychologically about theological problems ? 

331 CHRISTIAN SOCIAL ETHICS 

A study of Christian ethics as a normative 
perspective for contemporary moral prob- 
lems with emphasis upon the interaction of 
law and religion, decision making in the field 
of biomedical practice, and the reconstruc- 
tion of society in a planetary civilization. 

332 CONTEMPORARY PROBLEMS IN 
CHRISTIAN SOCIAL ETHICS 

An examination of the approach of religion 
and other disciplines to an issue of current 
concern; current topics include the theologi- 
cal significance of law, the ethics of love, 
and the Holocaust. The course may be 
repeated for credit if the topic is different 
from one previously studied. 

337 BIBLICAL TOPICS 

An in-depth study of Biblical topics related 
to the Old and New Testaments. Topics 
include prophecy, wisdom literature, the 
Dead Sea Scrolls, the teachings of Jesus. 
Pauline theology, Judaism and Christian ori- 
gins, reaction criticism — the way the Syn- 
optic Gospels and John give final form to 
their message. Course will vary from year to 
year and may be taken for credit a second 
time if the topic is different from one previ- 
ously studied. 

341 CONTEMPORARY RELIGIOUS ISSUES 
A study of the theological significance of 
some contemporary intellectual develop- 
ments in Western culture The content of this 
course will vary from year to year. Subjects 
studied in recent years include the theologi- 
cal significance of Freud. Marx, and Nietzs- 
che; Christianity and existentialism; theolo- 
gy and depth psychology; the religious 
dimension of contemporary literature. 

342 THE NATURE AND MISSION 
OF THE CHURCH 

A study of the nature of the Church as "The 
People of God" w ith reference to the Bibli- 
cal. Protestant. Orthodox, and Roman Cath- 
olic traditions. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Interns in religion usually work in local 
churches under the supervision of the pastor 
and a member of the faculty. 



55 



N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index i 
Cun-ent study areas are in the Biblical lan- 
guages. New Testament theology, compara- 
tive religions, and the ethics of technology. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 

A recent project was on the theology of hope 
» ith reference to the thought of Ernst Bloch 
and Alfred North Whitehead. 



SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY 

Associate Professors: Jo 

(Chairperson), Wilk 
Assistant Professor: Strauser 

The Sociology/Anthropology Depart- 
ment offers two tracks in the major. Both 
tracks introduce the students to the fun- 
damental concepts of the discipline, and 
both tracks prepare the student for 
graduate school. 

Track I emphasizes the theoretical 
aspects of sociology and anthropology. 
Track II emphasizes the application of 
sociology and anthropology to human 
services. 

Track I — Sociology-Anthropology 
requires the core course sequence 110, 
1 14, 229, 444, and 447 and three other 
courses within the department with the 
exception of 1 15. 222, 223, 225, 440, 
and 443. Religion 226 may also be 
counted toward the major. 

Track II — Human Services in a 
Socio-Cultural Perspective requires: 
Sociology- Anthropology 1 10. 222, 229, 
443, 444, and 447. In addition, students 
must select two courses from among the 
following: Sociology -Anthropology 
220, 221, 227, 228, 300, 334, and 335. 
Students are also required to choose two 
units from the following courses: Psy- 
chology 1 10, Psychology 224, Econom- 
ics 224, and Political Science 333. 
Recommended courses: Accounting 
110. Accounting 226, Spanish 111. 
Spanish 112, History 126, and Philoso- 
phy 334. 

Majors in both tracks are encouraged 
to participate in the internship program. 

A minor in Sociology and Anthropolo- 



gy consists of Sociology-Anthropology 
110 and four other sociology- 
anthropology courses (three of which 
must be numbered 220 or above) which 
must be approved by the department. 

1 10 INTRODUCTION TO SOCIOLOGY 

An introduction to the problems, concepts, 
and methods in sociology today, including 
analysis of stratification, organization of 
groups and institutions, social movements, 
and deviants in social structure. 

1 14 INTRODUCTION TO ANTHROPOLOGY 

An introduction to the subfields of anthropol- 
ogy; its subject matter, methodology, and 
goals. Examination of biological and cultural 
evolution, the fossil evidence for human 
evolution, and questions raised in relation to 
human evolution. Other topics include race, 
human nature, primate behavior, and pre- 
historic cultural development. 

115 INTRODUCTION TO AMERICAN 
CRIMINAL JUSTICE SYSTEM 

An introduction to the role of law enforce- 
ment, courts, and corrections in the admin- 
istration of justice; the historical develop- 
ment of police, courts, and corrections; 
jurisdiction and procedures of courts; an 
introduction to the studies, literature, and 
research in criminal justice; careers in crimi- 
nal justice. 

220 MARRIGE AND THE FAMILY 

The history, structure, and functions of mod- 
ern American family life, emphasizing dat- 
ing, courtship, factors in marital adjustment, 
and the changing status of family members. 
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology I 10 
or consent of instructor. 

221 JUVENILE DELINQUENCY 

A multidisciplinary approach to the study of 
the constellation of factors that relate to juve- 
nile delinquency causation, handling the 
juvenile delinquent in the criminal justice 
system, treatment strategies, prevention, and 
community responsibility. Prerequisite: 
Sociology-Anthropology 110 or consent of 
instructor. 

222 INTRODUCTION TO 
HUMAN SERVICES 

The course is designed for students interested 
in learning about, or entering, the human 
services profession. It will review (he his- 
tory, the range, and the goals of human 
services together with a survey of various 
strategies and approaches to human prob- 
lems. It will include practical discussions of 
social behavioral differences as (hey relate to 
slrcss and conflict in people's lives. Prereq- 
uisite: Sociology-Anthropology I It) and/or 
Psychology 1 10 or consent of instructor. 



223 INTRODUCTION TO 
LAW ENFORCEMENT 

Principles, theories, and doctrines of the law 
ol crimes, elements in crime, analysis of 
criminal investigation, important case law. 
Prerequisite: Sociology -Anthropology 115 
or consent of instructor. 

224 RURAL AND URBAN COMMUNITIES 
The concept of community is treated as it 
operates and affects individual and group 
behavior in rural, suburban, and urban set- 
tings. Emphasis is placed upon characteristic 
institutions and problems of modem city life. 
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 110 
or consent of instructor. 

225 INTRODUCTION TO 
CRIMINAL INVESTIGATION 

This course is designed for advanced crimi- 
nal justice majors. Emphasis is placed on an 
in-depth study of detection and investigation 
of major crimes. Particular attention is 
placed on the use of criminalistics, legal 
parameters of evidence and interrogation, 
and prosecutory procedures. Prerequisite: 
Sociology-Anthropology 223 or consent of 
instructor. Will not he counted toward the 
sociology/anthropology major. 

226 SOCIAL MOVEMENTS 

An analysis of the dynamics, structure, and 
reactions to social movements with focus on 
contemporary social movements. Prerequi- 
site: Sociology-Anthropology 110 or consent 
of instructor. 

227 SOCIAL PROBLEMS 

The course examines the causes, character- 
istics, and consequences of social problems 
in America from diverse socio-cultural per- 
spectives. Topics discussed typically include 
crime, urban crises, family disorganization, 
poverty, race problems, drug abuse, and 
other related issues. Prerequisite: 
Sociology-Anthropology 110 or consent of 
instructor. 

228 AGING AND SOCIETY 

Analysis of cross-cultural characteristics of 
the aged as individuals and as members of 
groups. Emphasis is placed upon variables: 
health, housing, socio-economic status, per- 
sonal adjustment, retirement, and social 
participation. Sociological, social psycho- 
logical, and anthropological frames of 
reference utilized in analysis and description 
of aging and its relationship to society, cul- 
ture, and personality. 

229 CULTURAL ANTHROPOLOGY 

An examination of cultural and social anthro- 
pology designed to familiarize (he student 
w ith the analytical approaches to the diverse 
cultures of the world The relevancv of cul- 



56 



tural anthropology for an understanding of 
the human condition will be stressed. Topics 
to be covered include the nature of primitive 
societies in contrast to civilizations, the con- 
cept of culture and cultural relativism, the 
individual and culture, the social patterning 
of behavior and social control, an anthropo- 
logical perspective on the culture of the 
United States. 

300 CRIMINOLOGY 

Analysis of the sociology of law; conditions 
under which criminal laws develop; etiology 
of crime; epidemiology of crime, including 
explanation of statistical distribution of 
criminal behavior in terms of time, space, 
and social location. Prerequisite: 
Sociology-Anthropology 110 or consent of 
instructor. 

33 1 SOCIOLOGY OF WOMEN 

A sociological examination of the role of 
women in American society through an anal- 
ysis of the social institutions which affect 
their development. Role-analysis theory will 
be applied to the past, present, and future 
experience of women as it relates to the role 
options of society as a whole. Students will 
do an original research project on the role of 
women. Prerequisite : Sociology- 
Anthropology 1 10. Alternate years. 

332 INSTITUTIONS 

Introduces the student to the sociological 
concept of social institution, the types of 
social institutions to be found in all societies, 
and the interrelationships between the social 
institutions within a society. The course is 
divided into twc basic parts: I. That aspect 
which deals with the systematic organization 
of society in general, and 2. The concentra- 
tion on a particular social institution: eco- 
nomic, political, educational, or social wel- 
fare. Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 
110 or consent of instructor. 

333 SOCIOLOGY OF RELIGION 

An examination of the major theories of the 
relationship of religion to society and a 
survey of sociological studies of religious 
behavior. Prerequisite : Sociology- 
Anthropology 1 10 or consent of instructor. 

334 RACIAL AND 
CULTURAL MINORITIES 

Study of racial . cultural . and national groups 
within the framework of American cultural 
values. An analysis will include historical, 
cultural, and social factors underlying ethnic 
and racial conflict. Field trips and individual 
reports are part of the requirements for the 
course. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 110 or consent of instructor. 

335 CULTURE AND PERSONALITY 
Introduction to psychological anthropology. 



its theories and methodologies. Emphasis 
will be placed on the relationship between 
individual and culture, national character, 
cognition and culture, culture and mental 
disorders, and cross-cultural considerations 
of the concept of self. Prerequisite: 
Sociology-Anthropology 229 or consent of 
instructor. Offered at least once every three 
years. 

336 THE ANTHROPOLOGY OF 
PRIMITIVE RELIGIONS 

The course will familiarize the student with 
the wealth of anthropological data on the 
religions and world views developed by 
primitive peoples. The functions of primitive 
religion in regard to the individual, society, 
and various cultural institutions will be 
examined. Subjects to be surveyed include 
myth, witchcraft, vision quests, spirit pos- 
session, the cultural use of dreams, and revi- 
talization movements. Particular emphasis 
will be given to shamanism, transcultural 
religious experience, and the creation of cul- 
tural realities through religions. Both a social 
scientific and existentialist perspective will 
be employed. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 229 or consent of instructor . 
Alternate years. 

337 THE ANTHROPOLOGY 
OF AMERICAN INDIANS 

An ethnographic survey of native North 
American Indian and Eskimo cultures, such 
as the Iroquois, Plains Indians. Pueblos. 
Kwakiutl. and Netsilik. Changes in native 
lifeways due to European contacts and 
United States expansion will be considered. 
Recent cultural developments among Ameri- 
can Indians will be placed in an anthropo- 
logical perspective. Offered at least once 
every three years. 

338 LEGAL AND POLITICAL 
ANTHROPOLOGY 

The course is designed to familiarize the 
student with the techniques of conflict reso- 
lution and the utilization of public power in 
primitive society as well as the various 
theories of primitive law and government. 
The rise of the state and an anthropological 
perspective on modem law and government 
will be included. The concepts of self- 
regulation and social control, legitimacy, 
coercion, and exploitation will be the orga- 
nizing focus. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 229 or consent of instructor. 

339 THE AMERICAN PRISON SYSTEM 

Nature and history of punishment, evolution 
of the prison and prison methods with 
emphasis on prison community, prison 
architecture, institutional programs, inmate 
rights, and sentences. Review of punishment 
versus treatment, detention facilities, jails, 
reformatories, prison organization and 



administration, custody, and discipline. Pre- 
requisite: Sociology-Anthropology 115. 

440 PROBATION AND PAROLE 

A course designed for the advanced criminal 
justice major. While the course concerns the 
study of probation and parole as parts of the 
criminal justice system and their impact on 
the system as a whole, the primary emphasis 
is the impact on the offender. Particular 
attention is given to diagnostic report writing 
on offenders, pre-sentence investigation. 
offender classification, and parole planning. 
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 115 
and 339. Alternate years. 

441 SOCIAL STRATIFICATION 

An analysis of stratification systems with 
specific reference to American society. The 
course will include an analysis of poverty, 
wealth, and power in the United States. 
Particular attention will be given to factors 
which generate and maintain inequality, 
along with the impact of inequality on the 
lives of Americans. Prerequisite: 
Sociology-Anthropology 110 or consent of 
instructor. 

443 HUMAN SERVICES 

IN HELPING INSTITUTIONS 
The course examines the organizational and 
conceptual context within which human ser- 
vices are delivered in contemporary society. 
Subjects to be covered include ethnographic 
study of nursing homes, prisons, therapeutic 
communities, mental hospitals, and other 
human service institutions. The methodolo- 
gy of fieldwork will be explored so as to 
sensitize the student to the socio-cultural 
dimensions of helping environments and 
relationships. Prerequisite: Sociology- 
Anthropology 110 or Sociology - 
Anthropology 229 or consent of instructor. 
Alternate years. 

444 SOCIAL THEORY 

The history of the development of sociologi- 
cal thought from its earliest philosophical 
beginnings is treated through discussions and 
reports. Emphasis is placed upon sociologi- 
cal thought since the time of Comte. Prereq- 
uisite: Sociology-Anthropology 1 10 or con- 
sent of instructor. 

445 ANTHROPOLOGICAL THEORY 

The history of the development of anthropo- 
logical thought from the 1 8th century to the 
present. Emphasis is placed upon anthropo- 
logical thought since 1850. Topics include 
evolutionism, historical-particularism, cul- 
tural idealism, cultural materialism, func- 
tionalism. structuralism, and ethnoscience. 
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 229 
or consent of instructor. Offered at least 
once even 1 three years. 



57 



446 PEOPLE AND CULTURES OF 
THE AMERICAN SOUTHWEST 

Field experience in the analysis of tricultural 
communities of Northern New Mexico, 
Southern Colorado, and Northeastern Arizo- 
na, including the eastern Pueblos of New 
Mexico; Zuni, Navajo, and Apache reserva- 
tions; isolated Spanish-American mountain 
villages of Northern New Mexico; religious 
ashrams and communes; and cities of the 
Southwest and Juarez, Mexico. Emphasis 
upon Taos. Rio Arriba. Same Fe. and Los 
Alamos counties of New Mexico. Prerequi- 
site: Sociology 110 or consent of instructor. 
May or summer only. 

447 RESEARCH METHODS IN 
SOCIOLOGY-ANTHROPOLOGY 

Study of the research process in sociology- 
anthropology. Attention is given to the proc- 
ess of designing and administering research 
and the application of research. Different 
methodological skills are considered, 
including field work, questionnaire con- 
struction, and other methods of data gather- 
ing and the analysis of data. Prerequisite: 
Sociology-Anthropology 110 and Mathe- 
matical 103 or consent of instructor. 

448-449 PRACTICUM IN SOCIOLOGY 

Introduces the student to a practical work 
experience involving community agencies in 
order to effect a synthesis of the student's 
academic course work and its practical appli- 
cations in a community agency. Specifics of 
(he course to be worked out in conjunction 
with department, student, and agency 
Prerequisite: Sociology-Anthropology 110 
or consent of instructor. 

470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Interns in sociology-anthropology typically 
work off campus with social service agencies 
under the supervision of administrators. 
However, other internship experiences, such 
as with the Lycoming County Historical 
Museum, are available Interns in criminal 
justice work off campus in criminal justice 
agencies, such as penal institutions and prob- 
ation and parole departments, under the 
supervision of administrative personnel. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index! 
An opportunity to pursue specific interests 
and topics not usually covered in regular 
courses. Through a program of readings and 
tutorials, the student will have the opportu- 
nity to pursue these interests and topics in 
greater depth than is usually possible in a 
regular course 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 
(See indexl 



THEATRE 



Professor: Falk (Chairperson) 

Assistant Professor: Allen 

Assistant Technical Director: Huffman 

The major consists of eight courses: 
Theatre 100 and seven others; a concen- 
tration in acting, directing, or design is 
possible. In addition to the course 
requirements, majors are expected to 
participate actively in Arena Theatre pro- 
ductions. Majors are urged to include 
courses in art, music, psychology, and 
English, or other areas of special inter- 
est. 

Three minors are available in the 
Theatre department. A minor in Theatre 
History and Literature consists of Thea- 
tre 100. 332, 333, 335, and 400. The 
following courses are required to com- 
plete a minor in Performance: Theatre 
100, 140, 226, 334, 336, and either 332 
or 333. To obtain a minor in Technical 
Theatre, a student must complete Theat- 
re 100. 148, 228, 338, and 420 or 430. 

The fine arts distribution requirement 
may be satisfied by selecting any two of 
the following recommended courses: 
Theatre 100, 1 10, 140, 148, 332, 333 or 
other courses with the consent of the 
instructor. 

100 INTRODUCTION TO THEATRE 

Designed as a comprehensive introduction to 
the aesthetics of theatre . From the spectator' s 
point of view, the nature of theatre will be 
explored, including dramatic literature and 
the integral functioning of acting, directing, 
and all production aspects. 

110 INTRODUCTION TO FILM 

A basic course in understanding the film 
medium. The class will investigate film tech- 
nique through lectures and by viewing regu- 
lar weekly films chosen from classic, 
contemporary, and experimental short films. 

140 INTRODUCTION TO ACTING 

An introductory study of the actor's prepara- 
tion w ith emphasis on developing the actor's 
creative imagination through improvisations 
and scene study. 

148 INTRODUCTION TO 
PLAY PRODUCTION 
Stagecraft and the various other aspects of 



play production are introduced. Through 
material presented in the course and labora- 
tory work on the Arena Theatre stage, the 
student will acquire experience to produce 
theatrical scenery. 

226 INTRODUCTION TO DIRECTING 

An introductory study of the function of the 
director in preparation, rehearsal, and per- 
formance. Emphasis is placed on developing 
the student's ability to analyze scripts, and 
on the development of the student's imagi- 
nation. Prerequisite: Theatre 140. 

228 INTRODUCTION TO SCENE 
DESIGN AND STAGECRAFT 

An introduction to the theatre with an empha- 
sis on stagecraft. Productions each semester 
serve as the laboratory to provide the practi- 
cal experience necessary to understand the 
material presented in the classroom. Prereq- 
uisite: Theatre 148 or consent of instructor . 

231 ADVANCED TECHNIQUES 
OF PLAY PRODUCTION 
A detailed consideration of the interrelated 
problems and techniques of play analysis, 
production styles, and design. Offered sum- 
mer only. 

332 HISTORY OF THEATRE I 

A detailed study of the development of theat- 
re from the Greeks to the Restoration. Alter- 
nate years. 

333 HISTORY OF THEATRE II 

The history of the theatre from 1660. Alter- 
nate years. 

334 INTERMEDIATE STUDIO; ACTING 
Instruction and practice in character analysis 
and projection with emphasis on vocal and body 
techniques. Prerequisite: Theatre 140. 

335 THEORIES OF THE 
MODERN THEATRE 

An advanced course exploring the philoso- 
phical roots of the modem theatre from the 
birth of realism to the present and the influ- 
ences on modem theatre practice Selected 
readings from Nietzsche. Marx. Jung. 
Freud. Whitehead. Kierkegaard. Sartre. 
Camus, Antoine, Copeau. Stanislavski. 
Shaw. Meyerhold, Artaud. Brecht. Brook, 
Grotowski Alternate years. 

336 INTERMEDIATE STUDIO; DIRECTING 

Emphasis is placed on the student's ability to 
function in preparation and rehearsal Practi- 
cal experience involves the directing of two 
one-act plays from the contemporary theatre. 
Prerequisite: Theatre 226. 

337 PLAYWRITING AND 
DRAMATIC CRITICISM 

An investigation of the techniques of play- 
writing with an emphasis on creative writing. 



58 



culminating in a written one-act play, plus an 
historical survey of dramatic criticism from 
Aristotle to the present with emphasis upon 
developing the student's ability to write 
reviews and criticism of theatrical produc- 
tions and films. Alternate years. 

338 INTERMEDIATE STUDIO: 
LIGHTING DESIGN 

The theory of stage and lighting design with 
emphasis on their practical application to the 
theatre. Prerequisite: Theatre !48or consent 
of instructor. 

400 MASTERS OF WORLD DRAMA 

An intensive and detailed analysis of the 
plays and related works, including criticism 
of great authors, that have shaped world 
theatre. Authors to be selected on the basis of 
interest of students and faculty. At times, 
more than one author will be treated in a 
term. Ibsen, Brecht. Moliere. Williams. 
Albee. Alternate years. May be accepted 
toward English major with consent of 
English Department. 

420 ADVANCED STUDIO: 
COSTUME DESIGN 

The theory of costuming for the stage, ele- 
ments of design, planning, production, and 
construction of costumes for the theatre. 
Students will participate in the design of a 
production. Prerequisite: Theatre 148 or 
consent of instructor. 

430 ADVANCED STUDIO: 
PROPERTIES DESIGN 

The theory of properties design for the stage, 
including the production of specific proper- 
ties for staging use. Elements of design, 
fabrication, and the construction of proper- 
ties employing a variety of materials and the 
application of new theatrical technology. 
Prerequisite: Theatre 148 or consent of 
instructor. 

440 ADVANCED STUDIO: ACTING 

Preparation of monologues and two- 
character scenes, contemporary and classi- 
cal. The student will appear in major campus 
productions. Prerequisite: Theatre 334. 

446 ADVANCED STUDIO: DIRECTING 

Emphasis will be placed on the student's 
ability to produce a major three-act play from 
the script to the stage for public performance. 
Prerequisite: Theatre 336. 

448 ADVANCED STUDIO: DESIGN 

Independent work in conceptual and practi- 
cal design. The student will design one full 
production as his major project. Prerequi- 
sites: Theatre 228 or 338 and consent of 
instructor. 



470-479 INTERNSHIP (See index) 

Interns in theatre work off campus in theatres 
such as the Guthrie Theatre. Minneapolis, 
and at the New Jersey Shakespeare Festival. 

N80-N89 INDEPENDENT STUDY 
(See index) 
Some recent independent studies have been 
the roles of women as characters in drama, 
scene design, and lighting design for an 
Arena production. 

490-491 INDEPENDENT STUDY FOR 
DEPARTMENTAL HONORS 

(See index) 
A typical study could be the writing and 
production of an original play. 



WOMEN'S STUDIES 



Professor: Jensen 
(Coordinator) 

Although a major is not available in 
Women's Studies, a minor is possi- 
ble. Courses required for the minor 



follow: 

History 310 — Women in History 
English 334 — Women in Literature 
Psychology 341 — Psychology of 

Women 
Art 339 — Women in Art 

With approval of the coordinator, one 
of the four courses may be satisfied either 
with an independent studies project or 
with a special seminar to be offered on an 
irregular basis by interested faculty. 
Some of the possible options for a special 
seminar are Women in Religion, Women 
in Business. Women in the Professions, 
and Women in Film. Whether the student 
chooses to do the Independent Studies or 
a special seminar, she or he will be 
required to write an extensive research 
paper which will be subject to review by 
the Women's Studies Committee. To 
receive credit for a minor in Women's 
Studies, a student must maintain at least 
a 2.0 average in courses taken for that 
minor. 




59 



Student Services 



ADMINISTRATION 

The program of student services at 
Lycoming is administered by the Office 
of Student Services. It is designed to 
respond to a diversity of student needs. 
Professional staff members are assigned 
the specific responsibilities of: 

— career counseling and place- 
ment; 

— residence life; 

— student activities; 

— religious life; 

— health services; 

— study skills; 

— student orientation; 

— judiciary-student conduct 

All members of the staff are available 
to counsel and advise individual stu- 
dents. 



PERSONAL COUNSELING 

All members of the staff of the Office 
of Student Services are qualified and 
available to provide non-therapeutic 
assistance to students with adjustment 
problems. A part-time clinical psycholo- 
gist provides short-term therapy for stu- 
dents needing assistance. Continuing 
therapy is available through referral to 
public agencies and private clinicians in 
the Williamsport community. Financial 
arrangements for these referral services 
are made directly by the student with the 
agency and/or individual clinician 
involved. 



CAREER DEVELOPMENT 
SERVICES 

The Career Development Center pro- 
vides services which are designed to help 
students identify their abilities and inter- 
ests, set realistic career goals, and plan 
academic programs to meet these goals 
Counseling for Lycoming students 
begins in the freshman year. 

In addition to individual guidance, the 
center maintains a library on specific 
careers, employment outlooks, and 



career trends. Services offered by the 
center include: 

— individual counseling; 

— DISCOVER a computer assisted 
career guidance system provides 
information to students about 
themselves and the world of work; 

- SHARE (Students Having a Real 
Experience), a program in which 
students observe and work with a 
professional in the field: 

— placement services to aid seniors in 
implementing their career plans; 

— assistance to students in securing 
internships, summer employment, 
and part-time employment; 

— speaker's program which brings 
professionals from a variety of 
careers to campus seminars; 

— video-cassette programs relating to 
job skills and career information; 

— microfiche copies of graduate- and 
professional-school catalogs for 
the United States and abroad. 



RESIDENCE AND 
RESIDENCE HALLS 

Single students who do not live at home 
are required to live in residence halls and 
eat in the dining room. All new resident 
students are forwarded a room- 
agreement form to sign after confirma- 
tion of their admission to Lycoming. 
This agreement is renewed each spring. 
Exceptions to the residence policy may 
be granted to those students who wish to 
live with relatives, and students who are 
23 years of age or older. Requests for 
such exemptions must be submitted to 
the Residence Life Office before the first 
day of the term to which the student has 
been admitted. 

Residence students assume responsi- 
bility for their rooms and furnishings. 
The College reserves the right to enter 
and inspect any room for reasons of dam- 
age, health, or safety, and to search any 
room when there is reason to believe a 
violation of College rules or the law is 
occurring or has occurred. Charges are 
assessed for damage to rooms, doors, 
furniture and common areas. Wherever 



possible, damage to dormitory property 
will be charged to the person or persons 
directly responsible. Damage and break- 
age occurring in a room will be the 
responsibility of students occupying the 
room. Hall and bathroom damage will be 
the responsibility of the section where 
damage occurs. 

Residence halls are not available for 
occupancy during the vacation periods. 
Quiet hours for study purposes, which 
are established by residence hall councils 
or the Office of Student Services, are 
published in the student handbook and 
posted on bulletin boards. 

Room visitation by members of the 
opposite sex is permitted in the halls 
under conditions established by the Col- 
lege in cooperation with the various resi- 
dence hall councils, which share respon- 
sibility for developing and monitoring 
regulations, and which are organized 
each fall semester before visitation sche- 
dules are established. 



STUDENT ACTIVITIES 

Student Activities offers assistance 
and advice for all campus programs and 
student organizations. Through the 
efforts of the Campus Activities Board 
(C.A.B.) programming is provided for 
all facets of the student population. The 
newly established Union Governing 
Council (U.G.C.) oversees the function- 
al aspects of the Wertz Student Center 
and works to create an atmosphere which 
best serves the social and recreational 
needs of the students. Student Activities 
is also responsible for Leadership Train- 
ing and the Student Orientation Staff; in 
addition, it provides support and direc- 
tion for student government, the Inter- 
fraternity and Panhellenic Councils and 
the retention program. 



RELIGIOUS LIFE 

The United Campus Ministry, staffed 
by a Protestant Minister and a Roman 
Catholic Priest, provides a wide range of 
activities in support of the religious lives 



60 



of students. Ecumenical and inclusive in 
nature, campus ministry at Lycoming 
provides worship services, service proj- 
ects, social occasions, retreats, study 
opportunities and personal counseling. 
The chaplains live on campus and are 
available to students for a variety of 
situations in which they might need sup- 
port, counsel or direction. 

HEALTH SERVICES 

Normal medical treatment by the 
health service staff at the College is pro- 
vided without cost to the student. During 
the fall and spring semesters, the College 
maintains an outpatient service in Rich 
Hall. It is staffed with a registered nurse 
five days a week from 8:30 a.m. to 4 
p.m. The College physician is available 
from 11 a.m. to 12 noon, Monday 
through Friday. At other times, 
emergency care is available at the 
emergency rooms of Williamsport and 
Divine Providence Hospitals, located a 
short distance from the campus. 

Medical service charges paid by the 
student are: emergency room and 
emergency room physician's charges, 
special medications. X-rays, surgery, 
care for major accidents, immunizations, 
examinations for glasses, physician's 
visits other than in the health service, 
referrals for treatment by specialists, 
special nursing services and special ser- 
vices. 

Entering students must provide basic 
health information to the College 
between the time of admission and the 
beginning of classes of the term to which 
they are admitted. This information is 
secured through participation in the com- 
puterized health-information service 
provided by National Computer Sys- 
tems. New students complete the Inner- 
view College Health Assessment Form 
that is mailed to students shortly after 
they have confirmed their admission to 
Lycoming. The completed form is 
returned by the student to the admis- 
sion's office together with a check for 
SI 3.50. Both the student and the College 
receive reports based on the question- 
naire responses. The student report con- 
sists of a Personal Health Report, and 



health information brochures as 
requested. Information provided by the 
student is confidential and is available 
only to qualified health service and 
student-services personnel. 

All students are required to carry 
accident-sickness medical insurance. 
Pre-paid medical insurance is a require- 
ment for participation in intercollegiate 
athletics. Lycoming College does not 
offer a student plan. 

STUDY SKILLS 
SEMINARS 

The seminars consist of three one-hour 
sessions on scheduling of time, test- 
taking and study methods. They are 
scheduled on demand for six to 20 stu- 
dents. 

STUDENT ORIENTATION 

New students at Lycoming are 
required to attend one of three summer 
orientation sessions with at least one 
parent before they enroll in the fall. The 
purpose of the program is to acquaint 
new students and their parents with the 
College more fully so that new students 
begin their Lycoming experience under 
the most favorable circumstances. Infor- 
mation on orientation is mailed to new 
students after they confirm their admis- 
sion. 

STANDARDS OF CONDUCT 

Lycoming students are expected to 
accept responsibilities required of adults. 
The rights of every member of the Col- 
lege community are protected by estab- 
lished regulations. Although the accep- 
tance of the College's standards of 
behavior is an individual responsibility, 
it also calls for group responsibility. Stu- 
dents should influence their peers to con- 
duct themselves responsibly for the col- 
lective good. 

Students who are unable to demon- 
strate that they have accepted these 
responsibilities or who fail to abide by 
established policies may be dismissed at 
any time or denied readmission for a 
subsequent term or semester. Further. 



after the conclusion of any term or 
semester, the College may deny a student 
the privilege of attending any subsequent 
term or semester when the administration 
deems this to be in the best interest of the 
College. 

Lycoming College does not approve 
of the use or misuse of alcoholic bever- 
ages and encourages students to abstain 
from their use and to abide by the legal 
restrictions on alcohol use established by 
the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania. 
Observance of the law is the individual 
responsibility of each student, and fail- 
ure to obey the law may subject the 
student to prosecution by civil authori- 
ties, either on or off campus. 

Students also are expected to be aware 
of the College's attitude toward the use 
and misuse of alcohol and to acknow- 
ledge the College's right to its position. 
The College will not tolerate any public 
use of alcohol. Officials of the College 
will prescribe penalties for the public use 
or private misuse of alcohol. These 
penalties will be applied in a consistent 
manner. 

Lycoming recognizes its responsibili- 
ty, however, for providing students with 
reliable information about the social and 
medical implications of the use of alco- 
hol. Lycoming makes every effort to 
create and maintain a community in 
which individual choice is coupled with 
responsible behavior and respect for the 
rights of others. 

Upon confirmation of admission, stu- 
dents are given a handbook which con- 
tains the College's official policies, rules 
and regulations. These policies, rules 
and regulations are part of the contractual 
agreement students enter into when they 
register at Lycoming. 



61 



Admission to Lycoming 



POLICY AND STANDARDS 

Lycoming College welcomes applica- 
tions from prospective students regard- 
less of age. sex, race, religion, financial 
resources, color, national or ethnic ori- 
gin, or handicap. Admission is based on 
the following standards: 

— Graduation from an accredited sec- 
ondary school 

— Completion of 16 units of college 
preparatory courses including (4) 
English. (31 Math. (2) Foreign 
Language. (2) Natural Science. (3) 
Social Science and (2) Elective. 
The admissions committee, recog- 
nizing that high school curricula 
vary, is always willing to consider 
the application of an able student 
whose preparation, while differing 
from the plan suggested, neverthe- 
less, gives evidence of continuity 
in the study of fundamental sub- 
jects. 

— Satisfactory College Entrance 
Examination Board Scholastic 
Aptitude Test (SAT) or American 
College Test (ACT) scores. 

Applicants with significant academic 
preparation and exceptional maturity 
may apply to Lycoming as candidates for 
early admission. A recommendation 
from a school counselor is required, indi- 
cating the student's intentions to attend 
Lycoming in lieu of the 12th grade. If 
admitted, the student enters the College 
after completing the junior year in high 
school. 

Students who are not enrolled in a 
degree program and who wish to register 
for courses in any semester are welcome 
to apply. A Special Student Application 
is available for this purpose. 

Lycoming is fully approved for the 
educational program for veterans. 



APPLICATION AND 
SELECTION PROCESS 

For students considering a fall semes- 
ter admission, applications should be 
filed by April I . The application should 



be accompanied by a $20 application fee. 
an official secondary school transcript 
forwarded by the school guidance office. 
and the results of either the Scholastic 
Aptitude Test (SAT) or the American 
College Test (ACT). Applications are 
considered after April 1 on a space- 
available basis. 

The completed application is eval- 
uated individually by identifying each 
applicant's academic achievement, 
talents, qualities, and interests. Lycom- 
ing notifies applicants of their accep- 
tance as soon as possible after all creden- 
tials have been received and evaluated. 
In some instances, additional informa- 
tion may be needed to complete the eval- 
uation. 

Admitted applicants must notify the 
College of their intent to enroll by May 1 . 
the national candidates" reply date. This 
notification must be accompanied by a 
S100 (attendance) deposit for commut- 
ing students, or a $200 (attendance and 
room) deposit for resident students. 
After May 1 . the deposits are not refund- 
able. 



ADVANCED STANDING 
BY TRANSFER 

The College welcomes transfer stu- 
dents from other accredited colleges and 
universities according to the following 
standards and procedures: 

- applicants should be in good 
academic standing and should have 
a cumulative grade point average 
of 2.0 in transferable courses at 
their former institutions; 

— courses that are reasonably com- 
parable to those offered at Lycom- 
ing will be accepted for transfer if 
the grade C or better is earned; 

— grades earned at previous institu- 
tions will not be included in the 
computation of the grade point 
average; 

— each transfer applicant will be 
evaluated individually in relation 
to unsuccessfully attempted course 
credits within our permitted 
24-credit maximum. The number 



of unsuccessful attempts remaining 
will be recorded on the transcript 
evaluation prior to required confir- 
mation; 

— class standing at Lycoming will be 
based on the number of credits 
accepted for transfer; 

— no more than 64 credits can be 
accepted for transfer from a junior 
or community college; 

— tranfer students will be eligible to 
earn appointments to the Dean's 
List, but to be considered for hon- 
ors at commencement at least 64 
credits must be earned at Lycom- 
ing; 

— students will be eligible for class 
rank after completing eight courses 
at Lycoming; 

— official copies of transcripts from 
all institutions attended must be 
submitted as a part of the admis- 
sions application; 

— the residency requirement for a 
degree is eight unit courses or 32 
credits. The final eight units must 
be taken at Lycoming. 



EARLY DECISION 

Lycoming's Early Decision Plan is 
designed for qualified high school 
seniors who have examined their college 
choices thoroughly and have decided that 
Lycoming College is their first choice. 
Candidates for Early Decision may apply 
elsewhere with the understanding that 
other applications will be withdrawn if 
the candidates are accepted at Lycoming. 
It is further understood that students 
select only one college to which they will 
apply as Early Decision applicants. 

Applications for Early Decision may 
be submitted any time until November 1 . 
Candidates will be notified of the Admis- 
sions Committee's decision by Decem- 
ber 1 providing that the credential files 
are complete. 

It is understood that the candidates 
admitted under the Early Decision Plan 
will subsequently enroll at Lycoming 
responding with a deposit by January 1 . 

The Admissions Committee may defer 
candidates for a second review in the 



62 



spring. In such cases, the Committee 
considers additional academic informa- 
tion such as senior year grades and test 
scores. 



ADMISSIONS OFFICE 
LOCATION AND HOURS 

Prospective students and their families 
are encouraged to visit the campus for a 
student-conducted tour and an interview 
with an admissions counseler, who will 
provide additional information about the 
College and answer questions. 

The Admissions Office is located on 
the first floor of Long Hall. For an 
appointment, telephone PA only 
1-800-235-3920; outside PA 
1-800-345-3920 or (717) 321-4026. or 
write Office of Admissions, Lycoming 
College, Williamsport. Pa' 17701. 
Office hours are: 

Weekdays — September through April 
8 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. 

— May through August 
8 a.m. to 4 p.m. 

Saturdays — September through April 
9 a.m. to 12 noon 

— May through August 
No Saturday hours 




63 



Financial Matters 



EXPENSES FOR 

THE ACADEMIC YEAR 1986-87 



ENTRY FEES AND DEPOSITS 



Application Fee — All students for 
admission must submit a $20 application 
fee. This charge defrays the cost of proc- 
essing the application and is nonrefund- 
able. 



The following expenses are effective 

for the regular fall and spring semesters. 

The College reserves the right to adjust 

fees at any time. The fees for each 

semester are payable not later than the . . „, 

„„ j .„„ „/ „i_„„_,, f „ ,u ~ . Admission Deposit — Alter students 

second day ot classes tor the semester. , , .... *, . , . ... 

have been notified ot their admission to 

Lycoming, they are required to make a 

Fees Semester Year $ 100 admissions deposit to confirm their 

Comprehensive $3,690 $7.3X0 intention to matriculate. Students seek- 

Board and Room Rent 1,450 2,900 ing residence must submit an additional 

To,al 5 ' 140 l0 - 280 $100 room-reservation deposit. All 

One-Time Student Fees deposits are applied to the general 

charges for the first semester ot atten- 

Apphcation Fee... ..$20 dance Af M , d j ^ nQm ^ 

Admissions Deposit 100 j r 

Contingency Deposit 100 fundable. 

Room Reservation Deposit 1 00 

Part-Time Student Fees , Contingency Deposit - A con- 

tingency deposit ot $100 is required 

Application Fee $ 20 of aM tu ||_ t j me students as a guaran- 

Each Unit Course $920 e ... . & 

tee tor payment ot damage to or loss 

Additional Charges of College property, for library and 

Applied Music Fee (half-hour per week parking fines, or similar penalties 

per semester 135 imposed by the College. The deposit 

Cap and Gown Rental prevailing cost is collected along with Other charges 

Laboratory Fee per Unit Course 5 to 50 f or t h e initial semester. The balance 

^registration Fee. ■•••••••25 of tnis deposlt ; s refunded after all 

Parking Permit (for the academic vearl 10 to 15 , , . _ ., , 

Parking Permit with Reserved Space debts to tne College have been paid. 

(for the academic year) 15 to 35 either upon graduation or upon writ- 
Practice Teaching Fee (Payable in ten request submitted to the Registrar 

Junior Year) 240 , wo weg^s p r jor to voluntary perma- 

R.O.T.C. Basic Course Deposit . . - r .. c .\ r 

(Payable at Bucknell University) 60 nent termination of enrollment at 

R.O.T.C. Advanced Course Deposit Lycoming College. 

(Payable at Bucknell University) 60 

Transcript Fee (No charge to PARTIAL PAYMENTS 

(full-lime students) 3 

Medical Questionnaire Fee (Payable to 

Medical Datamation, Inc.) prevailing cost For the convenience of those who find 

it impossible to follow the regular sched- 

The comprehensive fee covers the reg- ule of payments, arrangements may be 

ular course load of three to four courses made with the College Treasurer for the 

each semester. Resident students must monthly payment of College fees 

board at the College unless, for extraor- through various educational plans, 

dinary reasons, authorization is extended Additional information concerning par- 

for other eating arrangements. If a dou- tial payments may be obtained from the 

ble room is used as a single room, there is Treasurer or Director of Admissions. 
an additional charge of $290 per semes- 
ter. The estimated cost for books and 

supplies is up to $300 per year, depend- REFUNDS FOR STUDENTS 

ing on the course of study. Special ses- WHO WITHDRAW 
sion (May term and summer term) 

charges for tuition, room, and board are Refunds of tuition and board are made 

established during the fall semester. to students who voluntarily and officially 



withdraw from the College while in good 
standing according to the following 
schedule for the fall and spring semesters 
and the comparable period for the May 
and summer terms: 

Refund Charge 
Period of Withdrawal % % 

During the first week 

of the semester 80 20 

During the second and 

third week 60 40 

During the fourth and 

fifth week 40 60 

During the sixth and 

seventh week 20 80 

After seven weeks 100 



The date on which the Dean of the 
College approves the student's with- 
drawal form is considered the official 
date of withdrawal. Charges are levied 
after withdrawal for services provided. 

Lycoming scholarships and grants are 
applied during the fall and spring semes- 
ters on the same basis as tuition charges. 
If a withdrawing student is charged 60% 
tuition, he/she will receive 60% of the 
scholarship or grant. Government finan- 
cial aid is adjusted according to federal 
and state guidelines. 

Room charges which are established 
on a semester basis, and special charges. 
such as laboratory fees, are not refund- 
able if a student leaves the College prior 
to the end of the semester. 

Full-time students who after reducing 
their loads continue to be enrolled for 12 
or more semester hours are not eligible 
for a refund of tuition for an individual 
course. Similarly, students who register 
for extra hours in excess of 16 hours per 
semester and who later reduce their loads 
are not eligible after the fifth day of the 
semester for a refund of the fee charged 
for overloads. Charges will be recalcu- 
lated for students who enroll full time 
and subsequently assume part-time sta- 
tus by reducing their loads below 12 
hours during the drop-add period. The 
assumption tit a part-time status normal- 
I) involves a substantial reduction of 
financial aid since most financial aid 
programs do not extend eligibility to 
part-time students. 



64 



NON-PAYMENT OF 
FEES PENALTY 

Students will not be registered for 
courses in a new semester if their 
accounts for previous attendance have 
not been settled. Diplomas, transcripts, 
and certifications of withdrawals in good 
standing are issued only when a satisfac- 
tory settlement of all financial obliga- 
tions has been made in the Business 
Office. 



FINANCIAL AID 



POLICY AND PROCEDURES 

The dominant factor in determining 
the amount of financial aid awarded to 
individual students is the establishment 
of need. Scholarships may be awarded 
on the basis of financial need and 
academic ability, while grants are pro- 
vided on the basis of financial need. 
Long-term, low-cost educational loans 
are available from federal and state sour- 
ces to most students who can demon- 
strate need. Part-time employment is 
available to students. 

To apply for financial assistance, 
obtain Lycoming's Financial Aid Appli- 
cation (FAA) from the Financial Aid 
Office and the CSS Financial Aid Form 
(FAF) and your State Grant Application 
from your secondary school Guidance 
Office or Lycoming's Financial Aid 
Office. Submit the FAA to Lycoming 
and the completed FAF to the College 
Scholarship Service. Box 2700. Prince- 
ton. NJ 08541 . as early as possible after 
January 1. Renewal applications are 
required annually. 



SCHOLARSHIPS AND GRANTS 

\ ali-dict orian Sal ut at oi ian Schol- 
arship is a $2,400 award honoring grad- 
uates of private and public secondary 
schools who rank either first or second in 
their graduating class as certified by their 
guidance counselor. These awards are 
based upon academic achievement and 



are not contingent upon demonstrated 
financial need. Renewal cumulative 
average is 3.00. 

Lycoming Recognition Scholarships 
for $700 to $ 1 .000 per year are awarded 
to freshmen who have superior academic 
qualifications, have filed the FAF but did 
not demonstrate financial need as deter- 
mined by the College Scholarship Ser- 
vice and were not eligible for another 
Lycoming scholarship program. This 
scholarship is renewable if the recipient 
maintains a 3.25 cumulative average. 

Lycoming Directors' Scholarships 
of $400 to full tuition, depending upon 
financial need, are awarded to students in 
the top fifth of their secondary school 
class with CEEB scores totaling 1 100 or 
more. Renewal cumulative average is 
3.00. 

President's Fellowships in Music are 
awarded annually to students who are 
skilled in singing or in playing the piano 
and wish to continue performing, 
whether or not they intend to become 
music majors. To be eligible for consid- 
eration, a candidate must apply and be 
accepted by Lycoming College and 
audition with the Music Department. 
The amount of each fellowship is $250 
per semester, renewable to a maximum 
of $2,000 per student. The primary 
responsibility of each Fellow is musical 
performance as assigned by the Music 
Department. Singing in a chamber choir, 
accompanying in a voice studio, playing 
for chapel services, or rehearsing a musi- 
cal comedy are typical opportunities. 

Lycoming Grant-in-Aid awards of 
$400 to full tuition, depending upon 
financial need, are made to full-time 
students who do not qualify for scholar- 
ships and who have demonstrated finan- 
cial need and the prospect of contributing 
positively to the College community. 
Renewal requires continued financial 
need and satisfactory citizenship stan- 
dards. 

Ministerial Grants are awarded to 
dependent children of United Methodist 
ministers and practicing ordained minis- 
ters of other denominations. The grants 
amount to one-third of tuition for chil- 
dren of United Methodist Ministers in the 
Central Pennsylvania Annual Confer- 



ence and one-fourth of tuition for all 
others. If a student completes the FAF, 
this grant will be part of the total aid 
award. 

Pre-Ministerial Student Grants of 
one-fourth of tuition are awarded to stu- 
dents preparing for the Christian ministry 
who are enrolled full time and demon- 
strate financial need. Students must com- 
plete the pre-ministerial application 
available through the Financial Aid 
Office. 

Women of Lycoming Scholarship is 
an award available to a currently enrolled 
female member of the juniorclass having 
completed 80 credit hours with at least a 
3.0 cumulative average and who demon- 
strates financial need of at least the regu- 
lar tuition rate. Applications are avail- 
able in the Financial Aid Office in 
February and are due in March. The 
award is normally $500 and is based on 
current earnings of the scholarship 
endowment. 

Two-in-Family Grants are awarded 
to each member of a family attending 
Lycoming College at the same time. The 
amount is 10% of tuition, room, and/or 
board paid. Each member must be 
enrolled full time and not eligible for any 
other financial aid program of the Col- 
lege. If a student is eligible for other 
Lycoming aid, the student would receive 
whichever is greater. 

United Methodist Scholarships are 
awarded to applicants who are in the top 
one-third of their class, active in Chris- 
tian activities, and have demonstrated 
financial need. The awards are normally 
$500 per year and the funds are provided 
by the United Methodist Church. Annual 
application is required. The student must 
complete and file the FAF and the schol- 
arship forms which are available in the 
Financial Aid Office. 

Wyoming Conference Scholarship 
of $500 is granted by Lycoming to a 
student chosen by the Scholarship Com- 
mittee of the Wyoming Conference. 
These scholarships are renewable for 
three additional years. Good academic 
performance and service to the church 
are the criteria for this award. 

C. Luther Culler Scholarship for 
$500 is available based on scholarship. 



65 



Dewitt-Bodine Scholarships are 

awarded to the highest-ranked student in 
the graduating class each year from 
Hughesville High School who attends 
Lycoming College. The recipient is 
designated by the Hughesville guidance 
director. The scholarship amount is 
$2,200 and is credited at $550 per year 
over four years of attendance at Lycom- 
ing. If the student is in a three-year pro- 
gram (such as Med-Tech). the student 
will receive the award divided equally 
over the three years of attendance at 
Lycoming. 

Robert I. Hamilton Award is avail- 
able in the amount of $600. 

Morgan V. Knapp Endowed Music 
Scholarship Fund is awarded in the 
ratio of 759c of the fund to financially 
needy students, in satisfactory academic 
standing, who are majoring in music or 
who are pursuing courses in vocal music, 
piano or strings, in that priority order. 
Twenty-five percent of the fund is 
awarded as needed, on the recommenda- 
tion of the Music Department Faculty, to 
students, who in their opinion should be 
encouraged to study privately in the areas 
of voice, piano, or strings, in that priority 
order. 

Clara Kramer Eaton Scholarships 
are awarded to the highest-ranked stu- 
dent in the graduating class each year 
from Line Mountain High School who 
attends Lycoming College. The recipient 
is designated by the high school's guid- 
ance office. The scholarship is $400 per 
year for up to four years' attendance at 
Lycoming. 

Esther M. Heefer Scholarship of 
$1,650 is available to help needy and 
deserving students. 

Edward P. Heether Scholarship 
Fund is available to help needy and 
deserving students, who are in good 
academic standing 

James A. Heether Scholarship for 
$300 is available based on financial 
need. Priority will be given to a chemis- 
try major. 

George W. Huntley, Jr. Scholar- 
ship for $900 is available to help defray 
the tuition and expenses for the first year 
only of any graduate of Cameron County 
High School (formerly Emporium High 



School). The selection is made by the 
superintendent of schools. 

Doris I i mm Scholarship of $1,800 
is available to help dedicated young stu- 
dents preparing for church work in need 
of financial assistance. 

Earl Nearhoof Memorial Scholar- 
ship of $800 is available to assist young 
students entering Christian work with 
preference given to students from the 
Warriors Mark and Tyrone. PA areas. 

Robert F. Rich Scholarship is 
awarded periodically to an academically 
outstanding student from Central Penn- 
sylvania. The award varies from $200 to 
$1,200 depending upon the available 
scholarship endowment income. Prefer- 
ence is given to a resident of the Wool- 
rich area and children of the employees 
of the Woolrich Company. 

Leonard H. Rothermel Fund pro- 
vides $1,500 in financial aid to needy 
students, who are in satisfactory 
academic standing with primary prefer- 
ence given to Trevorton residents and 
second preference given to Line Moun- 
tain School District area residents. 

Mary Landon Russell Applied 
Music Fund — Established in recogni- 
tion of her outstanding service to 
Lycoming College by alumni and friends 
during a special Homecoming celebra- 
tion in 1985, this endowed fund provides 
financial assistance to qualified, talented 
students who seek advanced training in 
music. 

Samuel Willard Memorial Scholar- 
ships are awarded to a junior or senior 
student at Lycoming who is in need of 
financial assistance to complete his/her 
degree. Preference is given to a religion 
major. The award varies between $300 
and $700 depending upon available 
scholarship endowment income. 



FEDERAL AID 

Pell Grant — This federal grant pro- 
vides up to $2, 100 per year for full-time 
students who can demonstrate financial 
need. Application can be made when 
submitting the Financial Aid Form 
(FAF). the PHEAA State Grant Appli- 
cation, or b\ separate federal application 



on forms which are available in secon- 
dary school guidance offices or the 
Financial Aid Office at Lycoming. All 
students are urged to apply for this pro- 
gram. 

Supplemental Educational Oppor- 
tunity Grants (SEOG) — This federal 
government program provides additional 
assistance to those students with finan- 
cial need. Awards can be made in 
amounts ranging from $200 to $2,000 
and are usually based entirely on excep- 
tional financial need. Renewal is possi- 
ble if the applicant has no reduction in 
financial need in succeeding years. 

National Direct Student Loan 
(NDSL) — This federal five percent 
interest loan permits a total of $6,000 to 
be borrowed by the undergraduate stu- 
dent at a rate not to exceed $3,000 the 
first two years. Repayment does not 
begin until 6 months after graduation or 
withdrawal from college. Loans are nor- 
mally renewed annually if the applicant 
results are received by May 1 and the 
applicant continues to demonstrate 
financial need. 

Federal College Work Study Grants 
(CWSP) — An opportunity is provided 
through this program for students to earn 
part of their college expenses and to gain 
some practical experience by working on 
campus. Federal government financial- 
need guidelines must be met to be eligi- 
ble for this program. Students who do not 
meet these guidelines should consult 
with the Career Development Center or 
Financial Aid Office for other employ- 
ment opportunities. 



STATE GRANTS 

State Grants — All applicants for 
financial aid are urged to investigate pro- 
grams sponsored by their home states 
and to learn about and heed application 
deadlines. Pennsylvania students should 
apply for a PHEAA State Grant before 
April 30. The PHEAA State Grant pro- 
vides up to $1,500 to eligible Pennsylva- 
nia residents who are in need of financial 
aid. Residents of other states may be 
eligible for grant assistance through their 
states. A few of these states are Dela- 



66 



ware, Maryland. Ohio, Rhode Island, 
and West Virginia. Applications should 
be available through your high school 
guidance office. 

Scholars in Education Awards 
(SEA) were developed by PHEAA to 
help remedy the need for teachers of 
science and math in Pennsylvania secon- 
dary schools. If you are a highly quali- 
fied high school senior who wishes to 
teach math or science as a career, and if 
you meet the qualifications set by 
PHEAA, you could receive an award of 
50% of your annual tuition. You must 
agree to teach math or science in a Penn- 
sylvania secondary school if you accept 
the award, and, if you fail to keep this 
commitment, repay the grant as a loan 
plus interest. Check with your high 
school guidance counselor. 



LOANS 

State Guaranteed Loans — Most 
states, including Pennsylvania, New 
Jersey, and New York, provide state 
guaranteed loans through local banks and 
lending institutions. This program pro- 
vides 8 percent interest loans of up to 
$2 ,500 per academic level for education- 
al expenses with repayment extended 
over a long-term schedule. Applicants 
should consult local banks early in their 
senior year. 

PLUS Loans — PLUS Loans are 
meant to provide additional funds for 
educational expenses. The interest rate is 
12 percent. Parents of dependent under- 
graduate students may borrow up to 
$3,000 per year. Independent undergrad- 
uates may borrow up to $2,500 per year; 
however, for independent students, the 
PLUS loan, combined with any GSL the 
undergraduate may have for that level, 
cannot exceed $2,500. Applications and 
information are available from your bank 
or other lending institution. 

PHEAA HELP Loans are made 
available to families who cannot borrow 
sufficient funds through Guaranteed Stu- 
dent Loan (GSL). Loans range from 
$1,500 to $10,000. Pennsylvania resi- 
dents and students from other states 
attending a PA college are eligible to 



apply. For PA residents consideration is 
automatically given when you file a 
PHEAA GSL application. Out-of-state 
students should contact the Financial Aid 
Office for application information. 



OTHER SOURCES OF AID 

Community Scholarships — In 

many communities, foundations, organi- 
zations, and in some cases high schools 
provide funds for worthy students. 
Applicants should consult with their 
guidance counselor or principal. 

Education Financing Plans — The 
Business Office at Lycoming provides 
information about plans which enable 
parents to pay College expenses on a 
monthly basis through selected compa- 
nies. 

Pennsylvania National Guard — 
Students participating in this program 
may be eligible for scholarship, credit 
programs, educational bonus, or loan 
repayment. Contact a Guard Unit in your 
area for more information. 

Reserve Officers Training Corps 



(ROTC) Scholarships — Students who 
participate in Army ROTC are eligible 
for three-, two-, and one-year ROTC 
scholarships to finance tuition, books, 
laboratory fees, and other charges, with 
the exception of room and board. ROTC 
Scholarship students also receive $100 
per month during the academic year. 

Reserve Officers Training Corps 
(ROTC) Stipends — Students who par- 
ticipate in the Army ROTC program 
receive an annual stipend of SI .000 dur- 
ing their junior and senior years. They 
also receive half of a second lieutenant's 
pay plus travel expenses for a six-week 
advanced summer camp between junior 
and senior years. 

Tuition Exchange Grants — 
Lycoming College is a member of both 
the Tuition Exchange Program and the 
CIC Tuition Exchange Program. These 
programs are for dependent students of 
employees at participating institutions of 
higher education. You should contact the 
Tuition Exchange Officer at your host 
institution for information regarding 
sponsorship. 




67 



The Campus 



Eighteen buildings sit (in Lycoming's 
20-acre main campus. Most buildings 
have been constructed since 1950. even 
though Lycoming — one of America's 
50 oldest colleges and universities - 
dates back to IS 1 2. All buildings are 
easj to reach from an) where on campus. 
A 12-acre athletic field and football sta- 
dium lie a few blocks north of the main 
campus. 

Modern buildings include the eight 
residence halls, which contain clean and 
comfortable single and double rooms; 
the library: the student union; and the 
physical education/recreation center. 
L'p-to-date facilities include the theatre, 
the planetarium, the computer center, an 
electronic-music studio, a photography 
laboratory, and an art gallery. The com- 
puter center opened in 1969; the art gal- 
lery and physical education center 
opened in 1 980. An arts center was reno- 
vated and opened in 1983. 



RESIDENTIAL 

Asbury Hall (1962) — Sleeps 154 stu- 
dents. Named in honor of Bishop Francis 
Asbury. the father of The United 
Methodist Church in America, who 
made the circuit through the upper Sus- 
quehanna District in 1812. the year 
Lycoming (then the Williamsport 
Academy) opened its doors. 
Crever Hall (1962) — Sleeps 126 stu- 
dents in two-room suites with bath. Hon- 
ors Lycoming's founder and first finan- 
cial agent, the Rev Benjamin H. Crever. 
who helped persuade the Baltimore Con- 
ference to purchase the school from the 
Williamsport Town Council in 1848. 
East Hall (1962) — Houses most of the 
chapters of Lycoming's national frater- 
nities and other students. The self- 
contained fraternity units each contain 
rooms, a lounge, and a chapter room. All 
students share a large social area. 
Forrest Hall (1968) — Sleeps 92 stu- 
dents m two-room suites with bath. Hon- 
ors Dr. and Mrs. Fletcher Bliss Forrest 
and Anna Forrest Burfiendt '30, the 
parents and sister of Katherine Forrest 
Mathers '28, whose generosity estab- 
lished the memorial. 



Rich Hall (1948) — Sleeps 105 students 
in two-room suites with bath. Honors the 
Rich family of Woolrich. Pennsylvania. 
Houses the health service and the Sara J. 
Walter Lounge for commuting students. 
The Writing Center opened in January. 
1986. and is located in the North Lounge 
on the First Floor. It is manned by peer 
tutors and professional staff during 
specified hours on Sunday through Fri- 
day. 

Skeath Hall (1965) — The largest resi- 
dence hall, it sleeps 212 students. Hon- 
ors the late J. Milton Skeath, professor of 
psychology and four-time Dean of the 
College from 1921 to 1967. 
Wesley Hall (1956) — Sleeps 144 stu- 
dents. Honors John Wesley, the founder 
of Methodism. 

Williams Hall (1965) — Sleeps 146 stu- 
dents in two-room suites with bath. Hon- 
ors Mary Ellen Whitehead Williams, 
mother of Joseph A. Williams, of St. 
Marys, Pennsylvania, whose bequest 
established the memorial. 



ACADEMIC 

Academic Center (1968) — Probably the 
most architecturally impressive building 
on campus, the center actually is com- 
posed of four buildings: the library. 
Wendle Hall, the Arena Theatre and 
laboratories, and the faculty office 
building. 

Library: Contains more than 150.000 
volumes and up to 1 ,000 periodical 
titles, the Art Gallery, the computer 
center, a nursing skills laboratory, 
and a comfortable lounge that is uti- 
lized for study and special events. It 
can accommodate 700 students, and 
serves as a federal repository. 
Art Gallery (1980:) Located in the 
northwest corner of the first floor of 
the library, the gallery contains 
exhibits year-round, including shows 
of student work. 

Computer Center ( 1969): Located in 
the lower level of the east wing of the 
Academic Center, the center houses a 
PRIME 9750 computer which will be 
replacing the DEC PDP11/70 by 



December, 1986. The 9750 has two 
300 megabyte disk drives and 8 mega- 
bytes of main memory. In addition, 
seven IBM compatible PC's and an 
Apple II PC are available. The 
PRIME is being used for both admini- 
strative data processing and in support 
of the instructional program. 

The computer graphics center pro- 
vides the IBC Ensign Computer for 
students majoring in computer sci- 
ence and for those taking graphics 
courses. It has 32 ports for terminals 
and printers. 2 megabytes of memory, 
and two 85 megabyte disk drives. 
Available for student use are eight 
color graphic terminals by Intecolor. 
a high resolution color graphic dis- 
play by AED, two black and white 
and one color graphic printers. 
Nursing Skills Laboratory (1983): 
Located in the lower level of the 
library, it is a replica of a modern 
hospital ward, complete with 10 
simulated work stations, a nurses' 
station, and all the medical equipment 
used by nurses. 

Wendle Hall: Contains 21 class- 
rooms, the psychology laboratories, a 
computer terminal laboratory with 20 
terminals available for use at present 
with an expansion capability of 20 
more, and spacious Pennington 
Lounge, an informal meeting place 
for students and faculty. 
Arena Theatre and Laboratories: 
The 204-seat thrust-stage theatre is 
one of the finest in the region. It 
includes projection facilities, scene 
and costume shops, a make-up room, 
and a multiple-use area known as the 
Down Stage, where one-act experi- 
mental plays are performed. The lan- 
guage, business, mathematics, and 
physics laboratories are situated on 
the upper floors. The Detwiler Plane- 
tarium is located on the ground floor. 
Faculty Office Building: Contains 
faculty offices, seminar rooms, and a 
735-seat lecture hall. 

Fine Arts Center (1923, renovated 

1983) — Contains studios, sculpture 
foundry, woodshop. printmaking shop, 
classrooms, lecture hall, offices. 



68 



Photographic Laboratory (1984): 
Located in the lower level of the Fine 
Arts Center, it contains all the mate- 
rials and equipment of any commer- 
cial laboratory. 

Science Building (1957) — Includes the 
biology and chemistry laboratories, 
classrooms, faculty offices, a lecture 
hall, and a greenhouse. 
Clarke Building (1939) -- Includes 
recital hall, music classrooms, practice 
studios, an electronic-music studio, 
faculty offices, two chapels, and the 
United Campus Ministry Center. 

ADMINISTRATION 

John W. Long Hall (1951) — Opened 

originally as the library, it now houses 
the administrative offices, including 
those for the president, dean, treasurer, 
registrar, admissions, alumni affairs, 
public relations, institutional advance- 
ment, career development, publications, 
and financial aid. It includes a reception 
area, central communications, and the 
printing and bulk mail office. 

RECREATION 

Physical Education and Recreation 
Center (1980) — Includes the George R. 
Lamade Gymnasium, which contains 
basketball and other courts; a six-lane 
swimming pool; all-purpose room; sauna 
and steam room; weight room; offices; 
classrooms, and Alumni Lounge. 
Wertz Student Center (1959)"-- Con- 
tains the main and private dining rooms, 
Burchfield Lounge, a recreation area, 
game rooms, music room, theatre, cafe 
with stage, bookstore, post office, stu- 
dent organization offices, and FM radio 
station. Honors Bishop D. Frederick 
Wertz, president of Lycoming from 1 955 
to 1968. 

RELIGIOUS 

Clarke Building (1939) — Lycoming's 
landmark, the building contains Clarke 
Chapel, St. John Neumann Chapel, the 
United Campus Ministry Center, and 
music department studios and offices. 




Academic Calendar: 1986-87 



Fall Semester 

Bills are due August 2 1 

Orientation of new faculty August 22 

Residence halls open August 24 

Faculty available for advising August 25 

Classes begin first period August 26 

Processing of drop/add begins August 26 

Re-registration fee of $25 applies after this date September 1 

Last day for drop/add September 1 

Last day to elect audit and satisfactory/unsatisfactory grades September 1 

Last day for submission of final grades for courses for which Incomplete grades 

were recorded in Spring. May. and summer terms October 6 

Last day for submission of final grades for courses for which Incomplete grades 

were recorded in fall semester 

Mid-semester deficiency reports for freshmen due in Registrar's Office at noon October 13 

Residence halls close at 9 p.m. for spring recess 

Residence halls open at noon after spring recess 

Classes resume first period after spring recess 

Preregistration for students who have completed at least one semester October 28-30 

Preregistration for sophomores and juniors 

Preregistration for freshmen November 7-8 

Last day to withdraw from courses with W, WP, WF grades November 17 

Residence halls close at 10 a.m. for Thanksgiving recess November 26 

Residence halls open at noon after Thanksgiving November 30 

Classes resume first period after Thanksgiving December 1 

Final examinations begin December 8 

Semester ends at 5 p.m December 12 

Residence halls close at 9 p.m December 12 

May term 

Residence halls open May 3 

Classes begin May 4 

Last day for drop/ add May 5 

Last day to elect audit and satisfactory/unsatisfactory grades May 5 

Last day to withdraw from courses with W, WP. WF grades May 22 

Term ends May 29 

Residence halls close at 4 p.m May 29 



Spring semester 
January 1 

January 4 

January 5 
January 5 
January 9 
January 9 
January 9 



February 1 3 
February 20 
February 27 
March 8 
March 9 

March 25. 26 
March 3 1 -April 
April 3 



April 20 
April 24 
April 24 
Summer term 
May 3 1 
June I 
June 3 
June 3 
June 26 
July 10 
July 10 



Special dates to remember: 

Freshman convocation August 26 

All-College picnic August 30 

Labor Day (classes in session) September I 

Homecoming Weekend October 3-5 

Long weekend (classes suspended) October 10 

Parents Weekend October 24-26 

Admissions Open House November 15 

Thanksgiving recess November 26-30 

Spring recess February 27-March 8 

Honors Day April 7 

Good Friday (afternoon classes suspended) April 17 

Baccalaureate May 3 

Commencement May 3 

Memorial Day (no classes) May 25 

Independence Day (no classes) July 4 



70 



Directory 



BOARD OF TRUSTEES 

Officers 

Harold H. Shreckengast. Jr Chairman 

Nathan W. Stuart, J.D Vice Chairman 

Paul G. Gil more Secretary 

William L. Baker Treasurer 

W. Gibbs McKenney, LL.D., L.H.D Chairman Emeritus 

Fred A. Pennington. LL.D Chairman Emeritus 

Honorary Trustees 

Bishop Hermann W. Kaebnick. D.D.. L.H.D.. LL.D Hershey 

Ralph E. Kelchner Jersey Shore 

Arnold A. Phipps. II Williamsport 

George L. Stearns. II Williamsport 

W. Russell Zacharias Allentown 

Trustees 
Elected Term expires 1987 
1984 Hon. Robert W. Edgar. LL.D. (Alumni Representative) Glen Riddle 

1969 Samuel H. Evert Bloomsburg 

1972 The Rev. Brian A. Fetterman Harrisburg 

1978 Harold D. Hershberger. Jr Williamsport 

1978 John C. Lundy Williamsport 

1984 D. Stephen Martz Duncansville 

1981 William Pickelner Williamsport 

1978 John Y. Schreyer Little Falls, NJ 

1985 Robert L. Shangraw Williamsport 

1972 Harold H. Shreckengast. Jr Jenkintown 

Elected Term expires 1988 

1979 David Y. Brouse Salem. MA 

1951 Paul G. Gilmore Williamsport 

1985 Seth D. Keller (Alumni Representative) Williamsport 

1982 Margaret D. L'Heureux Williamsport 

1973 Robert G. Little. M.D Harrisburg 

1964 W. Gibbs McKenney. LL.D., L.H.D Baltimore. MD 

1973 G. Jackson Miller Altoona 

1958 Fred A. Pennington. LL.D Mechanicsburg 

1 982 Marguerite G.Rich Woolrich 

1961 The Rev. Wallace F. Stealer. HH.D Kingston 

1982 The Rev. Stratford C. Taylor Montoursville 

Elected Term expires 1989 

1986 Harold D. Chapman Williamsport 

1986 Richard H. Confair Williamsport 

1980 Richard W. DeWald Montoursville 

1974 Daniel G. Fultz Pittsford. NY 

1970 John E. Person, Jr Williamsport 

1983 Mary R. Schweikle. M.C. (Alumni Representative) Montoursville 

1972 Donald E. Shearer, M.D Montoursville 

1983 Hon. Clinton W. Smith Williamsport 

1961 Nathan W. Stuart. J.D Williamsport 

1971 Willis W. Willard. III. M.D Hershev 



71 



ADMINISTRATIVE STAFF 






THOMAS J. HENNINGER (1966) 




Director of Computer Services 


FREDERICK E. BLUMER (1976) 


5.5.. Wake Forest College; 


President 


M.A.. University of Kansas 


B.A.. Mill saps College; 


MARY E. HERRING (1978) 


B.D.. Ph.D., Emory University 


Director of Admissions 


SHIRLEY A. VAN MARTER (1979) 


B.A.. Albright College 


Dean of the College 


RICHARD A. HUGHES ( 1970) 


B.A.. Mundelein College; 


Chaplain of the College 


M.A.. Northwestern University; 


B.A.. Indiana Central College; 


M.A.. Ph.D.. University of Chicago 


5. 7~.fi., Ph.D.. Boston University 


WILLIAM L. BAKER (1965) 


BRUCE M. HURLBERT ( 1982) 


Treasurer 


Director of Library Services 


B.S. . Lycoming College 


B.A.. The Citadel; 


JACK C. BUCKLE (1957) 


M.S.L.S.. Florida Stale University 


Dean of Student Services 


HAROLD H. HUTSON ( 1969) 


A.B., Juniata College; M.S.. 


President Emeritus 


Syracuse University 


B.A.. LL.D.. Wofford College: 


J. BARTON MEYER (1984) 


B.D.. Duke University; 


Executive Director for College Advancement 


Ph.D.. University of Chicago; 


B.A.. Ohio Northern University; 


L.H.D.. Ohio Wesleyan University 


M.S.. University of Dayton 


JOHN G. LAMADE (1983) 


BETTY S. BECK (1965) 


Assistant Director of Admissions 


Bookstore Manager 


B.A.. Susquehanna University 


DALE V. BOWER (1968) 


MARK N. LEVINE (1985) 


Director of Planned Giving 


Director of Public Relations 


6.5. . Lycoming College; 


B.A.. The American University; 


B.D. United Theological Seminary 


M.S. J.. Northwestern University 


GEORGE W. BRELSFORD ( 1982) 


MARIE J. LINDHORST(1984) 


Assistant to the Dean of Student Services 


Campus Minister 


B.S. . Davis & Elkins College 


A.B.. Vassar College; 


RITA A. CIURLIN0(I984) 


M.Div.. Yale Divinity School 


Admissions Counselor 


THOMAS A. LOMAURO (1986) 


A.B.. Lycoming College 


Director of Residence Hall Governance and 


ROBERT L. CURRY (1969) 


Fraternal Affairs and Director of Summer Conferences 


Assistant Director of Athletics 


B.A.. William Palerson College 


A.B., Lycoming College 


M.A.. William Paterson College 


JOANNE B. DAY (1981) 


CHRISTINA E. MacGILL (1985) 


Associate Dean of Student Services 


Assistant Director of Alumni and Parent Relations 


B.A.. M.Ed.. Western Maryland College 


A.B.. Lycoming College 


ROBERT L EDDINGER (1967) 


M.S.. Bucknell University 


Director of Buildings & Grounds 


CHRISTINE A. MacKENZIE (1982) 


GARY W. GATES (1985) 


Director of Student Activities 


Assistant Dean for Campus Life 


A.B.. Lycoming College 


B.S. . M.A.. Indiana University 


RALPH F. MILLER (IMS5) 


of Pennsylvania 


Director of Administrative Services 


FRANK L. GIRARD1 (1984) 


BETTY J. PARIS (1963) 


Director of Athletics 


Registrar 


B.S.. West Chester Stale College 


/4.fi.. Lycoming College 


DANIEL J. HARTSOCK (1986) 


JULIANN T. PAWLAK (1979) 


Director of Writing Center 


Director of Financial Aid 


B.A., The Pennsylvania State University 


A.B.. Lycoming College; 


M.A.. Indiana University of Pennsylvania 


M.A.. Bucknell University 



72 



JEFFREY L. RICHARDS (1982) 

Controller and Assistant Treasurer 

A.B., Lycoming College 
KIMBERLY L. ROCKEY (1985) 

Assistant Director of Women's Athletics 

B.S., Taylor University 

M.S., Indiana University 
DEBORAH E. WEAVER (1978) 

Administrative Assistant for Residence Life 
MOLLY S. WENTZ0985) 

Assistant Director of Public Relations for Publications 

A.B., Lycoming College 
RALPH E. ZEIGLER. JR. (1980) 

Director of Alumni and Parent Relations 

A.B.. Lycoming College; 

M.A.. The Pennsylvania State University 
GAIL M. ZIMMERMAN (1984) 

Director of Prospect Research 

B.S., SUNY at Cortland 
JEROME M. ZUFELT (1984) 

Assistant Director of Public Relations 

B.S.. Boston Universitx 



FACULTY 

EMERITI 

MABEL K. BAUER 

Professor Emeritus of Chemistry 

B.S.. Cornell University; 

M.S.. University of Pennsylvania 
LEROY F. DERR 

Professor Emeritus of Education 

A.B., Ursinus College; M.A., Bucknell University; 

Ed.D.. University of Pittsburgh 
ROBERT H. EWING 

Professor Emeritus of History 

A.B., College of Wooster; M. A.. Universin 

of Michigan; HH.D.. Lycoming College 
JOHN P. GRAHAM 

Professor Emeritus of English 

Ph.B.. Dickinson College; 

M.Ed.. The Pennsylvania State University 
HAROLD W. HAYDEN 

Librarian Emeritus and Professor Emeritus 
of Library Services 

A.B.. Nebraska State Teachers College: 6.5. . University 

of Illinois; M. A. in L.S.. University of Michigan 
GEORGE W. HOWE 

Professor Emeritus of Geology 

A.B.. M.S.. Syracuse University; 

Ph.D.. Cornell Universin 



M. RAYMOND JAMISON 

Assistant Professor Emeritus of Physics 

B.S.. Ursinus College; M.S.. Bucknell Universin 
GERTRUDE B. MADDEN 

Associate Professor Emeritus of English 

A.B.. University of Pennsylvania; 

M.A., Bucknell University 
WALTER G. McIVER 

Professor Emeritus of Music 

Mus.B.. Westminster Choir College; A. B.. Bucknell 

Universin; M.A., New York Universin 
ROBERT W. RABOLD 

Professor Emeritus of Economics 

B.A., The Pennsylvania State University; 

M.A.. Ph.D.. University of Pittsburgh 
MARY LANDON RUSSELL 

Associate Professor Emeritus of Music 

Mus. B.. Susquehanna Universin Conservatory of 

Music: M.A.. The Pennsylvania State Universin 
LOUISE R. SCHAEFFER 

Associate Professor Emeritus of Education 

A.B.. Lycoming College; M.A.. Bucknell University; 

D.Ed.. The Pennsylvania Slate University 
JAMES W. SHEAFFER 

Associate Professor Emeritus of Music 

B.S.. Indiana Universin of Pennsylvania: 

M.S.. Universin of Pennsylvania 
FRANCES K. SKEATH 

Professor Emeritus of Mathematics 

A.B.. M.A.. Bucknell University: 

D.Ed.. The Pennsylvania State University 
JOHN A. STUART 

Professor Emeritus of English 

B.A., William Jewell College; 

M.A.. Ph.D.. Northwestern University 
HELEN B. WEIDMAN 

Professor Emeritus of Political Science 

A.B.. M.A.. Bucknell University; 

Ph.D.. Syracuse Universin 



PROFESSORS 

ROBERT F. FALK (1970) 

Theatre 

Marshal of the College 

B.A.. B.D.. Drew University; 

M.A.. Ph.D.. Wayne State Universin 
MORTON A. FINEMAN (1966)*** 

Physics 

A.B.. Indiana University; 

Ph.D.. University of Pittsburgh 



73 



ERNEST D. GIGLICH1972) 


SHIRLEY A. VAN MARTER (1979) 


Political Science 


English 


B.A.. Quean College; 


Dean of the College 


M.A.. SUNY at Albany: 


B.A.. Mundelein College; 


Ph.D., Syracuse University 


M.A.. Northwestern University; 


EDUARDO GUERRA (I960) 


M.A.. Ph.D.. University of Chicago 


Religion 




B.D . Southern Methodist University; S.T.M.. 




Ph.D.. Union Theological Seminary 




JOHN G. HANCOCK (1967) 


ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS 


Psychology 




B s . M.S.. Bucknell University; 


ROBERT B. ANGSTADT (1967) 


Ph.D., The Pennsylvania Slate University 


Biology 


JOHN G. HOLLENBACK (1952) 


B.S.. Ursinas College; 


Business Administration 


M.S.. Ph.D.. Cornell University 


B.S.. MB. A.. University of Pennsylvania 


HOWARD C. BERTHOLD. JR. (1976) 


JAMES K. HUMMER (1962) 


Psychology 


Chemistr\ 


B.A.. Franklin and Marshall College; 


B.N.S.. Tufts University; 


M.A. University of Iowa: 


M.S.. Middlebury College: 


Ph.D.. The University of Massachusetts 


Ph.D.. University of North Carolina 


GARY M. BOERCKEL (1979)** 


EMILY R. JENSEN (1969)** 


Music 


English 


B.A.. B.M.. Oberlm College; 


B.A.. Jamestown College: 


M.M.. Ohio University; 


M.A.. University of Denver: 


D.M.A.. University of Iowa 


Ph.D.. The Pennsylvania Stale University 


JON R. BOGLE (1976) 


ROGER W. OPDAHL ( 1963) 


Art 


Economics 


B.F.A.. B.S.. M.F.A.. Tyler School of Art; 


A.B.. Hofstra University; 


Temple University 


M.A.. Columbia University; 


CLARENCE W. BURCH (1962) 


D.Ed.. The Pennsylvania Slate University 


Physical Education 


JOHN F. PIPER. JR.. (1969) 


B.S.. M.Ed.. University of Pittsburgh 


History 


JACK D. DIEHL. JR. (1971)** 


A.B.. Lafavette College; 


Biology 


B.D.. Yale University; 


B.S.. M.A., Sam Houston State University; 


Ph.D.. Duke 1 'niversity 


M.S.. Ph.D.. University of Connecticut 


JOHN A. RADSPINNER (1957) 


RICHARD R. ERICKSON (1973) 


Chemistry 


Astronomy and Physics 


B.S.. University of Richmond: 


B.A.. Universtiv of Minnesota; 


M.S. Virginia Polytechnic Institute; 


M.S.. Ph.D.. University of Chicago 


D.Sc. Carnegie-Mellon University 


BERNARD P. FLAM (1963) 


LOGAN A. RICHMOND (1954) 


Spanish 


Accounting 


A.B.. New York University; 


B.S.. Lycoming College: 


M.A.. Harvard University; 


MB. A.. New York University; 


Ph.D.. University of Wisconsin 


C.P.A. (Pennsylvania) 


DAVID A. FRANZ (1970) 


JANET A. RODGERS (1981) 


Chemistry 


Nursing 


A.B.. Princeton University; 


8.5.. Wagner College; 


M.A.T.. The Johns Hopkins University; 


M.A.. Ph.D.. New York University 


Ph.D.. University of Virginia 


RODGER D. SHIPLEY (1967) 


EDWARD G. GABRIEL (1977) 


Art 


Biology 


B.A.. Otterhein College; 


B.A.. M.A.. Alfred University ; 


M.F.A.. Cranbrook Academy of Art 


M.S.. Ph.D.. The Ohio Suite University 



74 



CHARLES L. GETCHELL (1967) 


MICHAEL G. ROSKIN ( 1972)* 


Mathematics 


Political Science 


B.S.. University of Massachusetts; 


A.B.. University of California at Berkeley; 


M.A.. Ph.D.. Harvard University 


M.A.. University of California at Los Angeles; 


STEPHEN R. GRIFFITH (1970)** 


Ph.D.. The American University 


Philosophy 


FRED M. THAYER. JR. (1976) 


A.B.. Cornell University; 


Music 


M.A.. Ph.D.. University of Pittsburgh 


A.B.. Syracuse University; 


DAVID K. HALEY (1980) 


B.M.. Ithaca College; 


Mathematics 


M.M.. SUNY at Binghamton; 


B.A.. Acadia University; 


D.M.A.. Cornell University 


M.S.. P.D.. Queen's University: 


H. BRUCE WEAVER (1974) 


Habil. . Universitat Mannheim 


Business Administration 


RICHARD A. HUGHES (1970) 


B.B.A.. Stetson University; 


Religion 


J.D.. Vanderbilt University; 


B.A.. Indiana Central College; 


MB. A.. Florida Technological University 


S.T.B.. Ph.D.. Boston University 


JOHN M. WHELAN, JR. (1971) 


BRUCE M. HURLBERT (1982) 


Philosophy 


Director of Library Services 


B.A.. University of Notre Dame; 


B.A.. The Citadel; 


Ph.D.. The University of Texas at Austin 


M.S.L.S.. Florida State University 


STANLEY T. WILK (1973) 


MOON H. JO (1975) 


Anthropology 


Sociology 


B.A.. Hunter College; 


B.A.. Valparaiso University; 


Ph.D.. University of Pittsburgh 


M.A.. Howard University; 


ROBERT A. ZACCARIA (1973)** 


Ph.D.. New York University 


Biology 


FORREST E. KEESBURY ( 1970)*** 


8/4.. Bridgewater College; 


Education 


Ph.D.. University of Virginia 


fi.5.. Defiance College; M.A.. Bowling Green State 




University; ED.. Lehigh University 




ROBERT H. LARSON (1969) 




History 




B.A.. The Citadel: 


ASSISTANT PROFESSORS 


M.A.. Ph.D.. University of Virginia 




PAUL A. MacKENZIE (1970) 


JERRY D. ALLEN (1984) 


German 


Theatre 


A.B.. A.M.. Ph.D.. Boston University 


B.F.A.. M.F.A.. Utah State University 


ROBERT J. B. MAPLES (1969) 


BERNARD J. BALLEWEG (1985) 


French 


Psychology 


A.B.. University of Rochester; 


B.S.. Colorado State University; 


Ph.D.. Yale University 


M.A.. Ph.D.. University of Montana 


RICHARD J. MORRIS ( 1976) 


RICHARD J. BARKER ( 1982) 


History 


Spanish 


B.A.. Boston State College; 


B.A.. Hamilton College; 


M.A.. Ohio University; 


M.A.. University of Iowa; 


Ph.D.. New York University 


Ph.D.. University of Oregon 


DAVID J. RIFE (1970) 


SUSAN K. BEIDLER (1975) 


English 


Collection Management Services Librarian 


B.A.. University of Florida: 


B.A.. University of Delaware ; 


M.A.. Ph.D.. Southern Illinois University 


M.L.S.. University of Pittsburgh 




ANDRZEJ J. BUCKI (1986) 


*On Sabbatical Fall Semester 1986 


Mathematics 


**On Sabbatical Spring Semester 1987 


6.5. Maria Curie-Sklodowska University 


***On Leave of Absence 1986-87 


M.S. Maria Curie-Sklodowska University 



75 



CHRIS CHERRINGTON (1983) 


ELDON F. KUHNS, II (1979) 




Education 


Accounting 




B.S., University of Oklahoma; 


A.B., Lycoming College; M. Accounting. 




M.Ed.. Ph.D.. University of Virginia 


University of Oklahoma; C.P.A. (Pennsyl 


vania) 


JOHN H. CONRAD (1959)* 


CAROLE MOSES (1982) 




Education 


English 




B.S., Mansfield State College; 


B.A.. Adelphi University; 




M.A., New York University 


M.A.. The Pennsylvania State Universirw 




SANTUSHT S. DeSlLVA (1983) 


Ph.D.. SUNY at Binghamton 




Mathematics 


BRADLEY NASON 




B.Sc. Universin of Sri Lanka; 


Mass Communication 




M.A.. Ph.D.. University of Pittsburgh 


-4.fi., Lycoming College 




DAVID FISHER (1984) 


M.A.. in Communications, The American 
DORIS P. PARRISH (1983) 


University 


Physics 


Nursing 

B.S.. SUNY at Pittsburgh; 

M.S., Russell Sage College 




B.S.. The Pennsylvania State University; 
M.S.. Ph.D.. University of Delaware 




KAREN S. GINGROW (1985) 


JUDITH A. POTTMEYER (1984) 




Nursing 


Biology 




B.S.. M.S.. Vanderhilt University 


6.5., Clarion State College; 




AMY GOLAHNY (1985) 


Ph.D., Washington State University 




Art 


SUBIR ROY (1984) 




B.A.. Brandeis University; 


Mathematics 




M.A.. Williams College — Clark Art Institute; 


B.S., M.S., Jadavpur University; 




M.Phil., and Ph.D.. Columbia University 


Ph.D.. Indian Institute of Technology; 




ELSIE M. GOLD (1984) 


M.S.. University of Wisconsin 




English 


KATHRYN M. RYAN (1981) 




B.A.. Herbert Lehman College; 


Psychology 




M.A.. Ph.D.. University of Rochester 


B.S., University of Illinois; 




GEOFFREY L. GORDON (1981) 


M.S.. Ph.D.. Universin of Pittsburgh 




Business Administration 


GENE D. SPRECHINI (1981) 




B.S. . Lehigh University; 


Mathematics 




M.B.A.. Duke University; C.P.I.M. 


B.S.. Wilkes College; 




THOMAS J. HENNINGER (1966) 


M.A.. Ph.D.. SUNY at Binghamton 




Director of Computer Services; Mathematics 


LARRY R. STRAUSER (1973) 




B.S. , Wake Forest College; 


Sociology 




M.A.. University of Kansas 


A.B., Lycoming College; 




OWEN F. HERRING (1965) 


M.P.A.. University of Arizona 




Philosophy 

B.A.. Wake Forest College 


EDWARD C. WALLACE (1985) 




Mathematics 




JANET HURLBERTH985) 


B.S.. Miami University 
M.S.. Rutgers State University 




Instructional Services Librarian 


Ph.D.. The University of Texas of Austin 




B.A.. M.A.. University of Denver 


BUDD F. WHITEHILL (1957) 




GRANT L. JEFFERS (1983) 


Physical Education 




Music 


B.S.. Lock Haven State College: M.Ed.. 




B.A.. Williams College; 


The Pennsylvania State University 




MM., University of Cincinnati: 


RICHARD E. WIENECKE (1982) 




Ph.D.. University of California, Los Angeles 


Accounting 




WILLIAM E. KEIG (1980) 


A.B., Lycoming College; 




Astronomy and Physics 


M.S., Bucknell University 




A.B.. University of California at Santa Cruz; 


M.B.A., Long Island University; 




M.S., Ph.D., University of Chicago 


C.P.A. (Pennsylvania and New York) 





76 



FREDRIC M. WILD. JR. (1978) 


GERARD M. McKEEGAN 




English 


Nursing 




B.A.. Emory University; 


B.S., Philadelphia College of Pharmacy 




M.A., Ph.D., Ohio State University; 


and Science 




M.Div.. Yale Divinity School 






MELVIN C. ZIMMERMAN (1979) 






Biology 


PART-TIME FACULTY 




B.S., SUNY at Cortland; 






M.S.. Ph.D.. Miami University 


MARY P. BAGGETT(1977) 




***0n Leave of Absence 1986-87 


Chemistry 

B. A., Regis College; M.A., Wellesley College 
ROGER DAVIS (1984) 
Mathematics 




INSTRUCTORS 


M.S., Bucknell University 
ROME A. HANKS (1982) 




GAIL ALTENBERGER (1986) 

Business Administration 

A.B.. Lycoming College; 

M.B., Carnegie-Mellon University 
SALLY ANN ATKINSON (1983) 

Nursing 

B.S.N. . Texas Woman's University; 

M.S.N. , University of Texas, 

Health Science Center at San Antonio 


Art 

B.A., M.F.A., The Pennsylvania State University 




JAYANTHI SRINIVASAN (1983) 
Mathematics 

6.5., University of Madras; 
M.S., New York University 




KEN SAWYER (1983) 
Mass Communication 
LOUISE M. STONE (1986) 




CHRISTY C. DUNKELBERGER (1985) 
Nursing 
B.S.N., Duquesne University; 


English 

B.A., M.A... University of Michigan 




MARY WOLF 




M.S.N., University of Pittsburgh 


Political Science 




MICHELLE S. FICCA (1985) 
Nursing 


B.A., St. Mary's College 
M.P.A.. University of Michigan 




6.5. . Stroudsburg State University; 






M.S., The Pennsylvania State University 






DEBORAH J. HOLMES (1976) 


APPLIED MUSIC TEACHERS 




Physical Education 






B.S.. M.S., The Pennsylvania Stale University 


DI ANNE COOPER (1986) 




KATHLEEN D. PAGANA (1982)*** 


Violin 




Nursing 


B.M., Oberlin College 




B.S.N. , University of Maryland; 


M.M., University of Michigan 




M.S.N.. University of Pennsylvania 


GARYGUTH (1983) 

Guitar 

6.5.. Indiana University of Pennsylvania 
RICHARD J. LAKEY (1979) 




LECTURERS & SPECIAL APPOINTMENTS 


Organ and Piano 

A.B., Westminster Choir College; M.A.. 




RHONDA L. BIRD, R.D. (1986) 


Indiana University of Pennsylvania 




B.A., Indiana University 


ALBERT NACINOVICH (1972) 




NANCY B. COOLEY (1981) 


Brass 




Worksite Health Program Coordinator — CHIP 


B.A. in Music Education, Mansfield University 




A.B., Lycoming College 


M.S. in Music Education. Ithaca College 




DON M. LARRABEE II (1972) 


CATHERINE PAYN (1983) 




Lecturer in Law 


Voice 




A.B., Franklin and Marshall College; 


B.M., B. Church M., Westminster Choir College; 




LL.B., Fordham University 


M.M.. Voice, West Virginia University 





77 



MARY RUSSELL (1936) 
Piano 

MB.. Susquehanna University; M.A., 
The Pennsylvania State University 



ALBERT J. STUNKARD (1980) 

Director of Institute of Community Health 

B.S.. Yale University; M.D., Columbia University 

HERK VAN TONGEREN (1984) 
Sculpture 
Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of Sculpture 



ADJUNCT FACULTY & STAFF 

BROOKE BARRIE(1984) 

Sculpture 

Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of Sculpture 
MICHAEL R. J. FELIX (1980) 

Director. County Health Improvement Program 

B.S.. Cortland University 
JAMES WALTER HUFFMAN (1984) 

Assistant Technical Director of Arena Theatre 

B.A.. in Studio Art, B.A., in Theatre. 

Bloomsburg University 
JON LASH (1984) 

Sculpture 

Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of Sculpture 
ANDRZEJ PITYNSKI (1984) 

Sculpture 

Johnson Atelier Technical Institute of Sculpture 



MEDICAL STAFF 

FREDERIC C. LECHNER, M.D. 

College Physician 

B.S.. Franklin and Marshall College: 

M.D., Jefferson Medical College 
ROBERTS. YASUL M.D. 

College Surgeon 

M.D., Temple University 
EVELYNN L. SEAMAN. R.N. 

College Nurse 

Williamsport Hospital School of Nursing 
MARY J. VESTERMARK (1977) 

Counselor 

A.B., Oberlin; M.A.. Stetson University; 

Ph.D.. University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill 




78 



ATHLETICS STAFF 

JANIS ARP Field Hockey Coach 

RALPH AUGUSTINE Equipment Manager 

CLARENCE W. BURCH Men's Basketball Coach 

JIM BURGET Head Track Coach 

ROBERT L. CURRY Assistant Athletic Director 

REES DANEKER Assistant Men's Basketball Coach 

MIKE FIAMINGO Assistant Wrestling Coach 

DAVID L. FORTIN Assistant Wrestling Coach 

ROBERT L. GEORGE Assistant Football Coach 

FRANK L. GIRARD1 Athletic Director. 

Head Football Coach 

EUGENE HENDERSCHED Golf Coach 

DEBORAH J. HOLMES Women's Tennis Coach 

MICHAEL HUDOCK .. Assistant Men's Basketball Coach 

ABBY LEVINE Club Volleyball Coach 

TERRY B. MANTLE Assistant Football Coach 

JOSEPH G. MARK Men's Tennis Coach 

SCOTT R. McLEAN Assistant Football Coach 

J. SCOTT McNEILL Soccer Coach 

ALAN J. MORGAN Men's JV Basketball Coach 

JOHN F. PIPER. JR Cross Country Coach 

KIMBERLY ROCKEY Assistant Athletic Director. 

Women's Basketball Coach 

PATRICK SCHEMERY Assistant Football Coach 

MIKE STANZIONE Assistant Track Coach 

BUDD WHITEHILL Wrestling Coach 

DONALD R. WHITFORD. JR Head^ Trainer 

STEVEN R. WISER Assistant Football Coach 



ADMINISTRATIVE ASSISTANTS 

Katherine Baker-Fiedler Assistant to Director of 

Administrative Services 

Rebecca Bastian Data Entry Clerk 

Robert E. Bay Grounds Foreman 

Nathalie Beck Secretary. Residence Life Office 

Emily C. Biichle Coordinator 

Facilities Scheduling/Purchasing 

Helen J. Boe Typist/Clerk Admissions 

Crystal E. Bogert Secretary. Education Department 

Marlene Bovven AV/ILL Library Assistant 

Barbara Bowes Bookstore Assistant 

Beth A. Brossman Gift Records Clerk 

Barbara J. Carl in Data Entry. Admissions 

Richard L. Cowher Press Operator 

Elizabeth G. Cowles Career Development Secretary 

June V. Creveling Secretary. Buildings & Grounds 

Mary Dahlgren Admissions Data Entry Assistant 

Gladys Engel Secretary. Theatre Department 

Lisa R. Engel Secretary. Financial Aid Office 

June L. Evans Secretary. Nursing Department 



Robert W. Faus Assistant Press Operator 

Mary M. Fleming Research Assistant. CHIP 

S. Jean Gair Secretary. Music and Art Department 

Imre Gajari. Jr Computer Programmer/Operator 

Irene V. Gohrig .... Secretary to Dean of Student Services 

John E. Gohrig Dispatcher. Supplies & Mail 

Judith Hart Secretary. Biology and Chemistry Departments 

Diane Hassinger Secretary to Executive 

Director of Institutional Advancement 

Mary C. Hendricks Supervisor of Housekeeping 

Esther L. Henninger . Secretary to Director of Admissions 

Bernadine G. Hileman Office Services Coordinator 

Barbara E. Horn Secretary to Athletics Director 

Judy Knittle Faculty Secretary 

Denise M. Koch Secretary, Athletics Office 

Gale D. Laubacher Financial Aid Assistant 

Abby S. Levine Reference Assistant. Library 

Lorraine Little Secretary. Student Activities 

Shirley D. Lloyd Relief Switchboard Operator 

D. Maxine McCormick Recorder 

Doris F. McCoy Data Entry. Alumni 

Glenn E. McCreary Slide Clerk. Art 

Ellen Moon Secretary to President 

Marilyn Mullings Faculty Secretary 

Phyllis B. Myers Secretary to 

Director of Alumni Relations 

Marion R. Nyman Secretary to Treasurer 

Kimberly A. Owen Acquisitions Assistant. Library 

Rosalie Pfaff Switchboard Operator 

David W. Poeth Assistant to Director of 

Buildings and Grounds 

Pearl Ringler Bookstore Assistant 

Fern L. Schon Loan Coordinator. Business Office 

Roxanne L. Seddon Secretary to Registrar 

Patricia Strauss-Cundiff Systems Analyst 

Sheran L. Swank Faculty Secretary 

Patricia J. Triaca Cataloging Assistant. Library 

Sharon A. Vedder Computer Programmer/Operator 

Vickie L. Weaver Cashier/Bookkeeper 

Diana L. Webster Records & Data Manager. 

Registrar's Office 

Geraldine H. Wescott Periodicals Assistant in Library 

Loretta M. Whipkey Secretary to Director of 

Public Relations 

Donald R. Whitford. Jr Athletic Trainer 

Cathleen R. Wild Assistant Instructional 

Services Librarian 

Madlyn L. Williams Secretary to Dean of the College 

Patricia S. Wittig Secretary. Campus Ministry Center 

Cheryl A. Yearick Library Assistant/Night 

Circulation Supervisor 



79 



1986-87 Alumni Association 
Executive Board 



The Alumni Association of Lycoming College has a mem- 
bership of nearly 1 1. 000 men and women. It is governed by an 
executive board consisting of 24 members-at-large, elected 
through mail ballot by the membership of the association. The 
board also has members representing specific geographic 
areas, the senior class president, the student body president, 
and past presidents of the last graduating class and the Student 
Association of Lycoming College. The association annually 
designates one alumni representative as a nominee for a three- 
year term on the College board of trustees. The Director of 
Alumni and Parent Relations directs the activities of the alum- 
ni office. The Alumni Association has the following purpose 
as stated in its constitution: "As an off-campus constituency, 
the association's purpose is to seek ways of maintaining an 
active and mutually beneficial relationship between the Col- 
lege and its alumni, utilizing their talents, resources and coun- 
sel to further the objective and program of Lycoming Col- 
lege." 

All former students of Williamsport Dickinson Seminary 
and all former students who have successfully completed one 
year of study at Williamsport Dickinson Junior College or 
Lycoming College are considered members of the association. 

Acting as the representative of alumni on the campus and 
working also with undergraduates, the alumni office is re- 
sponsible for keeping alumni informed and interested in the 
programs, growth, and activities of the College through regu- 
lar publications mailed to all alumni on record. Arrangements 
for Homecoming, class reunions, club meetings, and similar 
activities are coordinated through this office. Through the 
Lycoming College Fund, the alumni office is closely associ- 
ated with the development program of the College. Com- 
munications to the alumni association should be addressed to 
the Office of Alumni and Parent Relations. 

1986-87 ALUMNI ASSOCIATION 
EXECUTIVE BOARD 



Otto L. Sonder, Jr. (Dr.) "46, Oneonta, NY 

Nancy Flory Spannuth (Mrs.) '64, State College, PA 

Richard E. Wienecke '66, Williamsport, PA 

"Eight additional members will begin their three-year term 
in June 1986. Officers are then elected from within the 
Board. 

Members of the Board 
Serving a One-Year Term 

Student Association of Lycoming College (SALC), Presi- 
dent — Craig W. Heal '87, York, PA 
Senior Class President — E. Lynn McManness '87, Get- 
tysburg, PA 

1986 Class President — Elizabeth J. Barrick '86, Belvi- 
dere, NJ 

Immediate Past President of SALC — Kenneth R. Schmidt 
'86, Coral Springs, FL 

Alumni Representatives to 
Lycoming College Board of Trustees 

1986 — Mary R. Schweikle (Dr.) '63, Montoursville, PA 

1987 — Robert W. Edgar (Congressman) '65, Glen Rid- 
dle, PA 

1988 — Seth D. Keller '65, Williamsport. PA 

Area Alumni Representatives 

Charles J. Kocian '50 — Washington, DC 

Ann E. Weitzel '79 — Southcentral Pennsylvania 

Kent T. Baldwin '64 — Greater Williamsport 

James G. Scott '70 — New England 

Patrick J. Cerillo '77 — Northern New Jersey 

Kimberly Martin Koehl '78 — Southern New Jersey 

Barry C. Hamilton '70 — Greater Philadelphia 

Robert & Marjorie Ferrell Jones '48 & '50 — Syracuse/ 

Rochester Area 



Term Expires June 1987 
Steven B. Barth '78, Danville, PA 
Romain F. Bastian '61, Milton. PA 
Cindy L. Bell (Miss) '82. Rochester, NY 
H. Ridge Canaday. Jr. '66. Tallahassee, FL 
Richard H. Felix '56, Williamsport. PA 
Yvonne Smith Kaiser (Mrs.) '64. Williamsport, PA 
Wayne M. Moffatt '63, Montoursville, PA 
Dorothy Ferrell Sandmeyer (Mrs.) '43 & '63, Montgom- 
ery, PA 

Term Expires June 1988 

Carolyn Moday Edwards (Mrs.) '61, Williamsport, PA 

Robert V. Haas '58, Montoursville. PA 

Kay Stenger Huffman (Mrs.) '60, Williamsport, PA 

David L. Phillips (The Rev.) '63, Williamsport. PA 

Mary Johnson Smith (Mrs.) '59, Williamsport. PA 



80 



Index 



Academic Advisement 8 

Academic Calendar 70 

Academic Honesty 11 

Academic Honors 12 

Academic Program 5 

Academic Standing 11 

Accounting Curriculum 21 

Accounting-Mathematics (EIM) .... 22 

Accreditation 4 

Administrative Assistants 79 

Administrative Staff 72 

Admission 62 

Admissions Deposit 64 

Admissions Office 63 

Admission Policy 62 

Admission Standards 62 

Advanced Placement 11 

Advanced Standing by Transfer .... 62 

Advisory Committees 8 

Health Professions 9 

Legal Professions 9 

Medical Technoloy 9 

Theological Professions 9 

Allopathic Medicine. Advisement for 9 

American Studies (EIM) 22 

Anthropology Curricululm 56 

Application Fee and Deposits 64 

Application Process 62 

Applied Music Requirements 47 

Art Curriculum 23 

Astronomy and Physics Curriculum 25 

Athletics Training 52 

Athletic Staff 79 

Audit 15 

Awards 12 

BFA Degree 5 

Biology Curriculum 27 

Board of Trustees 71 

Books and Supplies 64 

BSN Degree 5 

Business Administration Curriculum 29 

Campus Facilities 68 

Capitol Semester 18 

Career Development Services 60 

Chemistry Curriculum 31 

Christian Ministry, Advisement for 9 

Class Attendance 11 

College and the Church 4 

College Directory 71 

College Level Examination Program 

(CLEP) 12 

Community Scholarships 67 

Computer Science Curriculum 44 

Conduct. Standards of 61 

Contents 2 



Contingency Deposits 64 

Cooperative Programs 15 

Engineering 16 

Environmental Studies 16 

Forestry 16 

Medical Technology 16 

Military Science 17 

Optometry 16 

Podiatric Medicine 17 

Sculpture 17 

Counseling, Academic 8 

Counseling, Personal 60 

Course Credit by Examination 11 

Course Descriptions 21 

Criminal Justice (EIM) 32 

Curriculum 21 

Damage Charges 60 

Degree Programs 5 

Degree Requirements 5 

Dental School, Advisement for 9 

Departmental Honors 14 

Departmental Majors 7 

Deposits 64 

Deposit Refunds 64 

Distribution Requirements 6 

English 6 

Fine Arts : 6 

Foreign Language 6 

History and Social Science 7 

Mathematics 6 

Natural Science 7 

Philosophy 6 

Religion 6 

Early Admission Procedure 62 

Economics Curriculum 33 

Education Curriculum 34 

Education Financing Plans 67 

Educational Opportunity Grants .... 66 
Engineering. Cooperative Program 16 

English Curriculum 36 

English Requirement 6 

Entrance Examinations (CEEB) .... 11 

Entry Fees and Deposits 64 

Environmental Studies 16 

Established Interdisciplinary Major 

(EIM) 7 

Expenses 64 

Faculty 73 

Federal Grants and Loans 66 

Fees 64 

Financial Aid 65 

Financial Assistance 65 

Financial Information 65 

Fine Arts Requirements 5 

Foreign Language Requirement .... 6 



Foreign Languages and 

Literatures Curriculum 37 

Forestry, Cooperative Program 16 

French Curriculum 38 

General Expenses 64 

German Curriculum 38 

Grading System 10 

Graduation Requirements 5 

Grants-in-Aid 66 

Greek Curriculum 39 

Health Professions Careers 9 

Health Services 61 

Hebrew Curriculum 39 

History Curriculum 40 

History of the College 4 

History Requirements 

Honor Societies 12 

Independent Study 14 

Interdisciplinary Majors 

Established Majors (EIM) 7 

Individual Majors (IIM) 7 

International Studies 42 

Internship Programs 15 

Interviews 62 

Johnson Atelier 23 

Legal Professions, Advisement for 9 

Literature (EIM) 43 

Loans 67 

Location 4 

London Semester 18 

Major 7 

Admission to 7 

Departmental 7 

Interdisciplinary (EIM, IIM) 7 

Mass Communication (EIM) 43 

Mathematical Sciences 44 

Mathematics Requirements 6 

May Term 15 

Medical School, Advisement for ... 9 

Medical History 62 

Medical Staff 61 

Medical Technology 16 

Military Science 17 

Ministerial Grants-in-Aid 65 

Minor 8 

Music Curriculum 46 

National Direct Student Loans 

(NDSL) 66 

Natural Science Requirement 7 

Near East Culture and Archaeology 

(EIM) 48 

Non-Payment of Fees Penalty 65 

Nursing 48 

Optometry 16 

Optometry School. Advisement for 9 



81 



Osteopathy School, Advisement for 9 

Overseas Studies Opportunities 15 

Part-time Student Opportunities .... 15 

Payment of Fees 64 

Payments, Partial 64 

Penalty for Non-Payment of Fees 65 

Personal Counseling 60 

Philadelphia Semester 18 

Philosophy Curriculum 50 

Philosophy Requirement 6 

Physical Education Curriculum 52 

Physics Curriculum 26 

Placement Services 60 

Podiatric Medicine. Cooperative 

Program 17 

Political Science Curriculum 52 

Psychology Curriculum 53 

Purpose and Objectives 3 

Refunds 64 

Registration 9 

Regulations (Standards of Conduct) 61 

Religion Curriculum 54 

Religion Requirement 6 

Repeated Courses 10 



Requirements. Distribution 6 

Requirements for Admission 62 

Requirements for Graduation 5 

Reserve Officer Training Corps 

Program (ROTC) 17 

Residence 60 

Residence Halls 60 

Scholarships 65 

Scholarships (ROTC) 67 

Scholar Program 18 

Sculpture 23 

Selection Process 62 

Social Science Requirement 7 

Sociology-Anthropology Curriculum 56 

Spanish Curriculum 39 

Special Features 14 

Independent Study 14 

Internship Program 15 

May Term 15 

Overseas Studies Opportunities 15 

Standards of Admission 62 

Standards of Conduct 61 

State Grants and Loans 66 

Student Enrichment Semester (SES) 18 



Student Records 11 

Student Services 60 

Study Abroad 15 

Study Skills Seminar 61 

Summer Session Calendar 70 

Supplemental Educational Opportunity 

Grant (SEOG) 66 

Theatre Curriculum 58 

Theological Professions, 

Advisement 9 

Transfer 62 

Trustees 71 

Unit Course System 9 

United Nations Semester 18 

Veterans. Approval 62 

Veterinary School. Advisement for 9 

Washington Semester 18 

Withdrawal from College 64 

Women's Studies 59 

Work-Study Grants 66 

Writing Across The 

Curriculum Program 6 







82